Notes Of Consumer-behaviour 372w52

MK 0002 Consumer Behaviour Contents Unit 1 Understanding Consumer Behaviour Unit 2 Consumers and Market Segmentation Unit 3 Environmental and Group influences on Consumer Behaviour Unit 4 Perception and Learning Unit 5 Individual Determinants of Consumer Behaviour Unit 6 Consumer Decision Process Unit 7 Consumer Research Unit 8 Diffusion of Innovation Unit 9 Consumerism and Marketing Ethics Unit 10 Business Buyer Behaviour and Decisions Reference Edition: Fall 2007 th

BKID – B0815 5 Dec. 2007

1 28

47 91 124 187 226 251 276 310 335

Brig. (Dr). R. S. Grewal VSM (Retd.) Pro Vice Chancellor Sikkim Manipal University of Health, Medical & Technological Sciences Board of Studies Mr. Rajen Padukone Member – Academic Senate, Sikkim Manipal University Ms. Vimala Parthasarathy Prof. K. V. Varambally HOD Director Convener Manipal Institute of Management Department of Management & Commerce Manipal Directorate of Distance Education Sikkim Manipal University Prof. Raj Dorai Industry Consultant and Visiting Faculty, IBA, IFIM and BIM, Bangalore

Mr. Jagadeesh Assistant Professor Department of Management & Commerce, Directorate of Distance Education, Sikkim Manipal University

Mr. Umesh Maiya Assistant Professor Department of Management & Commerce Directorate of Distance Education Sikkim Manipal University

Mr. R. Ravindra Rao Senior Faculty Manipal Institute of Management Manipal

Content Preparation Team Content Writing and Compilation Dr. B. S. Prakash Visiting Faculty Management Schools in Bangalore Bangalore Format Editing Mr. Jagadeesh Assistant Professor Department of Management & Commerce Directorate of Distance Education Sikkim Manipal University

Language Editing Ms. A. K. Prathibha Visiting Faculty Management Schools in Bangalore Bangalore

Edition: Fall 2007 This book is a distance education module comprising of written and compiled learning material for our students. All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced in any form by any means without permission in writing from Sikkim Manipal University of Health, Medical and Technological Sciences, Gangtok, Sikkim. Printed and Published on behalf of Sikkim Manipal University of Health, Medical and Technological Sciences, Gangtok, Sikkim by Mr. Rajkumar Mascreen, GM, Manipal Universal Learning Pvt. Ltd., Manipal – 576 104. Printed at Manipal Press Limited, Manipal.

SUBJECT INTRODUCTION All marketing decisions and strategies are based on assumptions about consumer behaviour. Hence, the entire marketing management course will be relevant for the study of consumer behaviour applications. Because of growing importance, we introduced consumer behaviour as subject for MBA students. This book contains 10 units Unit 1: Deals with understanding Consumer Behaviour. Unit 2: Explains about Consumers and Market Segmentation. Unit 3: Deals with Environmental and Group influences on Consumer Behaviour. Unit 4: Explain about Perception and Learning. Unit 5: Deals with Individual Determinants of Consumer Behaviour. Unit 6: Deals with Consumer Decision Process. Unit 7: Deals with Consumer Research. Unit 8: Deals with Diffusion of Innovation. Unit 9: Explains about Consumerism and Marketing Ethics. Unit 10: Deals with Business Buyer Behaviour and Decisions.

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

Unit 1

Understanding Consumer Behaviour

Structure 1.1

Introduction Objectives

1.2

Meaning and Definition

1.3

Application of consumer behaviour knowledge to marketing Self Assessment Questions I

1.4

Why study of consumer behaviour in marketing

1.5

Areas of study under consumer behaviour Self-Assessment Questions II

1.6

Summary

1.7

Terminal Questions

1.8

Answers to Self Assessment Questions and Terminal Questions

1.1 Introduction Consumer Behaviour is the study of Individuals or Organisations and the activities undertaken by them to select, procure and use products or services to satisfy their needs and wants. In this unit, we will be studying the basics of consumer behaviour from a management perspective, along with an overview of the concepts of consumer orientation and the competitive advantages of such a practice. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Understand the meaning & definition of Consumer Behaviour.



Understand why Consumer Behaviour study is important.



Explain the linkage between Marketing Concepts & the study of Consumer Behaviour.



Understand the reasons for studying Consumer Behaviour.



Describe the areas of study under Consumer Behaviour.

Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 1

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

1.2 Meaning and Definition of Consumer Behaviour Vignette Proctor and Gamble (P&G) is an American Global Corporation established in 1837 with several successful current brands like Tide and Ariel detergent powders, Duracell batteries, Gillette safety razors, Max Factor cosmetics, Pantene hair care products, Pampers brand diapers, etc. When they entered the Japanese market for Pampers in 1977, they used American product range, American advertising and American sales and promotional strategies. The product was quite thick designed for American mothers who would leave the diapers on their babies for long periods. The Japanese mothers were however highly cleanliness minded and would change the diapers on their babies at least twice as much as the American mothers do. Seeing this opportunity many Japanese companies introduced thinner leak proof diapers better suited to Japanese mothers. This resulted in Pamper’s market share crashing to 7% in 1985 from a high of 90% in 1977. The company realized their mistakes after a market study and an improved product with one third of the original thickness was introduced. This resulted in their improving their share to about 35% in 1990 and the same product was introduced in the American market with a new brand name- “Ultra Pampers” The above example is a classic case of how a study of consumer behaviour is most important to the success or otherwise of products and

for any

marketing oriented company, such a study should be the basic starting point for all marketing strategy decisions. Definition of Consumer Behaviour and related concepts As mentioned in the introduction, “Consumer Behaviour is the study of Individuals or Organisations and the activities undertaken by them to select, procure and use products or services to satisfy their needs and wants.” Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 2

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

The activities undertaken by the consumer can be either of the following: 1. Psychological activities involving thinking processes like considering the need for the product or service, whether to purchase, what to purchase, when to purchase, how to purchase, comparing the various features and prices, reading the customer reviews etc. 2. Physical activities like going to a shop, looking and enquiring about the alternatives, visiting an e-commerce site, transacting on the e-commerce site, etc. Sheth & Mittal have further expanded this definition by including the study of various roles played by a customer like 1. The (who uses or consumes the product or service) 2. The payer (who pays for such a product or service) 3. The buyer (who physically acts to procure the product or service). The same person may play all the three roles and in several situations, there may be more than one person playing different roles. Depending on the roles being played, the behaviour and decision making process may change. Understanding consumer Behaviour is quite complicated since it involves the following factors, which have strong influence on it: 1. Cultural factors 2. Social factors 3. Personal factors 4. Psychological factors One has to study both internal factors and the external environment to have a better knowledge of such behaviour. Only when we are able to decipher this process, such knowledge can be used in taking decisions that would be most effective in achieving the marketing objectives.


Page No. 3

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

1.3 Application of consumer Behaviour knowledge to marketing  Consumer behaviour – Consumer and Managerial Perspectives Consumer Behaviour can be studied with two different perspectives. The most popular traditional way is to focus on this subject as a pure science, wherein the research findings from behavioural sciences like Psychology and also from social sciences like Sociology, Anthropology and Economics, are drawn to explain the various facets of Consumer Behaviour. The other perspective is to analyse this subject as an applied science, with emphasis on its application in business organisations. a) Consumer Perspective In this approach, Consumer behaviour study is focused on enquiring into how people buy, what they buy, when they buy and why they buy more as a pure science, not necessarily for applying to marketing decision-making. It blends

elements

from

psychology,

sociology,

socio-psychology,

anthropology and economics. It attempts to understand the buyer consumption process, both individually and characteristics

of

individual

consumers

in groups. It

such

as

studies

demographics,

psychographics, and behavioural variables in an attempt to understand people's wants. It also tries to assess influences on the consumer from groups such as family, friends, reference groups, and society in general. This approach focuses more on the nature of consumption experience rather than the purchase process. This approach may throw many insights that may or may not be actionable from a marketer’s perspective. There is no sufficient emphasis on consumer purchase decision process. Hence this approach may have limited use for marketers, since they must understand how consumers take purchase decisions if they have to influence the consumers.


Page No. 4

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

b) Managerial Perspective In this approach, consumer behaviour is studied as an applied social science and the main objective of such an approach is to find a basis for marketing strategies in business organisations. In a managerial perspective, the stress is on predicting the action sequence of a consumer decision process to help a marketer in deciding on suitable marketing strategies. As an improvement of this, a new approach was enunciated by Sheth & Mittal, who expanded the study of Consumer Behaviour to include several facets, which would be more practical while applying this knowledge to practical situations in business organisations. There are two variations in this approach, which are more meaningful from the managerial perspective: a) All the different aspects of consumer Behaviour study have been applied in this new approach to “Business Organisations” as consumers. Normally most textbooks limit such analysis to individual consumers and some of them extend it to households. But in the new approach, the behavioural aspects are looked at from the angle of business-tobusiness transactions, which are very relevant and useful in such situations. b) The second approach is in extending the consumer behaviour study, to include different roles of a customer in understanding the decision making process. Traditionally the consumer is the “” of the product or service and most of the studies limit the application of this knowledge to understand the behaviour of customers as s/Consumers. The new approach considers three roles of the customer viz. , Payer and Buyer as important, to apply this knowledge in real life situations in business organisations. In fact the title of the study is called as “Customer Behaviour” instead of “ Consumer Behaviour” to make it amply clear that all three roles of the customer have to be looked at in order to analyse & apply the various research findings more effectively. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 5

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

In the traditional methods of study of consumer behaviour, the applications get limited to mostly FMCG products and also to individual/ household s/ consumers. The second approach expands the applications of these studies to encom practically all markets and products in all types of marketing situations that would make more sense from a managerial perspective.  Consumer Orientation a) Organisational orientations Depending on the internal and external environments of organisations and also the top management philosophy, the organisations have different orientations towards their marketing policies and strategies. Some of these orientations are as follows: 1. Production Orientation: This is prevailing in most of the old traditionally managed businesses wherein the competition is less severe and the economy is in a developmental stage. The management of such firms concentrate on improving on their production facilities and their strategies will concentrate on factors like: a) Improving production efficiencies b) Reducing wastages and rejections in their factories c) Lowering costs of production d) Resorting to mass production techniques e) Wide distribution, etc. The underlying assumption of such organisations is that, the consumers are mainly looking for a cheaper product that is readily available. The classic example of this attitude is that of Henry Ford, who introduced the concept of assembly line manufacturing of automobiles. His management orientation was clear from his widely Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 6

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

quoted statement-“My customer can have a car painted in any colour that he wants so long as it is black". 2. Product Orientation: Many company management believes that, the consumers will purchase those products, which offer the best quality, a wide range of innovative features, best performance, excellent service, etc. Such managements focus their efforts on making superior products and continuously improve the quality of their products. Such companies assume that the consumer automatically goes for a superior product and that, he can efficiently evaluate the product performance and quality. They often don’t bother about getting more information from the market place either about the consumer like and dislikes, or the competitors’ products and activities. 3. Sales Orientation: This is another very common orientation of many firms. They believe that their customers voluntarily do not purchase enough quantity of their products, if left alone. Hence they resort to pressurized selling and aggressive sales promotions. The underlying assumption is that the consumers have a lot of mental resistance to buy and they need constant persuasive efforts to buy. They also assume that their sales and promotion efforts are most efficient in achieving their sales objectives. One of the examples is that of Sergio Zyman the former Chief Marketing Officer of Coca Cola whose famous quote was-“The purpose of Marketing is to sell more stuff to more people more often for more money in order to make more profit.” 4. Consumer Orientation: This is the new Marketing Concept. This is adopted successfully by many organisations and they shifted the focus of management Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 7

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

efforts to finding out the consumer preferences and then modifying their products and marketing strategies to suit the consumer needs. Consumer satisfaction is considered as the most important objective of the organisation and all the corporate policies and strategies are decided from this perspective.  Advantages and disadvantages i) Production orientation is necessary in businesses, which depend on high technology and shorter product life cycles. Companies like Intel, Microsoft, etc. have to continuously depend on intensive R&D efforts to come out with substantial innovations. They have to keep ahead of any competitor who may come out with better products. Hence such companies invest heavily in state of the art R&D facilities and also top class factories to produce such high technology products. Such orientation is also effective when the economy is in a developmental stage, with very little competition or when a company wants to expand its existing market. However totally concentrating on this concept has its own pitfalls. These companies will also have to look at what is happening to the consumer preferences and also the activities of the competitors and work out their R&D programmes accordingly so that they are not caught unawares of unexpected developments. ii) Product orientation is of very limited use today. Total concentration on the product without proper consumer behaviour knowledge is suicidal and such a policy has resulted in many companies closing down their operations. An example is that of WebTV launched in 1996 by Sony & Philips as partners. The concept was of a TV with a set top box that allowed surfing the net and also watch TV. After spending $50 million on advertising and promotion, they could get only 50,000 subscribers in US. They realized that they had misunderstood totally the behaviour of the consumer. The Internet surfers were more Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 8

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

interested in using multi media and the processor in WebTV had inadequate processing power to take care of this consumer need. Microsoft bought over WebTV and they have now developed a combination of satellite TV technology and a video recorder unit to provide interactive features for game shows, sports, etc. as well as e-mail and internet access. iii) Sales orientation is prevailing in many organisations even now. Such a concept is followed by firms which market goods and services which the consumers normally don’t think of buying like insurance policies, encyclopedias, domestic water treatment units, vacuum cleaners, etc. Companies, which are marketing commodity type of products with very little product differentiation from the competitors’ products, also resort to such aggressive selling efforts. The effectiveness of such policies are again limited if these firms ignore a proper understanding of the consumer behaviour and the market environment. With competition becoming intense and even commodities being branded total sales orientation can land such firms in serious difficulties. iv) Consumer orientation is now well accepted as the most effective concept for all organisations not only for their growth but also for even survival. There are many advantages of consumer orientation of an organisation. These can be listed as under:  Retention of customers is the immediate result of the customer orientation of an organisation. This results in enormous savings in many different ways: i) Cost of developing new customers is always much higher than retaining an existing customer. The time, effort and money spent on a new customer both before the sale is made and also after the sale is Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 9

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

quite high. The new customer will always demand a higher attention and may be even an attractive price in the initial stages. Sales persons dealing with a new customer have to put in lot more efforts and time in convincing them into buying their products. Whereas the existing customer will cost comparatively less if they are satisfied with the company’s products and service. They demand much less attention and the sales persons need very little time and energy to be spent on established customers. ii) The repeated purchases of the existing customers results in larger production volumes in the factory, which in turn results in economies of scale in manufacturing. iii) If a customer is not satisfied, this could result in increase in costs in many ways. It is to be noted that, not only the loss of the dissatisfied customer, which will cost the company. It has been found that dissatisfied customers will tell a lot more people about their bad experience, resulting in adverse word of mouth publicity. The disgruntled customer is also likely to delay the payments and also deduct some amounts while making payments. This is more so in the case of business-to-business deals. It is hence important to prevent dissatisfaction and it would be preferable to select the right customer and retain them by properly satisfying them. It is important not to create higher expectations in the customer, which is more often the case in case of Sales Oriented companies where the aggressive sales people tend to promise more than the actual product features thus raising the consumer expectations to unrealistic levels. iv) Word of Mouth publicity by a satisfied customer is the most effective and cheapest way to increase the business. Such growth does not require additional sales or marketing costs since the established customer acts as the company’s effective sales person. In fact many Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 10

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

professions like doctors, lawyers, chartered ants, etc. depend solely on word of mouth publicity since they are legally not allowed to . Such word of mouth communication is most effective in case of highly technical or high-risk products or services. Such business development obviously results in cost savings & also increased revenue without much investment from the company.  Higher prices: The satisfied customer is likely to pay a higher price since they would rather pay a than switch to a new brand or firm. There will always be some cost towards changing the suppliers especially in B2B transactions and unless there is a strong reason to do so, the satisfied customers are unlikely to change to new suppliers. They would not mind paying a reasonable and it has been found that in some specialty products the customers were ready to pay a as high as 30%. British Airways and Singapore Airlines are known for their Corporate Policy of customer orientation that does result in their customers paying a price. These companies have been able to do this because of their product excellence, service excellence, company reputation and a general customer oriented culture in their entire organisations.  The consumer orientation can also help a company in times of any business crisis that could result in temporary disruption in supply. There could be many reasons for such disruption like machinery breakdowns, labour unrest resulting in strikes/slowing down of production, unfair competition, etc. Many large well-known companies like Coca Cola, Cadbury, McDonalds, KFC, etc. have faced strong protests from political groups or sometimes due to rumours. Cadbury faced the problem when there were some reports about insects being found in some chocolates, which were stored for a long time. Coca Cola faced a crisis when some NGO found higher than permissible amount of Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 11

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

pesticide in some of their bottles. KFC & McDonalds faced social protests from some local political organisations. Many times there could be some restructuring due to mergers and acquisitions or due to changes in some government regulations. In all such cases there will be a disruption of supplies. The companies who have been consumer oriented have been found to have a loyal customer base which will either postpone their purchases or shift to a competitors’ product or service temporarily. The moment the company comes out of the crisis & restarts its supplies such loyal customers have been found to go back to them. 5. Mass Customisation: The concept of customer orientation is getting further extended, in this age of internet and computer aided design, to go to the extreme extent of Mass Customization, wherein the companies are catering to the needs of each and every consumer. One example of mass customisation is that of Mattel Toys producing the Barbie Dolls as per the requirement of each child who wishes to purchase. They have a website in which the child who wishes to purchase a Barbie doll can log on to this site & customize her own “My Design” doll. She can choose the skin colour, hairstyle, hair colour, clothes, accessories and finally the name for the doll. The company forwards this to their computer system, which then processes all the orders from thousands of consumers. These are then fed into their production planning systems and the dolls are made as per each order of each child. The dolls are then mailed to each child with the name of the doll printed on the package. Another example is that of Levi Jeans. If a consumer walks into the Original Levi's Store in Cincinnati in US, she/he will be greeted by a sales clerk with a measuring tape in hand and a personal computer on a nearby desk. He Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 12

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

will take the measurements, feed the data into a computer, make final adjustments to the blueprint of a pair of jeans that pops up on the PC screen, push the transmit key, give the customer a receipt for the payment and send the customer home. Forty-eight hours later the jeans arrive at the customer’s home, delivered by a courier. The jeans must fit the customer properly or else they can return it for a full refund. This is how it works: The PC in the retail store transmits the data to the Levi's factory. There, the computer data is received directly by a robotic tailor who cuts a bolt of denim precisely to the customer's measurements. Usually the jeans are shipped back to the store in three weeks; but for a slight extra charge, customers have the option of receiving them within 48 hours. The service is a blessing to customers, many of whom have difficulty finding jeans that fit them. When the service for such jeans was introduced, in the Cincinnati store, sales went up by 300 percent compared with the same period the previous year.  How to have the consumer orientation? Consumer Orientation comes from developing a consumer culture in the entire organisation. For this purpose the top management has to adopt Customer Satisfaction as an integral part of the corporate mission. All the corporate plans and decisions (not just the marketing plans) will have to include the understanding of Consumer Behaviour as a necessary input. The employees in the entire organisation including those in factories, R&D, s, finance, purchase, etc. should have a consumer orientation. Everyone in the firm should understand that satisfying the customer is a corporate mission to be undertaken by every employee; not just the people in Marketing Department. In fact the Marketing personnel are asked to consider the other colleagues as their internal customers & their first job is to sell to their “internal customers” - the entire concept of consumer orientation approach in each of their departments. The philosophy of Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 13

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

marketing needs to be owned by everyone from within the organization. Customer satisfaction can be achieved only when all personnel within the organisation understand the importance of the customer.  Marketing Myopia and Consumer Behaviour a) What is Marketing Myopia? Myopia also called near- or short-sightedness, is a refractive defect of the eye. Those with myopia see nearby objects clearly but distant objects appear blurred. When applied in business marketing context, this refers to the short sightedness in managerial approach to marketing. Marketing myopia is a term used in marketing. Indeed, one of the most important marketing papers ever written was that on `Marketing Myopia' by Theodore Levitt. This paper was published in the Harvard Business Review, a journal of which he was an editor. Some commentators have even gone as far as to suggest that its publication marked the beginning of the modern marketing movement in general. Its theme was that the vision of most organizations was constricted in of what they, too narrowly, saw as the business they were in. It exhorted CEOs to re-examine their corporate vision; and redefine their markets in of wider perspectives. It was successful in its impact because it was, as with all of Levitt's work, essentially practical and pragmatic. Organizations found that they had been missing opportunities, which were plain to see once they adopted the wider view. The impact of the paper was indeed dramatic. b) Examples of Marketing Myopia Marketing Myopia, by Theodore Levitt, is one of the most important ideas ever to come out of academicians. This has forever changed the business world and the way business is done. Today, most businesses are based on this theory that firms that define themselves too narrowly dig their own graves. He said that all corporate policies should emerge from the clear Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 14

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

understanding and enunciation of their business in of the benefit being accrued by the consumer from them. The alertness of the companies to understand the consumer behaviour at the very beginning of the definition of their own business formed the foundation of their businesses. The main example he gives in his essay is the railways in USA, which today is very minor. The railways were once hailed as one of the key commercial infrastructure aspect in the United States. Without the railways, the US wouldn't have been able to do the vast amount of business it currently conducts. However, today, the railways in USA are virtually insignificant, and were on the verge of bankruptcy before being nationalized by the government. Levitt explains the downfall of the railways as a result of defining their industry too narrowly. They saw themselves in the 'Railway Industry,' and thus only focused on competition from other railways. They became too comfortable when they should've been looking for ways to keep their competitive advantages. When the interstate highway system was underway and trucking and air transport became available and cheap, the railways were caught unawares resulting in heavy migration of their customers. They neglected the very basic necessity for survival of any businessunderstanding consumer behaviour. If the railways defined themselves as being in the Transportation industry, they would have perceived the threat of the competition from outside and would have acted accordingly. Today, most industries define themselves broadly so as to avoid the same fatal error as the railways in USA. A successful example of proper implementation of this theory is that of Coca Cola. Instead of considering themselves as in the business of beverages, they defined their business as that of “quenching the thirst of the consumers”. Hence, naturally their main competitor was drinking water Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 15

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

which was available everywhere. This definition resulted in their corporate policy of distribution of Coca Cola to nooks and corners by having bottling plants & also the widest possible distribution network. Another example of this is the photography companies. Companies like Eastman-Kodak and Polaroid saw themselves too narrowly as being in the photography industry. Now, they are facing severe competition from electronics firms that make scanners and digital cameras. If they defined themselves as being in the memory preservation business, they would have seen this trend early on and would not be experiencing the woes that they currently feel. A good example of another success story is Harley-Davidson. They saw that defining themselves as being in the motorcycle industry was too narrow, and changed to the more broad 'brand image' industry while keeping the motorcycles. They sell their bikes through the image the bike portrays so as to differentiate themselves from regular motorcycles and competition from the Japanese and German producers. Companies are hence forced to deal with their corporate policies at the highest level by concentrating on and understanding the consumer behaviour. Self Assessment Questions I 1. Consumer Behaviour can be studied with two different perspectives. ___________ and ___________ 2. Sheth & Mittal have expanded the definition of Consumer Behaviour by including the study of various roles played by a customer like _________, __________ and ________. 3. ___________

______________ is the new Marketing Concept which

was adopted successfully by many organisations who shifted the focus Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 16

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

of management efforts to finding out the consumer preferences and then modifying their products and marketing strategies to suit the consumer needs. 4. The concept of customer orientation is getting further extended in this age of internet & computer aided design to go to the extreme extent of __________ ___________. 5. __________ ________ can be achieved only when all personnel within the organisation understand the importance of the customer.



Consumer Satisfaction and Marketing Concept

i)

Consumer Satisfaction as an objective: The following quotation of Mahatma Gandhi encapsulates the essence of Consumer Satisfaction as the main objective of any business: “A customer is the most important visitor on our premises. He is not dependent on us. We are dependent on him. He is not an interruption of our work. He is the purpose of it. He is not an outsider to our business. He is part of it. We are not doing him a favour by serving him. He is doing us a favour by giving us the opportunity to do so.” This customer-focused philosophy is known as the 'marketing concept'. The marketing concept is a philosophy, not a system of marketing or an organizational structure. It is founded on the belief that profitable sales and satisfactory returns on investment can only be achieved by identifying, anticipating and satisfying customer needs and desires.

ii) Marketing vs. Sales Concepts: Philip Kotler who has been considered as the world's foremost expert on the strategic practice of marketing was the first to propose the concept of Marketing as an improvement over selling concept. In the traditional selling concept, the main strategy of the company is to find customers for the product manufactured by them Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 17

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

& somehow convince the customer into buying this product. The approach is through aggressive sales & sales promotion tools with a lot of emphasis on somehow closing the sale even if it means cutting down on prices. As a contrast to this the Marketing concept emphasizes the importance of consumer needs & behaviour. The approach is to first understand the consumer needs & then approach him with an objective of satisfying him as the most important pursuit. The emphasis is on maximizing profits through consumer satisfaction rather than through just sales maximization. The aim of Marketing is to understand the consumer & his needs so well that, the product or service so developed should sell by itself. All that is required is to make customer satisfaction as an integral part of the company strategy.



Consumer Needs and Wants

a) What are Needs and Wants? Traditionally needs are understood as the basic requirements of a human being like food, clothing, shelter, air, water, etc. Wants are defined as the luxuries for which a consumer craves for. However in the context of understanding Consumer Behaviour, the definitions given by Sheth & Mittal are more precise and useful. A need is defined as the unsatisfactory condition of the customer that leads him or her to an action that will make the condition better. A want is defined as a desire to obtain more satisfaction than is absolutely necessary to improve an unsatisfactory condition. Need arousal is driven by a person’s physical or psychological discomfort. Wants occur when the person desires to take his physical or psychological condition beyond the state of minimal comfort.


Page No. 18

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

Thus food is a need when a person is hungry; but an ice cream would be a want. A basic car may satisfy the need of a person to take care of his personal transport; but a luxury car for the same person may be a want. An ordinary sweater may be the need in a hill station for a person whereas a branded expensive sweater- a want for the same person. b) Needs and Wants in different situations Need of one person may be the want of another. For example, buying a refrigerator may be a want for a poor family whereas a higher income family may consider a refrigerator as a minimal need without which they will feel the discomfort psychologically. Wants for a person may become a need for the same person depending on his stage in life. A teenager for whom a bicycle was a need when going to school may consider a scooter or a motorbike a need when going to college. He would feel psychologically uncomfortable going to college in a bicycle and hence for him the motorbike has become a need. Certain situations may also define the difference between the need and a want. In the winter season in Delhi many people in lower income groups like office boys or clerical staff normally wear full suits with jackets and ties. For them this becomes a need in that situation since they would psychologically feel the discomfort, if they don’t wear a suit, especially since all their colleagues in the same level may be wearing suits. Hence this definition of needs and wants goes beyond the traditional concept; but this concept is more relevant for understanding consumer behaviour since psychological factors are predominant in determining the consumer behaviour.


Page No. 19

Consumer Behaviour



Unit 1

Factors which decide Needs and Wants

 Personal Factors: There are many internal and external factors, which affect the needs and wants of any person. Some of these internal factors could be due to the characteristics, which are inherited from birth or may also be due to his personality traits acquired during his growth in life. Some factors could be due to the external influences on the person like for example, the culture of the society in which he is living, his level in society, his personal assets and wealth or the organisation in which he is associated.  Environmental Factors: Similarly there could be effects of the natural environment like climatic conditions, geographical environment, etc. in which the person is present or the outside developments like the level of economy, government policies or the technological advances can also influence the needs and wants.  Effects in the marketplace: There are several types of needs and wants, which decide the type of product to be procured from the market place. A few examples are: i) When both the personal needs and environmental needs are affecting the consumer: Woolen sweater in cold season, flood insurance in an area prone to flooding of river water, etc. ii) When the environmental need is there; but it is a personal want. These are the needs dictated by the geographical environment like loose fitting clothes in a hot desert town, but the consumer may go for up-market branded clothes, which are really a want of the person. iii) When the person has a need but environmentally it is a want. Examples are that of ready to eat food items like soups, which can just be cooked and eaten. The person being hungry needs food; but he goes for a want in an environmental context since he is going for Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 20

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

a technologically easy to prepare food. Shopping through e commerce sites is another example wherein the consumer is satisfying a personal need through a technological luxury of shopping on the internet. iv) When both the person is looking for a want and the environmentally also it is a want; examples include going for a music concert, buying designer clothes in a boutique, etc.

1.4 Why study of consumer behaviour in marketing a) Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy:

All

Marketing

decisions and strategies are based on assumptions about Consumer Behaviour. It is impossible to think of any aspect of decision in marketing, which can be independent of some analysis of consumer Behaviour. Before deciding on any marketing strategy, the marketers have to first base their judgments on explicit assumptions resulting from sound theory and research rather than implicit intuition. Knowledge of consumer Behaviour can give an important competitive advantage and greatly reduce the odds of bad decisions. The first step in developing a Marketing strategy is to analyse the market in which the firm is operating. This requires a detailed analysis of the organisation’s capabilities, strengths and weaknesses of competitors, the economic and technological factors affecting the market and finally, the current and future potential customers in the market. On the basis of the analysis of consumers at this stage, the company identifies the groups of individuals, households or firms with similar needs. These are known as market segments, which can be described in of demographics, geographic locations, lifestyles, etc. The firm can then select one or more of these segments as target markets based on their capabilities in comparison with the competition, in the given current and forecasted Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 21

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

economic and technological environment. The next step is to formulate the marketing strategy. The objective of the marketing strategy is to provide the customer with more value than the competitor’s brands while maximising the profits for the firm. Marketing strategy is then formulated in of the marketing mix. This involves the determination of the four ‘P’s of marketing viz. Product features, pricing, promotional mix and distribution policies, which would offer superior value to the customer. It is most important to note that an analysis of the consumer is the key to formulate a sound marketing strategy and the reaction of the consumer to the marketing mix determines ultimately the success or failure of the strategy. b) Study of Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Careers: Most students of Consumer Behaviour aspire for careers in Marketing Management, Sales or Advertising. Many students expect that the skills acquired by them in these courses will be like ing or science subjects wherein a set of rules can be applied across a wide variety of situations to arrive at the correct solution. Unfortunately the consumer is a living, breathing, changing and many times stubborn individual and dealing with such an uncertain element can be very frustrating to such students. However an understanding of the consumer behaviour in its proper perspective can bring out many understandable situations, which can be applied in developing suitable marketing strategies. This can then become a very exciting field. This is not to suggest that scientific principles and procedures are not applicable in such situations. In fact many scientific theories and models of psychology, psychoanalysis, sociology, etc. have been successfully utilized in the study of consumer behaviour. Successful utilization of these principles in practical situations have to be done with proper human judgments which in itself can be a very challenging task leading to excitement and job satisfaction. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 22

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

1.5 Areas of study under consumer Behaviour The entire marketing management course will be relevant for the study of consumer behaviour applications since the very fundamental concept of marketing is to keep the consumer in the centre and then formulate all the other strategies.

However for the purpose of this course we shall be

covering the following subjects from the perspective of the application of various consumer behaviour concepts. a) Consumers and market segmentation:

In this unit we shall be

covering the definition of market segmentation and how it is related to consumer behaviour. Then we shall be covering the bases for market segmentation, criteria for effective market segmentation and finally strategies of market segmentation. b) Environmental influences on consumer Behaviour: In this unit we shall be discussing the influence of various environmental factors such as cultures, subcultures, social class & life styles on the behaviour of a consumer. c) Influence of group on consumer Behaviour: The groups around him/her influence the consumer in his Behaviour and this will be the subject of study in the next unit. The groups which have maximum influence on a consumer, like social groups, reference groups and family will be discussed in detail in this unit. d) Individual determinants of consumer Behaviour: Various internal and external factors mold the behaviour of any individual. Eminent psychologists, psychoanalysts, sociologists and economists to identify and explain the behaviours of different individuals, have developed various theories and models. The consumer behaviour researchers to successfully explain the behaviour of a consumer in a market situation have adopted many such theories. Many of these concepts pertain to consumer motivation, consumer perception and learning, personal Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 23

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

attitudes, personality, etc. and these concepts will be covered in the next unit. e) Consumer Decision process: There are different steps involved in the decision making process of a consumer and these have to be studied in detail to understand and work out many strategies in marketing. This is the subject that will be covered in the next unit. f)

Consumer research: Marketing research with respect to consumer behaviour involves various quantitative and qualitative techniques and a study of these techniques is essential to any marketer to ensure a scientifically developed strategy. In this unit we shall be covering the process of consumer research and also the managerial application of consumer research in marketing.

g) Diffusion of innovation: Innovations are most important for any firm for survival and growth and this is in fact the lifeline of any organisation. For a successful implementation of marketing strategies for any innovations a study of the diffusion of innovation is of prime concern. Hence we shall study the concept of diffusion, the process of innovation diffusion and its managerial applications in this unit. h) Consumerism: There is lot of controversy as to whether aggressive marketing strategies of firms are leading to materialistic tendencies of consumers and also whether marketers are pushing their products at the cost of ethical, moral and environmental concerns. Privacy is another matter, which is causing a lot of irritation among the general public especially in these days of direct marketing and internet marketing. All these issues are also important for a student of consumer behaviour in order to avoid the pitfalls associated with many short term strategies adopted by some marketers bringing the entire profession into disrepute. In this unit all these issues will be studied.


Page No. 24

Consumer Behaviour

i)

Unit 1

Business buyer Behaviour and decisions: Although the concepts which are normally studied in consumer behaviour courses predominantly cover individual and household consumers business buying is also an important aspect of marketing and a study of business buying behaviour will help in taking proper decisions in such B2B situations. In this unit we shall be studying the nature of business buying Behaviour, business buying process and also the factors influencing business-buying Behaviour. We shall also touch upon the segmentation of business markets.

Self-Assessment Questions II State whether the following statements are true or false: 1.

Traditionally wants are understood as the basic requirements of a human being like food, clothing, shelter, air, water, etc.

2.

Wants occur when the person desires to take his physical or psychological condition beyond the state of minimal comfort.

3.

The underlying assumption of consumer-oriented organisations is that the consumers are mainly looking for a cheaper product, which is readily available.

4.

Today, most businesses are based on this theory that firms that define themselves too narrowly dig their own graves.

5.

Innovations are most important for any firm for survival and growth and this is in fact the lifeline of any organisation.

1.6 Summary In this unit you have learnt how consumer behaviour studies are important for any organisation to succeed in the marketplace. You also learnt why organisations will have to be consumer oriented and what the managerial perspectives are for such an orientation. You also understood the Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 25

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

shortsighted approach of many companies resulting in serious problems for their very survival. You also found out how marketing concepts are interwoven with consumer satisfaction as an important goal resulting in long term profits for the organisation. You also learnt the difference between needs and wants of a customer and their determinants.

1.7 Terminal Questions a) What kind of different activities are involved in Consumer Behaviour? What roles does a customer play in the purchase decision-making process? b) What are the different perspectives of studying Consumer Behaviour? How are they relevant for marketing decisions? c)

What are the different orientations of a business organisation? What are their advantages and disadvantages?

d) What is “Marketing Myopia” and what is its relevance in the study of consumer behaviour? e) What is the difference between Sales and Marketing? What is the objective of a marketing oriented organisation? f)

What are the differences between Needs and Wants of a customer? Which factors influence the needs and wants?

1.8 Answers to Self Assessment Questions and Terminal Questions Self Assessment Questions I 1. Consumer, managerial 2. , Payer and Buyer 3. Consumer Orientation 4. Mass Customisation 5. Customer satisfaction Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 26

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 1

Self Assessment Questions II 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. True Terminal Questions a) Refer to section 1.2 b) Refer to Section 1.3 c) Refer to Section 1.3 d) Refer to Section 1.3 e) Refer to section 1.3 f)

Refer to section 1.3


Page No. 27

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Unit 2

Consumers & Market Segmentation

Structure 2.1


2.2

Vignette

2.3

Definitions of Market Segment and Market Segmentation

2.4

Bases for Market Segmentation

2.5

Criteria for effective Market Segmentation Self Assessment Questions I

2.6

Strategies for Segmentation

2.7

Targeting Strategy Self Assessment Questions II

2.8

Summary

2.9

Terminal Questions

2.10 Answers to SAQs & TQs

2.1

Introduction

Every market place is highly diverse. They are composed of many different types of customers with different backgrounds, countries or regions of origin, needs and interests, personalities, perceptions, etc. Such diversity makes it imperative for a marketer to go for Market Segmentation, which would be an attractive, viable and potentially high profitable strategy. Improved segmentation can lead to significantly improved marketing effectiveness. With the right segmentation, the right lists can be purchased, advertising results can be improved and customer satisfaction can be increased. When marketers provide a vide range of products or services targeted at different market segments, consumers are better satisfied and their overall happiness, satisfaction and quality of life are ultimately enhanced. Hence Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 28

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

market segmentation results in a positive effect for both consumers & marketers. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Know the meaning & definition of market segmentation.



Understand how study of Consumer Behaviour can help market segmentation.



Explain the various methods of effective market segmentation.

Describe the strategies of segmentation & targeting.

2.2 Vignette The decade of the 1980s was a turbulent one for Hindustan Lever Ltd. (HLL). The giant and undisputed market leader in FMCG products in India suffered a humiliating defeat at the hands of a new and small firm Nirma Chemicals. Nirma Washing Powder became a national brand soon after 1982, when Indian television went commercial and started colour telecast. The product immediately caught the fancy of the middle income customer, who was finding it difficult to make both ends meet with his limited monthly income. Nirma became the lowest priced, branded washing powder available in grocery and cooperative stores. The middle class housewife was more than satisfied as she now had a lower priced option available. Nirma also had an impact on upper middle income and higher income families who used it for inexpensive clothes and linen. Initially, HLL responded by launching sales promotion campaigns on Surf- by offering a bucket at a subsidized price or brands of toilet soap with every kilogram of Surf. These schemes however, did not halt the decline of Surf. HLL then launched a head on attack on Nirma. They came up with an advertising commercial comparing 1 kg of Surf with 1 kg of low priced yellow Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 29

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

washing powder and showed that Surf washed more clothes than the low priced yellow washing powder-and hence it was economical to buy Surf. The commercial did not bring in any substantial results. It was at this time (around 1984) that HLL decided to take a fresh look at the market. Research conducted throughout the country revealed that, different income groups of consumers had varying expectations from detergents or washing powders. It also showed that different colours of washing or detergent powders were associated with different types of fabrics. For example, middle and lower middle or lower income people mainly bought yellow coloured washing or detergent powder. They washed all their fabrics and associated whiteness in clothes with a yellow coloured powder. Also, middle-class families used the blue Rin bar or the white Lux flakes for washing their expensive clothes. Research further indicated that, blue or white coloured detergent powders were bought by middle to higher income group people, and these colours were also associated with washing clothes clean. In fact, the housewife was known to add “blue”, to her laundry to give that extra whiteness to white clothes. Interestingly, green was also the colour that was perceived to clean extra-dirty clothes. Armed with this research on colour perceptions and income groups, HLL launched the Sunlight (yellow), Wheel (green), Rin (blue), and Surf Ultra (white) detergent powders for different market segments. This strategy of segmenting the markets, understanding its needs and then evolving marketing mix to suit segments' needs helped HLL win back part of its lost market. In fact, Nirma made all other consumer product companies sit up and take a fresh look at their markets. It announced, for many, a beginning of an era of low priced products for a highly price sensitive Indian market, and to others, the end of a mass marketing era.


Page No. 30

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

The latter part of the 1980s and early 1990s has taught the Indian firms a lesson, "one cannot be everything to everyone; but one can be everything to a select few'. This is the basis of market segmentation.

2.3 Definitions of Market Segment & Market Segmentation Market Segment A Market segment is a subgroup of people or organizations sharing one or more characteristics that cause them to have similar product needs. Market Segmentation Market segmentation is the process in marketing, of dividing a market into distinct subsets (segments) that behave in the same way or have similar needs. Because each segment is fairly homogeneous in their needs and attitudes, they are likely to respond similarly to a given marketing strategy. They are likely to have similar feelings and ideas about a marketing mix, comprised of a given product or service, sold at a given price, distributed in a certain way and promoted in a certain way. Before the marketers started using the concept of market segmentation, the way the business was done was through mass marketing i.e. offering the same product and same marketing mix to all consumers. The classic case of such a practice was that of Henry Ford’s philosophy of offering Ford Model T with the choice to the consumers of “selecting any colour they want as long as it is black”. If all consumers were alike i.e. if all of them had the same needs, desires, personalities, backgrounds, attitudes, etc. mass marketing would have been relevant and highly successful. Then only one standardized product is needed for all consumers, only one advertising campaign and only one marketing mix. The main advantage in this strategy is that, it costs substantially less. However as we have seen in the vignette of HLL vs. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 31

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Nirma, the consumers are indeed diverse and such a strategy of mass marketing would be highly risky in today’s market environment.

2.4 Bases for Market Segmentation The first step in developing a segmentation strategy is, to select the most appropriate basis on which the market can be segmented. There are many ways in which this can be done and some most popular variables used for market segmentation are discussed in following paragraphs: Geographic Segmentation: In this method, the market is divided on the basis of location. There can be different categories in such segmentation also. Some of these are: a) Region of the world or country: East, West, South, North, Central, coastal, hilly, etc. b) City Size: Metropolitan Cities, small cities, towns. c) Density of population: Urban, Semi-urban, Rural. d) Climate: Hot, Cold, Humid, Rainy Demographic variables This is the second most popular variable used by marketers. Factors like age, education, income, etc. individually or in combination are commonly used to segment the market. Some of these variables are discussed here: a) Age: The assumption here is that people in the same age group will behave in the same manner. Based on this we can have different subgroups like infants (new born to 1 year), Child (1 to 12 years), Teens (13 to 19 years), adolescents (16-19 years), youth (20-35years), middle aged (36-50 years), elders or seniors (50 years and above). b) Gender-Male and Female: The male preferences are different from the female preferences. While some products like garments and cosmetics are produced exclusively for each segment, there are some products,


Page No. 32

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

which are meant for both segments and these are called as unisexual products. c) Education – School, College and University: The level of a consumer’s education will also affect the preferences and also the level of awareness. Higher the level of education, higher is then awareness about the market environment and about different products. Their awareness about their rights as consumers will also be better. d) Marital status: Family has been the focus of most marketing efforts and household continues to be the target for many products and services. Marketers are interested in determining the profiles of decision makers in households to develop appropriate marketing strategies. Many marketers have found it useful to target specific marital status groupings, like singles, divorced individuals, single parents, dual income married couples, etc. e) Income: It is believed that, as the consumer’s income increases their consumption behavior also changes. Research findings have proven that, the expenditure on food and basic necessities as a percentage of total expenditure declines as consumer income increases. The consumer then starts buying costlier branded products, and also so called luxuries like automobiles, washing machines, microwave ovens, holiday packages, air travel, etc. On the basis of income the segmentation can be - low income, lower middle income, middle income, higher middle income, high income, etc. f) Occupation: Occupation is an important variable and different categories under this can be – self employed, part time employee, full time

employee,

etc.

or

like-

professionals(doctors,

chartered

ants, management consultants, etc.), traders & shopkeepers, businessmen & industrialists, sales personnel, teachers & professors, housewives, etc. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 33

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Psychographic Variables Marketers have been utilizing psychographic research especially personality and attitude measurements. This type of consumer research has proven very valuable to identify promising consumer segments which are likely to be responsive to specific marketing messages. The psychographic profile of a consumer segment can be thought of as a composite of consumers’ activities, interests and opinions (AIO’s). As an approach to measuring this, the consumers’ responses are analysed for a large number of statements that analyze: –

activities (how the consumer or family spends time- golf, gardening, volunteering in charitable activities, etc.),

–

interests (what are the preferences & priorities like home, fashion, food, etc.)

–

opinions (what are the feelings about a variety of political issues, social issues, economy, ecology, etc.)

Socio-cultural segmentation Sociological (group) and cultural variables provide further bases for market segmentation. Consumer markets have been successfully segmented based on family life cycle, social class, cultural values, etc. Some of these are discussed in the following paragraphs: a) Family Life Cycle: This is based on the fact that many families through similar phases during the lifetime. At each stage the family needs different products and services. These segments can be likeyoung single people, newly weds, parents with infants, parents with teenage children, etc. b) Social Class: Social class i.e. the relative status in the community can be the basis for segmentation. It has been found by research that, the consumers in different social classes vary in of values, product preferences and buying habits. Social class is measured by a weighted Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 34

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

index of several demographic variables such as education, occupation and income. c) Culture & subculture: of the same culture tend to share the same values, beliefs and customs. This type of segmentation is particularly successful in international marketing and it is important for the marketers to understand the target country’s beliefs, values and customs. Within the larger culture distinct subgroups called subcultures are united by certain values and beliefs, which make effective market segments. Consumers are found to be more responsive to promotional messages which they perceive as related to their own sub culture. Culturally distinct segments can be prospects for the same product but they can be targeted more efficiently with different promotional appeals. For example, a bicycle can be promoted as a means of transportation in Asia, whereas in western countries it can be promoted as a health and fitness product. Behavioral Variables Depending on the consumer behaviour towards consumption parameters and situations related to such consumption there can a different type of market segmentation. Some of these examples are discussed in the following paragraphs: a) Benefit sought: There can be multiple benefits of the same product from the point of view of different consumers. For example, the cell phone may be used by some consumers purely for the purpose of telephonic conversations. Some others may be using it predominantly for messaging. Some consumers may look for this as a means of taking photographs whenever they need to. Depending on the different benefits sought the segmentation can be made.


Page No. 35

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

b) Occasion: For the same product, different occasions in which they can be consumed like- birthday parties, weddings, Valentine’s Day, friendship day, etc. can be another option for segmentation. c) Product usage rate: Some consumers are heavy s, some moderate and some light s of the same product. Based on the rate of consumption target consumers may be segmented. d) Brand loyalty: Many consumers may be hard core loyal, some may have split loyalty, some may have shifting loyalty and some may be habitual switchers. Based on this criterion the marketers may segment their brand markets. e) Product end use: Some products may have multiple end uses. This happens quite frequently in industrial markets wherein the same raw material or packing material may be used by widely different industries. This then becomes a useful method of segmentation. f) status: The status of the consumer in many situations like new students, mothers to be, newly weds, etc. also offer another method of effective segmentations for devising the entire marketing mix for such segments. g) Readiness-to-buy stage: This is the stage of preparedness to actually purchase the product or brand. The consumer may be in different stages of such preparedness like- unaware, aware, informed, interested, desiring, intending to purchase. Different promotional strategies can be devised depending on each of these stages making this as the basis for segmentation. h) Attitude towards product: There could be differing attitudes of different consumers towards the same brand or service based on their perceptions and past experiences. Some marketers use this as the basis for segmentation in order to suitably devise their promotional mix


Page No. 36

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

for better effectiveness. Some of these attitudes can be described asenthusiastic, positive, indifferent, negative or hostile. Multiple Variables No marketer can afford to use only a single basis of market segmentation in the highly complex market environment. Multiple bases are normally used by most marketers. Many geographic, psychographic, socio-cultural variables along with some of the behavioural variables are used as a combination to segment the markets and design a suitable marketing mix. When numerous variables are combined to give an in-depth understanding of a segment, this is referred to as depth segmentation. When enough information is combined to create a clear picture of a typical member of a segment, this is referred to as a buyer profile. When the profile is limited to demographic variables, it is called a demographic profile (typically shortened to "demography"). A statistical technique commonly used in determining a profile is cluster analysis.

2.5 Criteria for effective Market Segmentation Once the basis for market segmentation has been identified the next step is to select one or more segments to target with an appropriate marketing strategy. The criteria for successful segmentation is discussed in the following paragraphs: Homogeneity within the segment By the very definition of a market segment the marketer should ensure that, each segment should share one or more characteristics to have similar product needs. In other words, there should be homogeneity among the consumers of a particular segment in their behaviour towards the product or brand.


Page No. 37

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Heterogeneity between segments The different segments should be differentiable in of the consumer behaviour for the particular brand. For example, two different segments of married and unmarried women for using a particular brand of perfume may not be heterogeneous, since the same woman may use the same perfume before and after marriage. Hence it is important to analyse the segmentation in of heterogeneity, before proceeding further. Segments should be measurable and identifiable A marketer should be able to identify the relevant characteristics that have been selected and also measure the total market in of size and other parameters. Without proper identification and measurement, it is not possible to plan the marketing mix nor is it possible to measure the effectiveness of the marketing strategy subsequently. Segments should be accessible and actionable Marketers should be able to reach the market segments they want to target in an economical way. If rural markets are targeted without thoughts about reaching such consumers, through proper cost-effective medium and subsequent distribution of the products, the whole purpose of such segmentation is defeated. Hence accessibility of the target consumers and utility of the marketing mix are very important criteria for effective market segmentation. Segments should be large enough to be profitable For a market segment to be worthwhile it must consist of sufficient consumers, who could use the particular product or brand. The size of each segment should be estimated and the overall costs and profits have to be projected, before the final decision of freezing such segmentation. One has to be sure of the profitability of each segment before proceeding further for deg the marketing mix. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 38

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Self Assessment Questions I 1. Before

the

marketers

started

using

the

concept

of

market

segmentation, the way the business was done was through _______ _________. 2. Factors like age, education, income, etc. individually or in combination commonly used to segment the market are called _________ __________. 3. of the same _________ tend to share the same values, beliefs and customs. 4. There should be _________ among the consumers of a particular segment in their behaviour towards the product or brand. 5. Accessibility of the target consumers and ___________of the marketing mix are very important criteria for effective market segmentation.

2.6 Strategies for Segmentation The process of segmentation is distinct from targeting (choosing which segments to address) and positioning (deg an appropriate marketing mix for each segment). The overall intent is to identify groups of similar customers and potential customers; to prioritize the groups to address; to understand their behaviour; and to respond with appropriate marketing strategies that satisfy the different preferences of each chosen segment. Revenues are thus improved. A few models of segmentation strategy are discussed in the following paragraphs: Top-down and bottom-up George Day (1980) describes model of segmentation as the top-down approach: You start with the total population and divide it into segments. He also identified an alternative model which he called the bottom-up approach. In this approach, you start with a single customer and build on that profile. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 39

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

This typically requires the use of customer relationship management software or a database of some kind. Profiles of existing customers are created

and

analysed.

Various

demographic,

behavioural,

and

psychographic patterns are built up using techniques such as cluster analysis. This process is sometimes called database marketing or micromarketing. Its use is most appropriate in highly fragmented markets. McKenna (1988) claims that this approach treats every customer as a "micro majority". Pine (1993) used the bottom-up approach in what he called "segment of one marketing". Through this process mass customization is possible. Price discrimination Where a monopoly exists, the price of a product is likely to be higher in a competitive market and the quantity sold is less, generating monopoly profits for the seller. These profits can be increased further if the market can be segmented with different prices charged to different segments (referred to as price discrimination), charging higher prices to those segments willing and able to pay more and charging less to those whose demand is price elastic. The price discriminator might need to create rate fences that will prevent of a higher price segment from purchasing at the prices available to of a lower price segment. This behaviour is rational on the part of the monopolist, but is often seen by competition authorities as an abuse of a monopoly position, whether or not the monopoly itself is sanctioned. Examples of this exist in the transport industry (a plane or train journey to a particular destination at a particular time is a practical monopoly), where Business Class customers who can afford to pay more, may be charged prices many times higher than Economy Class customers, for essentially the same service. Microsoft and the Video industry also price exactly the same product at widely varying prices, depending on the market they are selling to Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 40

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

and try to enforce this with a mix of legislation and Digital Rights Management. Mass Customisation In fact, the concept of customer orientation is getting further extended in this age of internet and computer aided design, to go to the extreme extent of Mass Customisation, wherein the companies are catering to the needs of each and every consumer. One example of mass customisation is that of Mattel Toys producing the Barbie Dolls as per the requirement of each child, who wishes to purchase. They have a website in which the child who wishes to purchase a Barbie doll can log on to this site and customize her own “My Design” doll. She can choose the skin colour, hair style, hair colour, clothes, accessories and finally the name for the doll. The company forwards this to their computer system which then processes all the orders from thousands of consumers. These are then fed into their production planning systems and the dolls are made as per each order of each child. The dolls are then mailed to each child with the name of the doll printed on the package. Another example is that of “Levi Jeans”. If a consumer walks into the Original Levi's Store in Cincinnati in US, she/he will be greeted by a sales clerk with a measuring tape in hand and a personal computer on a nearby desk. He will take the measurements, feed the data into a computer, make final adjustments to the blueprint of a pair of jeans that pops up on the PC screen, push the transmit key, give the customer a receipt for the payment and send the customer home. Forty-eight hours later the jeans arrive at the customer’s home, delivered by a courier. The jeans must fit the customer properly or else they can return it for a full refund. This is how it works: The PC in the retail store transmits the data to the Levi's factory. There, the computer data is received directly by a robotic Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 41

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

tailor who cuts a bolt of denim precisely to the customer's measurements. Usually the jeans are shipped back to the store in three weeks; but for a slight extra charge, customers have the option of receiving them within 48 hours. The service is a blessing to customers, many of whom have difficulty finding jeans that fit them. When the service for such jeans was introduced, in the Cincinnati store, sales went up by 300 percent compared with the same period the previous year.

2.7 Targeting Strategy Target market is the market segment to which a particular product is marketed. Age, gender, geography often define it, and/or socio-economic grouping. Targeting strategy is the selection of the customers the company wishes to service. The decisions involved in targeting strategy include: –

which segments to targethow many products to offer

–

which, products to offer in which segments

There are three steps to targeting: –

market segmentation

–

target choice

–

product positioning

Targeting strategy decisions are influenced by market maturity, diversity of buyers' needs and preferences, strength of the competition and the volume of sales required for profitability. Targeting can be selective (example: focus strategy, market specialization strategy or niche strategy), or extensive (example: full coverage, mass marketing, or product specialization). Some of these are discussed here.


Page No. 42

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Single Segment Concentration In this strategy, the firm concentrates on a single segment and gets a strong knowledge of the segment’s needs. Utilising this knowledge the firm can achieve a strong marketing presence and simultaneously achieve operating economies through specialisation in production, distribution & promotion. If the company can capture the segment leadership they can enjoy high return on investment. Some of the typical examples of this strategy are Ferrari sports cars, Volkswagen Buggy, Polaroid camera. There are however high risks involved in this strategy since any drastic changes in consumer needs, technological changes etc. can create insurmountable problems which can even lead to closure of the entire line like it happened in the case Volkswagen and Polaroid. Selective Specialisation In this strategy the company tries to diversify the risk by selecting a number of segments each of them appropriate and attractive. Many multi national FMCG companies follow this strategy by having multiple products in multiple segments. ITC is one example in India, who could diversify into several segments in different industries very effectively. After realizing that the single segment concentration in tobacco related products is not advisable in the long run, they went into hotels, food, etc. and were successful in each of these segments. Product Specialisation This strategy is to diversify the same product into several different segments. One example could be that of microscopes which are sold to universities,

government

laboratories

and

commercial

firms

in

pharmaceutical and chemical industries. The same product is suitably modified for each segment and thus a strong product reputation is built up. The risk in such strategy is of technological changes, unless the firm keeps abreast of new technologies and keeps investing to keep up. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 43

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Market Specialisation In this case, the company concentrates on the needs of a particular consumer group. An example is that of Kores, which produces all types of office supplies including carbon paper, stationery, etc. meant for all offices. Full Market Coverage In this strategy, the company tries to serve a number of customer groups with a number of products. This is typically done by very large companies like General Motors, General Electric, Coca Cola, etc. They have two types of approaches in this: a) Undifferentiated Marketing: The differences in different segments are completely ignored and the company goes for a single marketing strategy common for all segments. It relies on mass production, mass distribution and mass advertising, which would eventually cover all segments. The advantage in such cases is that because of huge economies of scale and lower costs due to these common costs of R&D, production, distribution, advertising, etc., the company can offer lower prices to price sensitive segments of the markets. The presumption is that all segments will contain price sensitive customers who would be buying such products. b) Differentiated Marketing: In this case the company offers different products for different segments and still operates in several segments simultaneously achieving full market coverage. Most of the Indian car manufacturers like Maruti, Hyundai, etc. are following this strategy by having different cars for different segments, practically covering the entire range of segments which want different types of cars.


Page No. 44

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

Self Assessment Questions II State whether the following statements are true or false: 1. The process of segmentation is distinct from targeting and positioning. 2. In the top-down approach, you start with the total population and divide it into segments. 3. Where a monopoly exists, the price of a product is likely to be lower than in a competitive market. 4. Target market is the market segment to which a particular product is marketed. 5. In undifferentiated marketing, the company offers different products for different segments.

2.8 Summary In this unit we have learnt the meaning and definition of Market Segment and Market Segmentation. We also learnt the basis for Market Segmentation, like Geographic Segmentation, Demographic variables, Psychographic Variables, Socio cultural segmentation and Behavioural Variables. We have also learnt the different criteria for effective Market Segmentation and also the strategies for Segmentation like Top-down and bottom-up approach, Price discrimination and Mass Customisation. We have also understood different Targeting Strategies, like Single Segment Concentration, Selective Specialisation, Product Specialisation, Market Specialisation and Full Market Coverage.

2.9 Terminal Questions 1. Define market segmentation and name the various bases used for segmentation. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 45

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 2

2. What are demographic variables? Explain each of them in a few sentences. 3. How is socio cultural segmentation done? 4. Describe the criteria for effective market segmentation. 5. Explain different types of targeting strategy.

2.10

Answers to SAQs & TQs

SAQ I 1. mass marketing 2. demographic variables 3. culture 4. homogeneity 5. actionability SAQ II 1. True 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. False TQ 1. Refer section 2.3 & 2.4 2. Refer section 2.4 3. Refer section 2.4 4. Refer section 2.5 5. Refer section 2.7


Page No. 46

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

Unit 3

Environmental and Group influences on Consumer Behaviour

Structure 3.1

Introduction Objective

3.2

Cultures

3.3

Subcultures Self Assessment Questions I

3.4

Social class

3.5

Life styles

3.6

Influence of Group on Consumer Behaviour

3.7

Reference groups and Consumer Behaviour

3.8

Family Self Assessment Questions II

3.9

Summary

3.10 Terminal Questions 3.11 Answers to SAQs and TQs

3.1 Introduction Consumer Environment consists of those factors existing independently of individual consumers and firms that influence the exchange process. Some of these environmental factors are cultures, subcultures, social class and lifestyles, which are discussed here. Consumer group consists of those groups which influence the exchange process. This chapter explains the environmental and group influences on consumer behaviour in detail.


Page No. 47

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Know the environmental factors and groups affecting Consumer Behavior.



Understand different environmental factors like cultures, subcultures, social class and lifestyle.



Explain the influence of different groups like reference groups and family on Consumer Behaviour.

3.2 Cultures Culture generally refers to patterns of human activity and the symbolic structures that give such activity significant importance. Different definitions of "culture" reflect different theoretical bases for understanding, or criteria for evaluating, human activity. Culture is manifested in music, literature, painting and sculpture, theater and film. Culture refers not only to consumption goods, but to the general processes which produce such goods and give them meaning, and to the social relationships and practices in which such objects and processes become embedded. Culture thus includes technology, art, science, as well as moral systems. Culture has been called "the way of life for an entire society." As such, it includes codes of manners, dress, language, religion, rituals, and norms of behavior such as law and morality, and systems of belief. Various definitions of culture reflect differing theories for understanding, or criteria for evaluating, human activity. Culture has significant influence on consumer behaviour and in this unit we shall be discussing ‘Culture” from the perspective of consumer behaviour.


Page No. 48

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

1. Definition Culture is defined as the sum total of learned beliefs, values and customs that serve to direct the consumer behaviour of of a particular society. Culture is everything a person learns & shares with of society like- ideas, norms, morals, values, knowledge, skills, technology, tools, material objects & behaviour. Culture excludes genetically inherited instincts since these are not learned as also the individual behaviours, norms, knowledge, etc. which are not shared with other of the society. 2. Enculturation and acculturation Enculturation is the process of learning one’s own culture. This is the process where the culture that is currently established teaches an individual the accepted norms and values of the culture or society in which the individual lives. The individual can become an accepted member and fulfill the needed functions and roles of the group. Most importantly, the individual knows and establishes a context of boundaries and accepted behavior that dictates what is acceptable and not acceptable within the framework of that society. It teaches the individual their role within society as well as what is accepted behavior within that society and lifestyle. Enculturation is learned through communication in the form of speech, words, and gestures. The six things of culture that are learned are: technological, economic, political, interactive, ideological and worldview. Enculturation can be conscious or unconscious. There are three ways a person learns a culture. –

Direct teaching of a culture is done (this is what happens when you don't pay attention) mostly by the parents, when a person is told to do something because it is right and not to do something because it is bad. For example, when children ask for something, they are constantly


Page No. 49

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

asked "What do you say?" and the child is expected to to say "please." –

The second conscious way a person learns a culture is to watch others around them and to emulate their behavior. An example would be using different slang with different cliques in school.

–

Enculturation

also

happens

unconsciously,

through

events and

behaviors that prevail in their culture. All three kinds of enculturation happen simultaneously and all the time. Acculturation is the process of learning a new culture. If enculturation is first-culture learning, then acculturation is second-culture learning. This has often been conceived to be a unidimensional, zero-sum cultural conflict in which the minority's culture is displaced by the dominant group's culture in a process of assimilation. 3. Elements of Culture There are various elements of each culture & each individual learns the culture by acquiring the knowledge of all these elements. Some of such elements of culture are: a. Values: Value is a concept that describes the beliefs of an individual in a culture. Values are conceptions of what is good and desirable versus what is bad and undesirable. A set of values may be placed into the notion of a value system. Values are considered subjective and vary across people and cultures. Types of values include ethical/moral values, doctrinal/ideological (political, religious) values, social values, and aesthetic values. b. Norms: Norms are rules of behaviour. A norm, or social norm, is a rule that is socially enforced. Social sanctioning is what distinguishes norms from other cultural products or social constructions such as meaning and Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 50

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

values. Norms and normlessness are thought to affect a wide variety of human behavior. c. Rituals: A ritual is a set of actions, often thought to have symbolic value, the performance of which is usually advised by a religion or by the traditions of a community. A ritual may be performed at regular intervals, or on specific occasions, or at the discretion of individuals or communities. It may be performed by a single individual, by a group, or by the entire community; in arbitrary places, or in places especially reserved for it; either in public, in private, or before specific people. A ritual may be restricted to a certain subset of the community, and may enable or underscore the age between religious or social states. The purposes of rituals are varied; they include compliance with religious obligations or ideals, satisfaction of spiritual or emotional needs of the practitioners, strengthening of social bonds, demonstration of respect or submission, stating one's affiliation, obtaining social acceptance or approval for some event — or, sometimes, just for the pleasure of the ritual itself. Being symbolic behaviour, they have a meaning in culture. d. Myths: Myths are stories that express some key values of society. A myth is generally a sacred story concerning the origins of the world or how the world and the creatures in it came to have their present form. The active beings in myths are generally gods and heroes. Myths often are said to take place before recorded history begins. In saying that a myth is a sacred narrative, what is meant is that a myth is believed to be true by people who attach religious or spiritual significance to it. Use of the term by scholars does not imply that the narrative is either true or false.


Page No. 51

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

4. Characteristics of Culture: The concept of culture has the following characteristics: a. Culture is learnt: Culture is not imbibed from birth. Hence instinctive behaviour, which is possessed by the individual since birth, is not culture. Thus, the act of crying, laughing, etc. is not culture. However knowing when it is proper or improper to cry or laugh is culture since it is learnt subsequent to birth. b. Culture regulates society: The individual learns the norms and standards of behaviour and also the acceptable deviations from standards as a part of culture. All the people in the society know the rules to live by which is what regulates society. c. Culture makes living more efficient: When individuals encounter new people and new situations within the same culture the responses are standard and there is no fresh learning required every time. This brings in efficiency in living since everyone in the same culture is sharing the culture. d. Culture is adaptive: Culture is a human response to the environment and as the environment undergoes changes, culture will adapt itself to the new environmental characteristics. Adaptation is essential for survival. An Indian company doing business in China will have to adapt its ways to the culture in China as otherwise it can not survive there. e. Culture is environmental: Like environment, the culture is all pervasive and all around each individual at all times. We take culture for granted until something unexpected happens. When some cultural norm is broken, then only our attention is drawn to the existence of culture, which is otherwise dormant.


Page No. 52

Consumer Behaviour

f.

Unit 3

Multiple cultures are nested hierarchically: The culture of larger groups constrains and shapes the culture of smaller groups within it. For example, the culture of a south Indian family is nested in the overall Indian culture.

5. Variations in Cultural values The most important characteristic of culture is values. Cultural values may apply to things, ideas, goals and behaviours. Based on research in a number of countries, the Dutch scientist Geert Hofstede, has developed a classification of value orientations. Hofstede demonstrated that there are national and regional cultural groupings that affect the behaviour of societies and organizations, and that are very persistent across time. There are a number of values, which vary across culture and affect consumption. These can broadly classified as- Other-oriented, Environment oriented and Self-oriented. a. Other-oriented values: These reflect a society’s view of the appropriate relation ship between individuals & groups within that society. These relationships have a major influence on consumer behaviour. For example, if the society values collective activity, the consumers will look towards others for advise in purchase decisions & they will not respond favourably to any promotions, which have appeal for a person to be “an individual”. b. Environment oriented values: These prescribe a society’s relationship to its economic, technical & physical environment. The consumer behaviour will be different in a society, which stresses a problem solving, risk taking, performance oriented approach to its environment & it will be entirely different in a society that stresses fatalistic, security & status oriented society.


Page No. 53

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

c. Self-oriented values: These reflect the objectives & approaches to life that the individual of society find desirable. These values also have significant effect on consumer behaviour. For example society’s position on the value of immediate gratification versus postponed gratification will decide on whether the consumer will go for credit or not. 6. Dimensions of Cross- Cultural Values Under the above broad classifications there can be a number of dimensions of culture related values: a. Small vs. Large Power Distance – the extent to which the less powerful of institutions and organizations expect and accept that power is distributed unequally. Small power distance (e.g. Austria, Denmark), expect and accept power relations that are more consultative or democratic. People relate to one another more as equals regardless of formal positions. Subordinates are more comfortable with and demand the right to contribute to and critique the decision making of those in power. Large power distance (e.g. India), less powerful accepts power relations that are more autocratic and paternalistic. Subordinates acknowledge the power of others simply based on where they are situated in certain formal, hierarchical positions. b. Individualism vs. collectivism – individualism is contrasted with collectivism, and refers to the extent to which people are expected to stand up for themselves and to choose their own affiliations, or alternatively act predominantly as a member of a life-long group or organisation. Latin American cultures rank among the lowest in this category, while the U.S.A. is one of the most individualistic cultures. c. Masculinity vs. femininity – refers to the value placed on traditionally male or female values. Masculine cultures value competitiveness, assertiveness, ambition, and the accumulation of wealth and material Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 54

Consumer Behaviour

possessions,

Unit 3

whereas feminine

cultures

place

more

value

on

relationships and quality of life. Japan is considered by Hofstede to be the most "masculine" culture, Sweden the most "feminine." Anglo cultures are moderately masculine. Because of the taboo on sexuality in many cultures, particularly masculine ones, and because of the obvious gender generalizations implied by the Hofstede's terminology, this dimension is often renamed by s of Hofstede's work, e.g. to Quantity of Life vs. Quality of Life. d. Uncertainty avoidance – reflects the extent to which a society attempts to cope with anxiety by minimizing uncertainty. Cultures that scored high in uncertainty avoidance prefer rules (e.g. about religion and food) and structured circumstances, and employees tend to remain longer with their present employer. Mediterranean cultures and Japan rank the highest

in

this

category.

This

has

a

strong

influence

on

entrepreneurship, economic development and also on new product acceptance. e. Long vs. short term orientation – describes a society's "time horizon," or the importance attached to the future versus the past and present. In long term oriented societies, pragmatism, thrift and perseverance are valued more; in short term oriented societies, normative statements, respect for tradition and reciprocation of gifts and favors are valued more. China and Japan and the Asian tigers score especially high here, with Western nations scoring rather low and man of the less developed nations very low; China scored highest and Pakistan lowest. f.

Youth/Age: To what extent the primary activities of a family will focus on the needs of the children? What role is played by the children play in family decisions? Are prestige, rank and important social roles assigned to younger of the family? These will determine whether the culture is youth oriented. American society is clearly youth oriented.


Page No. 55

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

There is now evidence that the Asian countries are also becoming increasingly youth oriented. g. Extended/Limited Family: Families have a lifelong effect on all individuals. The rights and obligations of family vary widely among different cultures. Cultures also differ widely in the obligations one family member owes to other family at various stages of life. There is wide variation on who is considered as a family member. In the US, the family definition is fairly narrow and it is less important than in many other cultures. Strong obligations are felt for only immediate family like parents, brothers, sisters and children. This sense of obligation also reduces after one marries. In many other cultures including those in Asia, the role of the family is much stronger. The family definition and the obligations extend to cousins, nieces, nephews, grandparents and even ancestors. In such cultures consumer choices are governed by a focus on family to a significant extent for purchase of even FMCG products, which are commonly shared by family . Priority of family over self as a value has many implications. There is generally a focus on the needs of the child over those of others. Education and career needs of children are given a lot of importance. Traditional t families are still seen in India & are a very organized phenomenon as far as household consumption & resource pooling goes. h. Cleanliness: Is cleanliness an important factor or is it a minor matter? Are homes, offices and public spaces expected to be very clean beyond reasonable health requirements? In the US, a very high value is placed on cleanliness and people from other cultures consider Americans to be paranoid about personal hygiene. On the other extreme, in many cultures like in China, lack of basic hygiene still causes significant health problems.


Page No. 56

Consumer Behaviour

i.

Unit 3

Tradition/Change: Is tradition valued simply for the sake of tradition? How are the consumers embracing change? Are they enthusiastic? These questions have important effects on consumer behaviour. For example, in Britain, three- fourths of the population generally claims to be highly brand loyal compared to only half the population in and . The British ads hence are more likely to emphasise tradition and history.

j.

Problem solving or Fatalistic: People in some cultures are encouraged to react to obstacles and disasters as challenges to be overcome whereas in some other cultures they adopt- “What will be will be” attitude (fatalistic). As consumers also such fatalistic attitude makes them accept any defects in products as something to live with rather than complain.

k. Nature and environment: Some cultures respect and revere nature and environment, whereas some other cultures want to tame and conquer nature. Most of the northern European countries place a high value on environment and hence packaging and other environmental regulations are very stringent in these countries. These attitudes will affect the consumers’ purchase decisions, consumption practices & recycling efforts. l.

Active/ive: Are physically active approaches to work and play considered important or ive lifestyle encouraged? Americans are more prone to engage in action-oriented approach to problems. Japanese on the contrary are quite ive in comparison. This attitude will affect the advertising themes and formats.

m. Sensual Gratification / Abstinence: Some cultures frown upon the desire to pamper oneself, to satisfy one’s desires for food, drink or sex beyond the minimum requirement. Muslim countries are extremely conservative in this value. In contrast Brazilian and European cultures Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 57

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

encourage sensual gratification as something normal. Hence ads with nudity and blatant appeals for sensual gratification may be appealing in some cultures this may in fact be frowned upon in some other cultures. n. Material/Non-material: There are two types of materialismi. Instrumental Materialism: This is the acquisition of things to enable one to do something. Examples are that of purchase of automobiles for transportation. ii. Terminal Materialism: This is the acquisition of items for the sake of owning the item itself. Just the owning of these items give the pleasure rather than what the item does for them. There are marked differences in the relative emphasis on these two types of materialisms in different cultures. o. Hard Work/Leisure: Some cultures value work for itself, independent of external rewards and in some other cultures work is only a means to an end. In many Latin American countries work is considered as a necessary evil whereas in much of Europe work is considered as essential for a full life. Labour saving devises and instant foods have not been very successful in countries like Switzerland for this reason. p. Religious/Secular: In many cultures many of the daily activities are activities are determined by religious doctrine. U.S is relatively secular. Many Islamic countries and Catholic countries are very much religiously oriented. Understanding the extent and type of religious influences operating in a culture is essential for effectively deg the marketing mix.  Cultural Variations in Nonverbal communications Variations in verbal communications in different cultures are easy to notice and accept because we realize that language is an arbitrary invention. A word can mean what a group will agree that it will mean. Hence many wordSikkim Manipal University

Page No. 58

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

to-word translations can lead ad campaigns to convey a totally unintended meaning, causing a lot of embarrassment. For example, the translation of the word “Enjoy” has sensual connotations in many countries including Russia. Many brand names also have these problems. Ford’s Fiera brand means “terrible, cruel or ugly” in Spanish. However verbal language translations can be taken care of and they do not pose major problems. The problem is that each culture has nonverbal communication systems and these are the arbitrary meanings a culture assigns to actions, events and things other than words. There are seven such nonverbal variables, which are important in influencing non-verbal communication. These are time, space, symbols, friendship, agreements, things and etiquette. a. Time: The meaning of time varies in two major ways: one is the Time Perspective, which is the culture’s overall orientation towards Time. Most western countries and Australians view time as inescapable, linear and fixed. It is almost like a physical object, which can be scheduled, wasted, lost and so on. This is known as monochromatic time perspective. Many Latin Americans and Asians including Indians tend to view time as being less discrete and less subject to scheduling. They view simultaneous involvement in many activities as very natural. People and relationships take priority over schedules and activities occur at their own pace rather than according to predetermined timetable. This is known as polychromic time perspective. Marketing activities vary substantially between these two time perspectives. Personal selling and negotiation styles and strategies will have to be different as also the ad campaigns. Contests and sales with deadlines will be more effective in monochromatic perspective cultures. Specific uses of time have varying meanings in different cultures. Americans are normally well prepared with ready answers and they


Page No. 59

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

normally insist on coming to the point directly and quickly whereas in Japan and Middle East it is exactly the opposite. Promptness in appointments is considered very important in some countries like USA and . Even a short delay of 5 minutes in such culture is intolerable. In some other cultures keeping up to appointments is an exception rather than a rule. b. Space: The use people make of space is another form of non-verbal communication. In America the bigger the better. The office space is allocated in proportion to the rank of the executive rather than need. Americans tend to personalize their workspace and consider it their own. Another major use of space is the Personal Space It is the nearest that others can come to you in various situations without feeling uncomfortable. In US the normal business conversations occur at distances of 3 to 5 feet and highly personal discussions at 18 inches to 3 feet. In most of Latin America this space is considerable shorter & most Americans feel uncomfortable when the Latin American tries to “enter” his personal space and invariable steps back to create more space. Such non-verbal communication results in Americans considering Latin Americans as pushy and aggressive. The Latin Americans consider the Americans as snobbish, aloof and cold. c. Symbols: If an American baby is wearing a pink dress it is most likely to be female & if it is blue it would be a male. The number four is considered a symbol of death in Japan. In parts of South East Asia light blue is associated with death and mourning. A white carnation flower is a symbol of death in China. The “thumbs up” sign has an offensive meaning in Russia. These are only some examples how each culture has its own non-verbal communication in symbols.


Page No. 60

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

d. Friendship: In China friendly relationships are very complex and are described under the concept of “Guanxi”. The rights and obligations imposed by friendship are quite strong in Chinese culture. Americans on the contrary make friends quickly and easily, and drop them also easily. Friendship & business are deeply entwined in most of the world. e. Agreements: Some culture like American rely on excessive and generally highly efficient legal system for ensuring that business obligations are honored and disagreements if any are resolved. Many other cultures depend on friendship and kinship. Local moral principles or informal cultural customs to guide business conduct. Under the American system the wordings of the proposed contract is examined very carefully. In the other cultures like in China, the character of the potential partner is examined very closely. Americans assume that in almost all instances the prices are uniform for all buyers and reasonably close to the going rate. In many Latin American and Asian countries, virtually all the prices are negotiated prior to sale including industrial products and standard price lists are an exception than a rule. f.

Things: Different cultures attach different meanings to things including brands. For example, in China a clock is a symbol of funeral and is an inappropriate gift. In China gifts should be presented privately, whereas in Arab countries they should be given in front of others. In Japan small gifts are required to be given in many business situations, whereas in China it is not appropriate.

g. Etiquette: This represents generally accepted ways of behaving in social situations. Holding fork and knife in left and right hands is different in USA as compared to many European cultures. Patting a child on the head, crossing one’s legs while sitting, speaking loudly, nodding the head, etc. has different connotations in different cultures. It is hence Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 61

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

important for the sales people to know the culture specific etiquette. Although people understand that etiquette varies from culture to culture, there is still a strong emotional feeling that “our way is natural and right”.

3.3 Subcultures In sociology and cultural studies, a subculture is a set of people with a set of behaviors and beliefs, culture, which could be distinct or hidden, that differentiate them from the larger culture to which they belong. If the subculture is characterized by a systematic opposition to the dominant culture, then it may be described as a counterculture. It is important to mention that there is a subtle difference between a counterculture and a subculture. A subculture is at least somewhat integrated component of a society, though clearly separated, while a counterculture is actively and openly opposed to many of the characteristics of a society. Subcultures can be distinctive because of the age, race, ethnicity, class, and/or gender. The qualities that determine a subculture as distinct may be aesthetic, religious, political, sexual or a combination of these factors. of a subculture will often signal their hip through a distinctive and symbolic use of style. Style includes fashions and mannerisms. Therefore, the study of subculture often consists of the study of the symbolism attached to clothing, music and other visible affectations by of the subculture, and also the ways in which these same symbols are interpreted by of the dominant culture. The cultural elements of a society or nation is a composite of two distinct elements 1. The unique beliefs, values and customs subscribed to by the of specific sub cultures; and Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 62

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

2. The central or core cultural themes that are shared by most

of the

population regardless of specific subcultures. Thus cultures can be subdivided in many ways. One is in of regional or geographical sub-segments. For example, the South Indian culture is a sub culture in the overall Indian culture. Similarly Punjabi culture can be a subculture of the North Indian culture. There could be subcultures categorised on the basis of original nationality, race, age, gender, religion, occupation social class, etc. Sub cultural analysis enables the marketers to focus on sizable and natural market segments and these subcultures for relevant units of analysis for market research. Change in subcultures: As such it may be difficult to identify subcultures, because their style (particularly clothing and music) may often be adopted by main culture, for commercial purposes, as businesses will often seek to capitalize on the attraction of the subculture in search of new things, which remains valuable in the selling of any product. This process of cultural newness may often result in the evolution of the subculture, as its adopt new styles, which appear different from main culture. The subcultures may also adapt to the main culture in order to merge with the mainstream.  Sub cultures in India The Indian sub cultures have been commonly believed to be due to environmental, historical and cultural causes. These sub cultures are described as Dravidian South, Indo-Aryan in North, Mixture of Mongoloid with Aryan in Northeast, etc. Many of these factors include: 1. Environmental circumstances like- geography, crops and foods, clothing, housing resource availability, weather, coastal vs. interiors, etc. affecting survival requirements.


Page No. 63

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

2. Historical, cultural, religious, travel, trade, political developments, affecting social norms and practices. These events and behaviours affecting consumption may be seen conspicuously from the number of festivals and religious norms at one end, to differences in clothing, food and other items of consumption necessitated by the topography. India is a true melting pot of the world in the context of cultural assimilation of religion, norms, values, social codes and social structure. There could be some subcultures out of this melting pot, which can be of interest for the marketers: a. Religious Subcultures: The modern integrated Indian entity has been in existence only for a few decades and the integrated and homogeneous cultural entity has evolved over nearly two millennia. There has been a change in the fairly uniform Vedic and Dravidian cultures over the centuries. Religions with traditions developed over two millennia are seen to coexist and assumed to interact and influence one another. Yet the norms for each religion’s culture are fairly codified and distinct. There also extensions of this like caste and in some cases tribal origins that lead to cultural and social structures, norms of activity, lifestyle, consumption patterns, etc. b. Regional Sub cultures: India has, in the past millennium, seen more waves of invasion ending in cultural integration and metamorphosis, than any other country in the world. Each region has its own history of such cultural and norm evolving events. The south and east had their own share of independent medieval overseas interactions; but have been relatively more stable having been isolated from the northwestern invasions of India. c.

Urban Vs Rural context: There also exists the quasi-cultural divide and uniquely defining commonality in the urban vs rural context. Cities


Page No. 64

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

have been the first targets of development for centuries. They present a more cosmopolitan and less codified set of norms and habits, compared to rural areas. The rural areas have retained more of the prevailing cultures than the cities. They have also established a socially regulated system of more strictly adhered to norms even for consumption of goods and services. This of course varies from region to region and also depends on the proximity to a city. The presence of TV has been held more responsible for changing social codes for dressing & interaction than any other social movement in the interior villages. Self Assessment Questions I 1. _________ has been called "the way of life for an entire society." 2. _________ is the process where the culture that is currently established teaches an individual the accepted norms and values of the culture or society in which the individual lives. 3. A __________ is a set of actions, often thought to have symbolic value, performance of which is usually prescribed by a religion or by the traditions of a community. 4. Like_____________, the culture is all pervasive and all around each individual at all times. 5. __________ __________ reflects the extent to which a society attempts to cope with anxiety by minimizing uncertainty. 6. A _____________ is a set of people with a set of behaviors and beliefs, culture, which could be distinct or hidden, that differentiate them from the larger culture to which they belong.


Page No. 65

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

3.4 Social class Social class refers to the hierarchical distinctions between individuals or groups, in societies or cultures. It is the relative standing of of a society so that higher position implies a higher status than those in the lower class. Most societies, particularly nation states, seem to have some definition of social class. Where social classes do exist, the factors that determine class vary widely from one society to another. Even within a society, different people or groups may have very different ideas about what makes one "high" or "low" in the social hierarchy. The most basic class distinction between the two groups is between the powerful and the powerless. Social classes with more power usually subordinate classes with less power, while attempting to cement their own power positions in society. Social classes with a great deal of power are usually viewed as elites, at least within their own societies. In the simplest societies, power/class hierarchies may or may not exist. In societies where they do exist, power may be linked to physical strength, and therefore age, gender, and physical health are common delineators of class. However, spiritual charisma and religious vision can be at least as important. Also, because different livelihoods are so closely intertwined in simple societies, morality often ensures that the old, the young, the weak, and the sick maintain a relatively equal standard of living despite low class. In so-called non-stratified societies or acephalous societies, there is no concept of social class, power, or hierarchy beyond temporary or limited social statuses. In such societies, every individual has a roughly equal social standing in most situations. 

Factors affecting Social Class

In societies where classes exist, one's class is determined largely by: Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 66

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

a. Occupation b. Education and qualifications c. Income- personal, household and per capita d. Wealth or net worth, including the ownership of land, property, means of production, etc. Income and wealth are important factors in determining a person’s social class; but they are not the only determinants. Social class also depends considerably on one’s education and occupation so that, despite relatively low income, a highly educated person or a person in a prestigious occupation, may be accorded a higher social class and vice versa. 

Characteristics of Social Class:

Some of the characteristics of social class are listed here: a. Rank Ordering: Social classes are ranked in of social prestige. b. Relative Permanence: A person’s social class does not change from day to day or even from year to year & it is relatively permanent. c. Intergenerational mobility: A person is likely to move out of the social class of his or her birth, into a higher or lower class by acquiring the values, resources and behaviours of the new class. d. Internal

Homogeneity:

Within

each

social

class,

they

are

homogeneous. Persons belonging to the same social class tend to be similar in of the types of occupations, the kind of neighborhoods they live in, their food habits, socializing patterns, etc. e. Distinct from income: Though income is an important determinant of social class, there is no one-to-one correspondence between the two. Social class depends equally on other factors like education, occupation, personal tastes, etc. and it is not uncommon for a person of relatively middle income to be of upper social class and a person with high income Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 67

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

may be in a lower stratum of social class. For example, many teachers and priests, who may not have high income, may command significantly higher prestige and status. 

Manifestations of Social Class

Those who can attain a position of power in a society will often adopt distinctive lifestyles to emphasize their prestige and to further rank themselves within the powerful class. Often the adoption of these stylistic traits are as important as one's wealth in determining class status, at least at the higher levels: a. Costume and grooming b. Manners and cultural refinement. For example, French sociologist Bourdieu suggests a notion of high and low classes with a distinction between bourgeois (high status) tastes and sensitivities and the working class tastes and sensitivities. c. Political standing vis-à-vis the church, government, and/or social clubs, as well as the use of honorary titles. d. Reputation of honor or disgrace e. Language, the distinction between elaborate code, which is seen as a criterion for "upper-class", and the restricted code, which is associated with "lower classes". Finally, fluid notions such as race/ethnic origin/caste can have widely varying degrees of influence on class standing. Having characteristics of a particular ethnic group may improve one's class status in many societies. However, what is considered "racially superior" in one society can often be exactly the opposite in another. In situations where such factors are an issue, a minority ethnicity has often been hidden, or discreetly ignored if the person in question has otherwise attained the requirements to be of a higher class. Ethnicity is still often the single most overarching issue of class status Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 68

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

in some societies (like apartheid, the Caste system in India, and the Japanese Burakumin ethnic minority). However, a distinction should be made between causation and correlation when it comes to race and class. Some societies have a high correlation between particular classes and race, but this is not necessarily an indication that race is a factor in the determination of class. 

Some Examples

a. Indian Caste System: The Indian caste system is one of the oldest and most important systems of social class with peculiar rigidity (in the sense that it lacks upward or downward mobility between castes). It differs from Varnashrama Dharma found in Hinduism, which allowed people born into a certain Varna to move upward or downwards depending on their qualification. It divided society based on skill and qualifications. Briefly, the Brahmin Varna was idealized as a leisurely priest class devoted to religious ceremonies, while the Kshatriya defended them as military princes. The Vaishya Varna artisans, farmers, represented the modern concept of the middle class and merchants and the lower Varna were the Shudra laborers. Within this basic framework were arranged a huge number of jatis, or subcastes. Despite being notorious for its rigidity, it should be recognised not as a religious system (as Varnashrama Dharma prescribed in Hinduism), but a social system, which evolved from Varnashrama Dharma. b. Chinese Society: Traditional Chinese society divided workers based on the perceived usefulness of their work. Scholars ranked the highest because the opportunity to conceive clear ideas in a state of leisure would lead them to wise laws. Under them were the farmers, who produced necessary food, and the artisans who produced useful objects. Merchants ranked at the bottom because they not actually produce anything, while soldiers were sometimes ranked even lower due to their Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 69

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

destructiveness. The Confucian model is notably different from the modern Eurocentric view of social class, since merchants could attain great wealth without reaching the social status accorded to a poor farmer. In truth, a rich merchant might purchase land to reach farmer status, or even buy a good education for his heirs in the hopes that they would attain scholar status and go into the imperial civil service. The Chinese model was widely disseminated throughout East Asia. c. Japanese System: The Japanese class structure, while influenced by the Chinese, was based on a much more feudal environment. The Emperor, as a deity, was unquestionably at the pinnacle of the Japanese class structure (and still is, despite no longer being considered a god). However, for most of Japanese history the emperor was not allowed outside the palace grounds and his will was "interpreted" by a shogun, or military dictator. Beneath the shogun, daimyos, or regional lords, istered the provinces through their samurai lieutenants. Perhaps through Chinese influences, and perhaps springing from a lack of arable land, the Japanese class structure also ranked farmers above merchants and other higher-class people.

3.5 Life styles In sociology a lifestyle is the way a person lives. This includes patterns of social relations, consumption, entertainment, and dress. A lifestyle typically also reflects an individual's attitudes, values or worldview. Having a specific "lifestyle" means engaging in a characteristic bundle of behaviors that makes sense to both others and the self in different times and places. Therefore, a lifestyle can be used to forge a sense of self-identity and to create cultural symbols for the way a person is. The behaviors and practices within lifestyles are a mixture of habits, conventional ways of doing things, and reasoned actions.


Page No. 70

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

In business, "Lifestyles" provide a means of targeting consumers as rs and marketers endeavor to match consumer aspirations with products. Lifestyles refer to patterns in which, people live spend time and money. These patterns reflect by demographical factors (the habits, attitudes, tastes, moral standards, economic level and so on… that together constitute the mode of living of an individual or group); that include things such as the individual’s activities in addition to their interests. As a construct that helps consumers interact with their worlds, lifestyles are a subject to change every time. Consumer behaviour research uses lifestyle data to determine which consumers by products. The term "lifestyle" first appeared in 1939. Alvin Toffler predicted an explosion of lifestyles ("subcultures") as diversity increases in post-industrial societies. Pre-modern societies did not require a term approaching subculture or "lifestyle", as different ways of living were expressed as entirely different cultures, religions, ethnicities or by an oppressed minority racial group. As such the minority culture was always seen as alien or other. "Lifestyles", by comparison, are accepted or partially accepted differences within the majority culture or group. This tolerance of differentiation within a majority culture seems to be associated with modernity and capitalism.  Values and Lifestyles (VALS) VALS is an acronym for Values and Lifestyles, a study undertaken by Arnold Mitchell at SRI in the 1970s to understand the changing habits and lifestyles of US consumers. VALS is based on personality research into specific components of social behavior. VALS asserts that people express their personalities through their behaviors. People with different personalities engage in different behaviors or exhibit similar behaviors for different reasons & fall into one of several categories of individuals in modern society as defined from answers to Values and Lifestyles (VALS) surveys as conducted in the late 1970s to early 1980s by SRI (Stanford Research Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 71

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

Institute), now SRI International. VALS places U.S. adult consumers into one of eight segments based on their responses to the VALS questionnaire. Descriptions of these VALS types are as under: a. Innovators: These are successful, sophisticated, active, take-charge people with high self-esteem and abundant resources. They are interested in growth, innovation and change. They are the leaders in business and government. b. Thinkers: These are mature, satisfied, comfortable, reflective people who value order, knowledge and responsibility. They are well educated and are in professional occupations. They are content with their career, families and station in life. c. Achievers: They are successful career and work oriented people who like to feel in control of their lives. Their social lives are structured around their family, church and career. They live conventional lives and are politically conservative, respect authority and status quo. d. Experiencers: These are young, enthusiastic, impulsive and rebellious. They seek variety and excitement. They are politically uncommitted and uninformed. Their energy finds an outlet in exercise, sports, outdoor recreation and social activities. They spend much of their income on clothing, fast food, music, movies and video. e. Believers: They are conservative, conventional people with commitment to family, church, community and the nation. Living by a moral code is very important to them. They favour established brands. Their income, education and energy are modest, but sufficient for their lifestyles. f.

Strivers: They seek motivation, self-definition and approval from the world around them. Unsure of themselves, low on economic, social and psychological resources, they are concerned about opinions and approval of others. Many of them seek to be stylish. They emulate those


Page No. 72

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

who own more impressive possessions; but what they wish to obtain is often beyond their reach. They often feel that life has given them a raw deal. g. Makers: They are practical people who have constructive skills. They live within the traditional context of family, practical work and physical recreation. They experience the world by working on it- like building a house, raising children, repairing a car, etc. They have enough skill, income and energy to carry out their projects successfully. They are not impressed by material possessions other than those of practical and functional purpose. h. Survivors: They tend to be chronically poor, uneducated, low skilled, elderly and concerned about their health. They are always preoccupied about their urgent needs of the present moment. Their chief concerns are safety and security. They represent a very modest market for most products and services.

3.6 Influence of Group on Consumer Behaviour  Social group A Social group is usually defined as a collection of persons, who share certain characteristics, interact with one another, accept expectations and obligations as of the group, and share a common identity. Using this definition, society can appear as a large group. While an aggregate comprises merely a number of individuals, a group in sociology exhibits cohesiveness to a larger degree. Characteristics that in the group may share include interests, values, ethnic/linguistic background, and kinship ties. Social groups also include institutions, which are more permanent groups with pervasive and universal presence in society, such as schools, religions and the family.


Page No. 73

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

Institutions are structures and mechanisms of social order and cooperation governing the behavior of two or more individuals. Institutions are identified with a social purpose and permanence, transcending individual human lives and intentions, and with the making and enforcing of rules governing cooperative human behavior. The term, institution, is commonly applied to customs and behavior patterns important to a society, as well as to particular formal organizations of government and public service. A Reference Group is a group whose presumed perspectives or values are being used by an individual as the basis for his or her current behaviour. In other words, a reference group is simply a group that an individual uses as a guide for behaviour in a specific situation. All individuals belong to a number of different groups and also aspire to belong to some other groups. When a person is actively involved in a particular group it generally functions as a reference group. As the situation changes the base of such behaviour may shift to an entirely different group, which then becomes the new reference group. Although an individual may belong to a number of groups, he/she normally uses only one group as the primary reference group in any given situation.  Classification of Groups Groups can be classified according to three classification criteria: a. hip, b. type of and c. attraction. a. Nature of hip: This refers to whether the hip is real or symbolic. hip groups are those wherein the head or leader of the group as also the key of the group recognise the hip of the individual who claims hip of this group. In symbolic groups, there is no provision or procedure for granting hip and the group leader or the key may even deny hip for the individual. However the individual regards himself as Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 74

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

a member of this group by unobtrusively adopting to the group norms & values & identifies himself with the group. Example of hip groups arefamily, YMCA, Work Organisations, Rotary Club, Lions Club, etc. Examples of symbolic groups are groups who emulate their heroes in movies, or celebrities, Fortune 500 Companies, etc. b. Frequency of : This refers to how much interpersonal the groups have with each other. As the group size increases the interpersonal frequency tends to decrease. Depending on this characteristic, there are two categories of groups1. Primary groups-These are characterized by frequent interpersonal . The of primary groups consider the opinion or norms of the entire group as important to follow. The examples arefamily, work organisations, business associations, etc. 2. Secondary groups- in secondary groups have limited interpersonal . The norms of secondary groups are considered as less binding or obligatory. Examples are- distant relatives, occupational groups like doctors, lawyers, ants, theatre artists, etc. 3. Degree of Formality: Based on this there are two classifications. In a formal group conduct and behaviour are highly codified. Examples are- School/college, workplace, religious groups, prison, etc. In informal groups, there are very few explicit rules about the group behaviour. The examples arefriendship groups, volunteer groups, community groups, family, relatives, etc. 4. Freedom of Choice: In this also there are two categories-

Choice

groups and ascribed or assigned groups. Choice groups are those, where the individuals voluntarily choose to . The examples arefriendship groups, community groups, volunteer groups, etc. The Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 75

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

ascribed or assigned groups are those wherein the hip is automatic for someone who has the characteristic that defines the group. The examples arefamily, relatives, religious groups, prison, etc.

3.7

Reference groups and Consumer Behaviour

From a marketing perspective reference groups are groups that serve as frames of reference for individuals in their purchase or consumption decisions. This concept is very useful and relevant because there is no restriction on group size or hip nor is they’re any requirement that the individuals identify with a tangible group. Reference groups that influence general or broadly defined values or behaviour are called as Normative Reference Groups. A child’s normative reference group is the immediate family, which plays an important role in molding the child’s general consumer values and behaviour. For example, the child will learn which foods to select for good nutrition, which are the appropriate dresses for which occasion, how and where to shop for which product, etc. Reference groups that serve as benchmarks for specific narrowly defined behaviour are called as Comparative Reference Groups. This could be a neighboring family whose lifestyle appears to be worthy of imitation in certain aspects like the maintenance of their garden, choice of home furnishings, types of vacations taken by them, etc. Both normative and comparative reference groups have significant influence on every individual. Normative groups influence the basic code of conduct whereas the comparative groups influence the specific consumer attitudes and behaviour. It is likely that these specific attitudes are dependant on the


Page No. 76

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

basic values & behaviour patterns established in the person’s early development by the normative reference groups. We can also add a third group of reference groups here- Indirect Reference groups which consist of those individuals or groups with whom a person does not have a direct face to face , such as movie stars, sports heroes, political leaders, TV personalities, etc.  Factors that affect Reference Group Influence The amounts of influence the reference groups have on an individual depend ion the nature of the individual and the product and also certain social factors. Some of these factors are discussed here: a. Information and Experience: A consumer with first hand experience with a product or service, or the one who is capable of getting the information easily about the product or service is less likely to be influenced by any advice or example of others. On the other hand the consumer who has little or no experience or the one who has no access to reliable & objective information on the product or service is more likely to seek out the advice or example of others. b. Credibility, Attractiveness and Power of the Reference Group: When a consumer is concerned with obtaining the accurate information about the product quality or performance, he is likely to get influenced by someone whom he/she considers as trustworthy and knowledgeable. Thus high credibility in the reference group is likely to influence the consumer more effectively. When a consumer is primarily concerned with the acceptance or approval of the person or group they like, or with whom they identify or those who offer them some status or benefits, they are likely to adopt their product due to the attraction. When a consumer is primarily concerned with the power that a person or group can exert over him/her, the choice of product may be the one which conforms to Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 77

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

the norms of the person or the group in order to avoid ridicule or punishment. However unlike the groups, which affect the consumer due to their credibility or attractiveness, the power groups are unlikely to change the attitude of the consumer. Different reference groups may affect a consumer’s beliefs, attitudes and behaviour at different points of time or under different circumstances. For example the dress habit of a male may vary depending on the place and role. He may wear conservative business suits in his work place while he may wear trendy and fashionable dresses in a party with friends. c. Conspicuousness of the Product: The influence of the reference group on a purchase decision of a consumer varies according to how visually or verbally conspicuous the product is to others. A visually conspicuous product will is the one, which stands out and be noticed (such as a car or a fashionable dress or jewellery); a verbally conspicuous product is the one, which may be highly interesting, or it may be easily described to others (like a vacation in an expensive location). Products, which are consumed conspicuously and status revealing are likely to be purchased with an eye to the reactions of the reference

group.

Privately

consumed

products

like

detergents,

shampoos, etc., which are less conspicuous, are unlikely to be purchased with the reference group in mind. d. Reference Groups and Consumer Conformity: There are different objectives of different marketers in utilizing the influence of the reference groups. The market leaders are normally interested in the ability of the reference groups to change consumer attitudes and behaviour, by encouraging consumer conformity. In contrast marketers who are responsible for a new brand or a brand, which is not the market leader, may wish to devise a strategy, which persuades consumers to be different and not just follow the crowd when making purchase decisions. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 78

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

This is called non- conformity appeal. In reality this non-conformity appeal can be thought of as an attempt to shift the consumer’s reference from one group (Brand A s) to another (non brand A s or Brand B s).  Consumer Related Reference Groups Consumers are influenced by a number of different types of groups that they come in with or those they may observe. There are five specific groups, which are quite representative of the different sets of such groups other than the family. The family is possibly the most compelling reference group for consumer behaviour and will be covered in the next section. The other five groups are: a. Friendship Groups, b. Shopping Groups, c. Work Groups, d. Virtual Groups of Communities and e. Consumer Action groups. a. Friendship Groups: These are typically classified as informal groups since they are usually unstructured & lack specific authority levels. In of relative influence, the friendship groups are the most influential after the family on the behaviour of a consumer. Seeking & maintaining friendship is a basic drive for most individuals. Friends provide companionship, security and opportunity to discuss several problems, which an individual may be reluctant to discuss with the family . Friendship is also a sign of maturity and independence, since this represents the breaking away from the family and forming social ties with the outside world. The opinions and preferences of friends are thus an important influence on the consumer in purchase decisions. Marketers of many products recognise this power and frequently depict friendship situations in their ads. b. Shopping Groups: two or more persons who shop together for any products or services or just to time can be called a shopping group. Such groups are often the offshoots of family or friendship groups and Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 79

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

they are often referred to as purchase pals. The motivation for shopping with a purchase pal may be just to share time together & enjoy the company or it may be for helping to reduce the risk when making an important decision. Or it may just be a defensive process feeling confident in a collective decision. Many marketers follow what is known as in-home shopping party, which typically consists of a group that gathers in a home of a friend to attend the “Party” devoted to demonstrating & evaluating some specific products. This provides an opportunity for the marketers to demonstrate the features of their products simultaneously to a group of potential customers. Given the spirit & excitement of such parties Tupperware generates a substantial portion of its business from such consumer parties. c. Work Groups: Consumer behaviour gets influenced by, both the formal work group and also the informal friendship-work group. The formal work group consists of individuals who work together as part of a team & spend a lot of time together. Hence they influence each other’s consumption related attitudes and actions. Informal friendship-work groups consist of people who have become friends as a result of working in the same firm. Recognizing that many marketers who were directing their sales people to visit homes is now directing them to make sales calls to offices during lunch breaks. d. Virtual Groups or Communities: A virtual community, e-community or online community is a group of people that primarily interact via some form of mechanism such as letters, telephone, email or internet rather than face to face. If the mechanism is a computer network, it is called an online community. Virtual and online communities have also become a supplemental form of communication between people who know each other primarily in real life. There are many virtual communities on the internet comprising of all age groups & also special interest groups. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 80

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

One of them is Orkut. Orkut is an Internet social network service run by Google and named after its creator, Google employee Orkut Büyükkökten. It claims to be designed to help s meet new friends and maintain existing relationships. Similar to Friendster and MySpace, Orkut goes a step further by permitting the creation of easy-to-setup simple forums (called "communities") of s. Since October 2006, Orkut has permitted s to create s without an invitation. In April 2007, Orkut introduced polls in communities. e. Virtual World: This is an extension of the virtual communities and one most popular example is that of “second life”. Second Life is an Internetbased virtual world launched in 2003, developed by Linden Research, which came to international attention via mainstream news media in late 2006 and early 2007. A able client program called the Second Life Viewer enables its s, called "Residents", to interact with each other through motional avatars, providing an advanced level of a social network service combined with general aspects of a metaverse. Residents can explore, meet other Residents, socialize, participate in individual and group activities, create and trade items (virtual property) and services from one another. The stated goal of Linden Lab is to create a -defined world of general use in which people can interact, play, do business, and otherwise communicate. Second Life's virtual currency is the Linden Dollar (Linden, or L$) and is exchangeable for US Dollars in a marketplace consisting of residents, Linden Lab and real life companies. While Second Life is sometimes referred to as a game, this description is disputed. It does not have points, scores, winners or losers, levels, an end-strategy, or most of the other characteristics of games, though it can be thought of as a game on a more basic level. It is a semi-structured


Page No. 81

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

virtual environment where characters undertake activities for the purpose of personal enjoyment. In all, more than 8.9 million s have been ed, although many are inactive, some Residents have multiple s, and there are no reliable figures for actual long-term consistent usage. Despite its prominence, Second Life has notable competitors, including There, Active Worlds, and the more "mature" themed Red Light Center. f.

Brand Community: A brand community is a community formed on the basis of attachment to a product or brand. Recent developments in marketing and in research in consumer behavior result in stressing the connection between brand, individual identity and culture. Among the concepts developed to explain the behavior of consumers, the concept of a brand community focuses on the connections between consumers. A brand community can be defined as an enduring self-selected group of actors sharing a system of values, standards and representations (a culture) and recognizing bonds of hip with each other and with the whole. Brands, which are used as examples of brand communities, include Apple Inc. (Newton, Macintosh, and iPod), Ford Bronco, Jeep, Lego, Harley Davidson and Royal Enfield motorcycles, Saab, Saturn automobiles and Subaru. Brand communities are characterized in shared consciousness, rituals and traditions, and a sense of moral responsibility.

g. Consumer Action Groups/Consumer Organisations: Consumer organizations are advocacy groups that seek to protect people from corporate abuse. Unsafe products, predatory lending, false advertising and pollution are all examples of corporate abuse. Consumer organizations may operate via protests, campaigning or lobbying. They may engage in single-issue advocacy (e.g., the British Campaign for Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 82

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

Real Ale (CAMRA), which campaigned with great success against keg beer and for cask ale), or set themselves up as consumer watchdogs such as the Consumers' Association in the UK. One common method is the independent comparative survey or test of a particular type of product or service, involving different manufacturers or companies. Another arena where consumer organizations have operated is food safety. The needs for campaigning in this area are less easy to reconcile with their traditional methods, since the scientific, dietary or medical evidence is normally more complex than in other arenas, such as the electric safety of white goods. Past lobbying by consumer groups has in part shaped the current standards on mandatory labeling, in developed countries. The aim of consumer organizations may be to establish and to attempt to enforce consumer rights. Effective work has also been done, however, simply by using the threat of bad publicity to keep companies' focus on the consumers' point of view.  Reference Group Appeals: Appeals by celebrities and other similar reference groups are used very effectively by ad agencies to communicate & influence their target consumers. There are many such types of group appeals, which are commonly used by marketers and some of them are: a. Celebrity Appeals, b. Expert Appeals, c. Common Man Appeals, d. Executive and Employee Appeals, e. Trade or Spokes-characters Appeals. a. Celebrity Appeals: Celebrities like movie stars, TV personalities, sports heroes, etc. are commonly used types of reference group appeal. For many consumers, celebrities represent an idealization of life that many of them imagine that they would love to live. One advantage of celebrity endorsers is that famous people definitely hold the viewer’s attention.


Page No. 83

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

There are four types of celebrity appeals used by marketers: i. Testimonial: Based on personal usage, the celebrity attests to the quality of the product or service. ii. Endorsement: Celebrity lends his or her name and appears on behalf of a brand with which he or she may not be an expert. iii. Actor: Celebrity presents a product or service as part of a character in the ad story. iv. Spokesperson: Celebrity represents the brand or company over an extended period of time. These are also known as Brand Ambassadors. Celebrity credibility with the consumer target is the most important element for the success of this strategy. Celebrity credibility means both the celebrity’s expertise and trustworthiness. For example, when a celebrity endorses a single brand the consumers are likely to perceive this brand in a highly favourable light and get influenced for a greater intention to purchase it. In contrast if the celebrity endorses a number of brands, his or her perceived credibility gets reduced because of the apparent economic motivation underlying the celebrity’s endorsement. Marketers also fear that if the celebrity endorsing their brand gets a negative publicity for any reason like some scandal, downfall in their celebrity status, etc. this will negatively impact the sale of the brand. b. Expert: a real expert, who because of his or her occupation, special training or expertise, is in a unique position to help the prospective consumer to evaluate the brand in comparison with competitor brands, will do this type of reference group appeal. For example an ad for kitchen equipment may feature a famous chef. c. Common Man: This approach uses the testimonials of satisfied customers. The advantage of the common man appeal is that it Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 84

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

demonstrates to prospective customers that someone just like them uses and is satisfied with the brand. Many TV ads show a typical person or family solving a problem by using the d brand. These commercials are known as ‘slice of life’ ads because they focus on real life situations with which the viewer can identify. d. The Executive and Employee Spokesperson: Many companies use their top executives as spokespersons in consumer ads. It helps if such executives are well known. Like celebrities, the executive spokesperson seems to be ired by consumers because of their achievements and the status implicitly conferred on business leaders. e. Trade or Spokes-characters: Familiar cartoon characters like Ninja Turtles, Mickey Mouse, R.K.Laxman’s Common Man etc. and trade or spokes-characters like the one in Amul ads serve as quasi-celebrity endorsers.

3.8 Family Family is used to denote a domestic group of people, or a number of domestic groups linked through descent (demonstrated or stipulated) from a common ancestor, marriage or adoption. A family may be defined specifically as a group of people d by consanguinity, affinity, and coresidence. Although the concept of consanguinity originally referred to relations by blood, the notion of "blood" must be understood metaphorically. 1. Classification of families Families worldwide can be classified into four types: a. Authoritarian Families, b. Neglectful Families, c. Democratic Families and d. Permissive Families.


Page No. 85

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

a. Authoritarian Families: The head of such families exercises strict authority on children and children learn to obey their elders in all matters. Although culture of obedience is considered as a virtue especially in Asian families, it does curb individuality among children and consequently their influence on family buying decisions. b. Neglectful Families: In such families, parents will be distant from their children and these children are neglected, because of the priority given by the parents for their own individual affairs. Single parent families invariably have this problem, because of the time pressure on the single parent. Children exercise no influence on their parent’s purchases in such families and are able o exercise relative autonomy in their own purchases if they are given the resources. c. Democratic Families: Every member in such families is given equal choice. Most family matters are discussed among family , especially those who would be affected by the decisions. The final decision could be a t one or it could be exercised b by the family head.

Children

are

encouraged

to

develop

self-expression,

autonomy and mature behaviour in such families. Children share influence in decision making with other of the family. d. Permissive Families: In such families the children are giving a lot of independence in conducting their own affairs, especially in their adolescent years. Unlike the neglectful parents, permissive parents watch children’s interests and then exercise freedom. 2. Intergenerational Influence (IGI) This refers to the transmission of values, attitudes and behaviours from one generation to another. Such transfer of values has been found to be significant in some of the market studies. This transfer is likely to take place in two directions: a. Forward and b. Reverse Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 86

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

a. Forward Influence: This transfer of influence is from parents to the children. This typically happens when children are young and live with their parents. b. Reverse Influence: The revere influence is from children to parents. This begins to occur when the children grow up and are exposed to new knowledge and to new role models. Consequently they begin to depend less on their parents as role models or for guidance and begin to carve out their own individual identity. This can occur due to two reasons: i. One when the children acquire greater knowledge and expertise than their parents in some products, which is acknowledged by the parents. ii. The second reason is called democratic justice wherein each family member is given equal opportunity in voicing his or her opinions in family decisions. This happens more so in purchase of common assets like car, furniture, etc. and also for products exclusively used by the children. c. Family Characteristics which influence IGI: Forward and reverse IGI are influenced by family relationship and relative expertise across generations. Family Relationship refers to then respect and trust between the parents and the children and also the harmony of relations and communications among them in all areas of life; not just purchase decisions. Relative Expertise is the acknowledgement by the children that the parents possess expertise about the products or services in case of forward IGI and for reverse IGI the acknowledgement of parents about the expertise of their children.


Page No. 87

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

Self Assessment Questions II I

State whether the following statements are true or false: 1. Social class refers to the hierarchical distinctions between individuals or groups in societies or cultures. 2. Though income is an important determinant of social class, there is no one-to-one correspondence between the two. 3. in primary groups have limited interpersonal . 4. Most of the northern European countries place a high value on environment and hence packaging and other environmental regulations are very stringent in these countries. 5. Two or more persons who shop together for any products or services or just to time can be called a work group. 6. Intergenerational Influence refers to the transmission of values, attitudes and behaviours from one generation to another.

II. What do you understand by inter generational influence?

3.9

Summary

In this unit, we have learnt about Cultures, Subcultures, Social class and different types of groups, which have their influence on consumer behaviour. We have also understood the process of Enculturation and acculturation, Elements of Culture and Characteristics of Culture. You also studied variations in Cultural values, dimensions of Cross- Cultural Values, cultural Variations in Nonverbal Communications, Subcultures, and change in subcultures and also Sub cultures in India. We also studied the meaning of Social class, factors affecting Social Class, characteristics of Social Class and manifestations of Social Class with some examples. We also learnt about the influence of various groups on Consumer Behaviour including a study of social groups, classification of Groups, Reference groups and Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 88

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

Consumer Behaviour, factors that affect Reference Group Influence, consumer Related Reference Groups, reference Group Appeals. We also studied about the concept of Family, classification of families and Intergenerational Influence (IGI).

3.10

Terminal Questions

1. Explain the concepts of enculturation and acculturation. 2. Describe some of the characteristics of culture. 3. What are the different dimensions of cross-cultural values? 4. Explain some of the cultural variations in non-verbal communications. 5. Describe some of the sub cultures in India. 6. Explain some of the factors, which influence reference group influence.

3.11

Answers to SAQs and TQs

SAQ I 1. Culture 2. Enculturation 3. Ritual 4. Environment 5. Uncertainty avoidance 6. Subculture SAQ II 1. True 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. False 6. True


Page No. 89

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 3

TQ 1. Refer to section 3.2 2. Refer to section 3.2 3. Refer to section 3.2 4. Refer to section 3.2 5. Refer to section 3.3 6. Refer to section 3.7 7. Refer to section 3.8


Page No. 90

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Unit 4

Perception & Learning

Structure

4.1 Introduction Objectives 4.2

Perception

4.3

Steps in the Perception Process

4.4

Factors affecting Perception

4.5

Selection in Perceptual Process

4.6

Thresholds in the Perceptual Process Self Assessment Questions I

4.7

Perceptual Organisation

4.8

Perceptual Interpretation

4.9

Perceptual process and Marketing Strategy

4.10 Learning 4.11 Theories of Learning 4.12 Characteristics of learning 4.13 Psychology of Simplification and Complication Self Assessment Questions II 4.14 Summary 4.15 Terminal Questions 4.16 Answers to SAQs and TQs

4.1 Introduction Process of Perception and Learning in an individual, are important factors for analyzing consumer behaviour. Sensations, Organisation, interpretation etc. are important steps in the process of perception. Similarly, Motivation, cues, response and reinforcement are the elements of Learning. This


Page No. 91

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

chapter deals with these factors in detail and then relates them with consumer behaviour. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Know the meaning and definition of Perception and Learning Processes.



Explain the factors affecting perception and learning.



Understand how these processes are important for understanding Consumer Behaviour.

4.2 Perception Perception is the process of acquiring, interpreting, selecting, and organizing sensory information. This has been defined as the process by which an individual selects, organizes and interprets stimuli received fro the environment into meaningful and coherent picture. This process is a highly individual process and two persons who are exposed to identical stimuli, can perceive them totally differently based on each person’s needs, values and expectations. The influence of each such variable on the process of perception and its relevance to marketing will be discussed in this unit.

4.3 Steps in the Perception Process There are three steps in the process of perception- Sensation, Organisation and Interpretation. Sensation: Sensation is the immediate and direct response of the sensory organs to the stimuli. A stimulus is any unit of input to any of the five senses- seeing, hearing, smelling, touching and tasting. Sensory receptors are the five human organs (the eyes, ears, nose, skin and mouth). A consumer uses all of these functions, either singly or in combination in the evaluation and use Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 92

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

of most consumer products. Sensitivity refers to the experience of sensation. Sensitivity to stimuli depends on the quality of the receptive organs of each person and also the intensity of the stimuli to which this person is exposed. For example a blind person may have an increased level of hearing sensitivity and hence can probably hear much more than another average sighted person. Sensation also depends on the energy change in the environment in which the person receives the stimulus. For example the person living near a railway line for a long time may get so much used to the noise of the train movements that he may not even perceive the train movement although it may produce a loud noise. Similarly fishermen used to the smell of fish all the time may not even perceive the fish smell in the market. Organisation A person will always categorise the sensed stimulus by categorizing it with similar object categories in the person’s memory. People do not experience the numerous stimuli they select from the environment as separate & discrete sensations. They tend to organize them into groups & perceive them as unified objects. For example, the sensation of eating a pizza will generate perceptions in the mind of the consumer, who identifies all the ingredients of sensation like taste, smell, touch, etc., compares these perceptions with his earlier memories & then classifies it as a specific type similar to or different fro the pizzas he has eaten earlier. Interpretation This is the final step of attaching meaning to the stimulus forming an impression as to whether it is an object of liking, and of what value this object could be of. The interpretation of stimuli is also uniquely individual, since it is based on what individuals will expect in the light of their previous Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 93

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

experience, on the number of alternative explanations they can think of and also the motives and interest at the time of perception. In the case of the Pizza example as above, at this stage the consumer judges whether the pizza tastes good and whether it is better or worse than the earlier experience.

4.4 Factors affecting Perception There are three factors, which affect the perception of any stimulusStimulus Characteristics, Context and Consumer Characteristics. Stimulus Characteristics These characteristics comprise of the nature of information from the environment like products, brands, shops, marketing people, friends, family, etc. Consumers perceive a stimulus differently depending on its characteristics. Both sensory characteristics and the stimulus content will affect such perception. The characteristic is considered as sensory if it stimulates one or more of the sensory organs. Strong sensory characteristics like bright colours, loud noise, strong smells, etc. attract more attention. Getting attention is important because the customer faces a large number of ments in his daily life and the marketer has to attract attention of the customer in this clutter. Incorporating new elements in ments, attractive packaging designs, point of purchase displays, etc will have to consider this aspect. Sensory elements like unity of product design (how all the elements of the design are unified as though they belong together) and how they blend with the typical design of the product category will determine the consumers’ aesthetic response. This has an important influence on the product preference. This is the reason many marketers spend huge amounts to


Page No. 94

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

ensure that their products are properly designed, so that the consumers have a good aesthetic response. The other characteristic of a stimulus that shapes perception, is its information content. After an ment has achieved the sensory perception objectives, the information content becomes important. This helps the consumer in organisation and interpretation. At this stage the important product features and the benefits for the consumer have to be communicated. This is most important especially for industrial products and hence, such marketers consider information content as a key element by which they can differentiate themselves and create customer loyalty. Context This is the setting in which the stimulus is received. While perceiving the stimulus, the consumers are influenced by the environment in which they receive this stimulus. This includes social, cultural and organisational contexts. This has been proven in many blind taste studies of beer taste. Most consumers associate the taste with the brand name and even when the bottle of their brand contains some other beer they tend to pick their favourite brand label as tasty. The taste perception is influenced by the context the brand name provides. Consumer Characteristics Consumer characteristics affect the perception especially when they have some prior experience with the stimuli. Such previous knowledge and feelings become expectations i.e. they start believing what this stimulus will result in. The consumer will then end up seeing what he expects to see. The consumer who goes to a restaurant about which he has heard excellent recommendations will end up liking the restaurant much more than another consumer who might have heard criticisms about the same restaurant. The


Page No. 95

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

principle underlying this is that, the expectations bias the perception process of an individual.

4.5 Selection in Perceptual Process Each individual in today’s world gets a huge amount of information every day and it is essential for being selective at each step of the perception process. They ignore some stimuli & some interpretation of stimuli. There are four processes by which the individual manages this selection- selective exposure, selective attention, selective interpretation and selective blocking. Selective Exposure A customer is exposed to a large number of marketing communications every day and only a few of these communications achieve actual exposure, depending on the needs and interests of the consumer at that point of time. Consumers look out for some selected ments, some selected shelf displays in a store, listen to some sales people depending on what they are planning to purchase. Consumers not interested in a product will totally skip the ments of such products. This selective exposure is also known as gate keeping. Consumers are becoming more and more selective as the advertising clutter increases. The usage of internet, wherein the consumer is able to selectively collect the data pertinent to his need and requirement in a more efficient manner, is becoming more popular in this regard. Selective Attention Even when the consumer is forced to look at an ment about a product which is of no interest to him/her the consumer may still ignore it. A person’s interest may be initially attracted by the stimulus characteristics; but beyond initial attention the consumer’s further processing of this information from the stimulus depends on the personal interest in the featured product or service. Making use of this principle, some rs Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 96

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

choose media which are of specialised nature where the product being d will fit in. For example, the computer laptops are d in computer related sections of the newspaper or magazine. Even on the internet customer specific banner ads are placed in related web sites. Such selective placements of ads benefit both the marketers and consumers, since the marketers get better attention and consumers are saved from all the clutter. Selective Interpretation Consumers tend to interpret the information in the stimulus selectively. After an important purchase the consumers tend to look for ads of the brand bought by them which will reinforce reassure the wisdom of their decision. Consumers also tend to distort any negative information that might threaten their ego. This phenomenon is called perceptual distortion or perceptual defense. Perceptual distortion is the process by which the consumers distort the incoming information whether it is done intentionally or unintentionally. Individual will see what they want to see and what they expect to see. Selective Blocking Consumers tend to protect themselves from being bombarded with stimuli by simply ‘tuning out’- blocking such stimuli from conscious awareness. People skipping the TV commercials while watching their favourite programmes by tuning to other channels is an example of such selective blocking.

4.6 Thresholds in the Perceptual Process Sensations can be experienced by individuals at different levels, depending on the situations. As sensory input decreases, our ability to detect changes in the input or intensity increases. When the stimulation is at its lowest level, we attain maximum sensitivity. This ability of the human body to adjust to the external environment by being more sensitive when needed actually Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 97

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

protects us from damaging, disruptive or irrelevant bombardment when the input level is very high. These different levels of sensitivity can be classified as under: Absolute Threshold The lowest level at which a person can experience a sensation is called absolute threshold. This is the point at which the person can differentiate between ‘something’ and ‘nothing’ for that particular stimulus. For example, when you feel the cold water in a swimming pool, initially the coldness of water is very clearly perceived. But once you get into the pool and swim for sometime the coldness of the water is less noticeable and we often call this as ‘getting used to’. In the field of perception, the term ‘adaptation’ refers to this ‘getting used to’ certain sensations, i.e. becoming accommodated to a certain level of stimulation. Many rs face the problem of sensory adaptation, by which the consumers will get so used to their print ads and TV commercials, that they will no longer ‘see’ them; that is these ads no longer provide sufficient sensory input to be noticed. This is the reason why they change their ad campaigns at regular intervals. Some marketers try to increase the sensory input in order to get noticed in all the advertising clutter. Some examples are, the entire page of the newspaper being taken up, an entire bus painted on all sides with same ad, etc. Some rs try the other route of decreasing the input, by having a whole lot of empty space in a huge ad with very little space occupied by the ad. Some TV ads use silence, the absence of audio sound to attract attention. Some marketers try unusual media to gain attention. Fragrance marketers include a small sealed swatch containing the perfume in the magazine ad or the direct mail. Package designers also try to overcome the absolute threshold levels of the package of the product to attract attention to their product in the store shelf among all the competitor brands.


Page No. 98

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Differential Threshold This is also called as “Just Noticeable Difference”. There is a law called as Weber’s Law, which proposed the concept of Just Noticeable Difference (JND). The Weber–Fechner law attempts to describe the relationship between the physical magnitudes of stimuli and the perceived intensity of the stimuli. Ernst Heinrich Weber (1795–1878) was one of the first people to approach the study of the human response to a physical stimulus in a quantitative fashion. Gustav Theodor Fechner (1801–1887) later offered an elaborate theoretical interpretation of Weber's findings, which he called simply Weber's law. According to this law, an additional level of stimulus equivalent the JND must be added for the majority of people to perceive a difference between the resulting stimulus and the initial stimulus. In simpler words, the magnitude of change needed for this change to be noticed depends on the base quantity. The larger the base quantity, larger is the magnitude of change required to be noticed. For example, if a company is marketing two sizes of ice cream bars of 6 inches and 3 inches length. For cost cutting they reduce the length by half an inch in case of both these sizes. According to Weber’s Law the consumer is more likely to notice the difference in the 3” bar than in the 6” bar. Similarly any product improvement programme also has to take this into . They have to improve the product benefit under improvement to such a level that, it is above the Just Noticeable Threshold. If it is less than this level, the consumer may not notice it and if it is much above this level, the cost increase may be higher than required. Same is the case of changes, which the firm wishes to make in the size or contents of packing, price, etc. The marketers have to ensure in such cases that, these changes are below the perceptible level so that the consumer does not notice either the reduction in the packing size or the increase in price. Even when marketers want to make any changes in their Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 99

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

packing design (to make it get a contemporary look), which has been in existence for a number of years, they have to make these changes in several steps - each change being below the JND level so that the consumer does not notice the change. Subliminal Perception When people are stimulated below their level of conscious awareness, such a process is called as ‘subliminal perception’ because the stimulus is below the threshold level. Such stimuli are too weak or too brief to be consciously seen or heard; but nevertheless strong enough to be perceived by a few receptor cells. There have been many reports of marketers using subliminal messages to influence consumption behaviour. Many studies undertaken by academicians and researchers have found no evidence of subliminal advertising persuading consumers to buy goods and services. There is however some evidence that, subliminal methods can indirectly influence attitudes and feelings towards a brand. There is no confirmation that, this has influenced consumption motives or actions. There is a gap between perception and persuasion. There is a general feeling that, subliminal messages whether effective or not, are intended to deceive consumers and hence not in public interest. Hence not many rs try this method.

Self Assessment Questions I 1. __________ is the process of acquiring, interpreting, selecting, and organizing sensory information. 2. _______________ is the final step of attaching meaning to the stimulus forming an impression as to whether it is an object of liking, & of what value this object could be of.


Page No. 100

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

3. _______________ Characteristics comprise of the nature of information from the environment like products, brands, shops, marketing people, friends, family, etc. 4. The lowest level at which a person can experience a sensation is called ___________ threshold. 5. ______________ Threshold is also called as “Just Noticeable Difference”.

4.7 Perceptual Organisation Consumers experience the stimuli they select from the environment after organizing them into groups & perceive them as unified wholes. This method of organizing simplifies the perception process for the consumers. The principles of perceptual organisation are known as Gestalt psychology (Gestalt in German means pattern or configuration). Gestalt psychology (also Gestalt theory of the Berlin School) is a theory of mind and brain that proposes that the operational principle of the brain is holistic, parallel, and analog, with self-organizing tendencies; or, that the whole is greater than the sum of its parts. The classic Gestalt example is a soap bubble, whose spherical shape (its Gestalt) is not defined by a rigid template, or a mathematical formula, but rather it emerges spontaneously by the parallel action of surface tension acting at all points in the surface simultaneously. There are three basic principles of perceptual organisation- Figure & ground, Grouping & closure. Figure and Ground We have seen earlier that the stimuli, which are in contrast to the environment, are more likely to be noticed. Simplest example is that of a figure on a ground (i.e. background). The background is generally considered as hazy, indefinite and continuous. The figure is perceived more Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 101

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

clearly as solid, well defined and in the forefront. The line which divides the figure from the background is perceived to belong to the figure and not to the background. Consider the example of music. Music can be a ‘background’ for their other activities or it can be a ‘figure’, wherein the listener is totally concentrating on the music. Consumers have a tendency to organize their perceptions into “figure and ground” relation ships. There were some ments of some airline in USA, which had in the background the twin towers of the World Trade centre in New York before September 11 2001(when they were destroyed by terrorists). After this shocking tragedy, the same ment when shown to some viewers they considered the Twin Towers as the “figure” and the plane as the “ground”. This reversal was the outcome of the painful events of September 2001. Hence the rs have to plan their ads carefully to make sure that, the stimulus they want to be noticed is the ‘figure’ and not the ‘ground’. Many ments confuse the consumers, because of the lack of clarity in these two patterns and such campaigns will end up wasting a lot of money. Grouping Consumers tend to group the stimuli so that they form a unified picture or impression. Such grouping helps the consumer in memorizing the stimuli and also for recalling them. For example, we tend to group the telephone numbers into two or three blocks, so that they can be easily ed. If we see Thums Up being consumed by youth, who are into many adventurous activities, we tend to associate Thums Up with youth and adventure. The marketers use this psychology to imply certain desired feelings and meanings in connection with their brands.


Page No. 102

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Closure All individuals have a need for closure. This need is expressed by organizing their perceptions to make into a complete picture even when the pattern of stimuli received by them is incomplete. They consciously or subconsciously fill in the missing pieces. An incomplete circle with a small section missing is still perceived as a circle and not as an arc. Incomplete messages are found to create better recall in the minds of the consumers. Promotional messages which are required to be ‘filled in’ will compel the consumer to complete the message and this act of involvement makes them the message for a longer period. Many rs run the audio of their frequently d TV commercial on radio without any change. Consumers who are familiar with the TV ad perceive the audio track as incomplete and hence in their need for completion will mentally play back the visual content from memory. This technique has been found to be very effective in creating strong recall value for these ads.

4.8 Perceptual Interpretation People selectively perceive the stimuli and then organize them on the basis of certain psychological principles. Subsequently the individual will interpret the stimuli and this is also unique to the person. This interpretation depends on their previous experience, on the possible explanations, and also their motives and interests at the time of perception. Stimuli are often not very clear. Some stimuli are weak, because of several factors like poor visibility, very brief exposure, high background noise, constant fluctuations, different angles of viewing, changing levels of illumination, etc. When stimuli are highly ambiguous the consumer is likely to interpret them in such a way as to serve to fulfill personal needs, wishes, interests, etc. Thus Perceptual distortion is supposed to take place. Some of the influences that result in perceptual distortion are discussed in the following paragraphs. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 103

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Physical Appearance People tend to attribute the qualities they associate with certain people, to others, who may resemble them, whether or not they consciously recognise the similarity. Attractive men are perceived to be more successful than average looking men. Hence attractive models are found to be more persuasive and have a more positive influence on consumer attitudes. Some other studies have established that highly attractive models are having expertise regarding products like jewellery, cosmetics, perfume, etc. and not problem solving products like anti dandruff shampoo, pimple creams, etc. rs have to keep this in mind while they select their models so that there is a rational match between the d product and the model used to promote it. Stereo types Each person normally carries pictures in his/her mind regarding the meaning of different kinds of stimuli. These are called as stereotypes and they serve as expectations in the mind of what specific situations, objects or people will be like. These are important since such expectations will determine how these stimuli are subsequently perceived. First Impressions It is said that first impressions are lasting impressions. In spite of this, each person will not know which stimuli are important, relevant or useful for future. Since first impressions are long lasting, it is essential that any new product is perfected in all it’s attributes before launching in the market. If the consumer gets a bad impression in the first use, correcting it subsequently will not yield good results since any such communication about the improved will not be accepted easily by the consumer who still carries in his memory the bad experience.


Page No. 104

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Jumping to Conclusions Before examining all relevant data many people tend to jump to conclusions. Many consumers have the habit of deciding about all the attributes of a brand being d just after listening to the initial portion of the ad. This can happen in the case of print media also since the consumer may read a few lines of the ad and come to conclusion. Hence copywriters have to keep in mind this phenomenon and give all their powerful arguments in the beginning of the ad. It has also been found by research that, most consumers do not read the contents in the labels of food packages, not even the quantity in the package. They just go by the size and shape of the package and come to conclusion regarding the quantity inside. For example, consumers concluded that an elongated package contains more volume than the round package although both contained the same quantity. Such findings have important applications in package design, advertising, pricing, etc. Halo Effect The halo effect refers to a cognitive bias whereby the perception of a particular trait is influenced by the perception of the former traits in a sequence of interpretations. The halo effect is involved in Harold Kelley's implicit personality theory, where the first traits we recognize in other people then influence the interpretation and perception of latter ones (because of our expectations). Attractive people are often judged as having a more desirable personality and more skills than someone of average appearance. Celebrities are used to endorse products that they have no expertise in evaluating. Consumer researchers have expanded this theory to include the evaluation of multiple objects based on the evaluation of just one dimension. Using this principle many marketers use an established brand name of one product to many other products in their range. In brand marketing, a halo effect is one where the perceived positive features of a particular item Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 105

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

extend to a broader brand. It has been used to describe how the iPod has had positive effect on perceptions of Apple’s other products. The term is also widely used in the automotive industry, where a manufacturer may produce an exceptional halo vehicle in order to promote sales of an entire range.

4.9 Perceptual process and Marketing Strategy Practically all the elements of marketing communications get affected by the perceptual process of the consumer, most important of which are - product design, brand names, packaging design, in store displays, print ads and also TV commercials. There are some special areas of marketing strategy wherein the consumer perceptual process has significant effect. These are as under: Price Perception The price/quality relationship refers to the perception by most consumers that a relatively high price is a sign of good quality. The belief in this relationship is most important with complex products that are hard to test, and experiential products that cannot be tested until used (such as most services). The greater the uncertainty surrounding a product, the more consumers depend on the price/quality hypothesis and the more of a they are prepared to pay. There are many cases wherein some products were perceived as low quality when the price was lowered. However excessive reliance on the price/quantity relationship by consumers may lead to the raising of prices on all products and services, even those of low quality, which in turn causes the price/quality relationship to no longer apply. pricing (also called prestige pricing) is the strategy of pricing at, or near, the high end of the possible price range. People will buy a priced product because: 1. They believe the high price is an indication of good quality; Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 106

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

2. They believe it to be a sign of self worth - "They are worth it" - It authenticates their success and status - It is a signal to others that they are a member of an exclusive group; and 3. They require flawless performance in this application - The cost of product malfunction is too high to buy anything but the best - example: heart pacemaker The term Goldilocks pricing is commonly used to describe the practice of providing a "gold-plated" version of a product, at a price, in order to make the next-lower priced option look more reasonably priced; for example, encouraging customers to see business-class airline seats as good value for money by offering an even higher priced first-class option. Similarly, third-class railway carriages in Victorian England are said to have been built without windows, not so much to punish third-class customers (for which there was no economic incentive), as to motivate those who could afford second-class seats to pay for them instead of taking the cheaper option. This is also known as a potential result of price discrimination. The name derives from the Goldilocks story, in which Goldilocks chose neither the hottest nor the coldest porridge, but instead the one that was "just right". More technically, this form of pricing exploits the general cognitive bias of aversion to extremes. Consumers will always have a ‘reference price’ in their mind about each product, at the time of purchase. If the actual price is lower than the reference price the product is perceived as good value for money. Another important aspect of consumer psychology is that there is a ‘band’ or ‘latitude’ of price i.e. the maximum and minimum levels of price in the consumer’s mind about the product, which he/she wishes to purchase. If the actual price is within this band the consumer will purchase the product. If it is more than the maximum level, the consumer may perceive it to be too Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 107

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

high and reject the product purchase. If the actual price is below the minimum level the consumer may perceive it as a substandard product and again reject. Another way this principle works is that, consumers have certain cut off levels for accepting a price and prices below this level will be acceptable. Many marketers like Bata shoe company use this psychology and adopt the ‘odd pricing’ method like Rs.99.00, 199.00, etc. Consumers perceive Rs. 99 as below Rs.100 and hence acceptable. Country of Origin Country of origin is the country of manufacture, production, or growth where an article or product comes from. There are differing rules of origin under various national laws and international treaties. With the globalization and consequent availability of many products from different parts of the world in each country, most consumers have fixed perceptions about the quality from different countries. For example the products from are perceived to be of high quality standards and those from China are perceived to be of very low quality. Such negative and positive perceptions may change with time. For example Japanese products were having a very poor quality image in early 1960’s and today they are perceived to be top quality producers. Corporate Image A corporate image refers to how a corporation is perceived. It is a generally accepted image of what a company "stands for". The creation of a corporate image is an exercise in perception management. It is created primarily by marketing experts who use public relations and other forms of promotion to suggest a mental picture to the public. Typically, a corporate image is designed to be appealing to the public, so that the company can spark an interest among consumers, create share of mind, generate brand equity, and thus facilitate product sales.


Page No. 108

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

The company does not solely create A corporation’s image. Other contributors to a company's image could include news media, journalists, labour unions, environmental organizations, and other NGOs. Corporations are not the only form of organizations that create these types of images. Governments, charitable organizations, criminal organizations, religious organizations, political organizations, and educational organizations all tend to have a unique image, an image that is partially deliberate and partially accidental, partially self-created and partially exogenous.

4.10

Learning

Learning is a change in the content of long term memory. Learning is the acquisition and development of memories and behaviors, including skills, knowledge, understanding, values, and wisdom. It is the goal of education, and the product of experience. Learning ranges from simple forms such as habituation to more complex forms such as play (activity). The term learning encomes the total range from simple- almost reflexive responses to abstract concepts and complex problem solving. There are four elements of learning in the marketing context: Motivation Motivation acts as a spur to learning. Those who are motivated will automatically look for education and information search in that particular product or service. Those who are not motivated may completely avoid any information on that product. The level of involvement will depend upon the extent of consumer motivation in achieving the goal object. A person interested in playing cricket may learn all about cricket through newspaper reports, telecasting of matches, the product ments for the equipment like bats, balls, pads, gloves etc. A person who is not interested in cricket will ignore all this information.


Page No. 109

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Cues If motives stimulate the learning, the cues are the stimuli, which give direction to these motives. The person interested in cricket may see the ad for a summer camp for teaching cricket and he may use this cue or stimulus to learn it in a methodical way. Cues serve to direct consumer drives when they are consistent with consumer expectations. Marketers should however be cautious to provide cues that do not upset their expectations. For example a person buying an up market fashion garment would expect it in an elegant store & not in an ordinary shop. Similarly he/she would expect such a product ad in an upscale fashion magazine. All the elements of the marketing mix should be able to reinforce the cues to guide the consumer in taking the final decision of purchase. Response How a consumer reacts to a stimulus or cue is the ‘response’. Learning can occur even when the response is not overt. The marketer may not get any response to his cues immediately or even for some length of time since the consumer is not yet interested in this product. However the continuous exposure to cues may influence the consumer to be favourably inclined when he/she is ready to purchase this product at a later date. While cues provide some direction, there will be many cues vying for the consumer’s attention. Which cue will get the response will heavily depend on previous learning of the consumer and how related responses were reinforced previously. Reinforcement Reinforcement increases the likelihood of a specific response in future for particular cues or stimuli. This is especially the case when there are several steps are involved. For example, for preventing hair fall there may be three products to be used one after another. If the first product provides some relief it provides some reinforcement to go in for the second level. If however Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 110

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

there is no relief, the reinforcement does not take place and the consumer may drop the product usage. This could also be extended to second time purchase of the same product.

4.11 Theories of Learning There are different behavioural learning theories also known as ‘stimulusresponse’ theories. Since they are based on the premise that observable responses to specific external stimuli signal that learning has taken place. There are different models to explain these responses, which are discussed in the following paragraphs with their relevance to Marketing. Cognitive Learning This is what we normally call for the normal process of learning. This is the process of acquiring new information from written or oral communication. This type of learning can also be classified into three categories:  Rote learning is a technique which avoids understanding the inner complexities and inferences of the subject that is being learned and instead focuses on memorizing the material so that it can be recalled by the learner exactly the way it was read or heard. The major practice involved in rote learning techniques is learning by repetition, based on the idea that one will be able to quickly recall the meaning of the material the more it is repeated. Rote learning is used in diverse areas, from mathematics to music to religion. Although it has been criticized by some schools of thought, rote learning is a necessity in many situations. Many rs aim simply to create a rote memory of their brand name by repeated presentation. Top of the mind brand awareness helps consumers to make everyday purchases more efficiently.


Page No. 111

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

 Informal learning occurs through the experience of day-to-day situations (for example, one would learn to look ahead while walking because of the danger inherent in not paying attention to where one is going). It is learning from life, during a meal at table with parents, Play, exploration, etc. This will also be applicable to preference of certain brands, which are learnt through this process.  Formal learning is learning that takes place within a teacher-student relationship, such as in a school or college system. Classical Conditioning Classical Conditioning (also Pavlovian or Respondent Conditioning) is a form of associative learning, that was first demonstrated by Ivan Pavlov. The typical procedure for inducing classical conditioning involves paired presentations of a neutral stimulus along with a stimulus of some significance. The neutral stimulus could be any event that does not result in an overt behavioral response from the organism under investigation. Pavlov referred to this as a Conditioned Stimulus (CS). Conversely, presentation of the significant stimulus necessarily evokes an innate, often reflexive, response. Pavlov called these the Unconditioned Stimulus (US) and Unconditioned Response (UR), respectively. If the CS and the US are repeatedly paired, eventually the two stimuli become associated and the organism begins to produce a behavioral response to the CS. Pavlov called this the Conditioned Response (CR). The original and most famous example of classical conditioning involved the salivary conditioning of Pavlov's dogs. During his research on the physiology of digestion in dogs, Pavlov noticed that, rather than simply salivating in the presence of meat powder (an innate response to food that he called the unconditioned response), the dogs began to salivate in the Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 112

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

presence of the lab technician who normally fed them. Pavlov called these as “psychic secretions”. From this observation he predicted that, if a particular stimulus in the dog’s surroundings was present when the dog was presented with meat powder, then this stimulus would become associated with food and cause salivation on its own. In his initial experiment, Pavlov used bells to call the dogs to their food and, after a few repetitions, the dogs started to salivate in response to the bell. Thus, a neutral stimulus (bell) became a conditioned stimulus (CS) as a result of consistent pairing with the unconditioned stimulus (US - meat powder in this example). Pavlov referred to this learned relationship as a conditional reflex (now called Conditioned Response). This type of classical conditioning will be occurring in our everyday lives. This has been proved in many marketing experiments. In an experiment in a supermarket, the music pace was varied on different days from slow to fast. On the days when slow music was played, the shoppers were found spending more time in the store & also bought more products when compared to the days on which fast music was played. This principle has been used by marketers when they pair their brand with a likeable celebrity. The celebrity’s personality by classical conditioning rubs on to the product itself. Some business customers boast about their famous clients. Some manufacturers go out of the way to get associated with prestigious retail outlets. Operant Conditioning: It is also known as Instrumental conditioning and it differs from classical conditioning primarily in the role and timing of reinforcement and was developed by B.F.Skinner. Reinforcement and punishment, the core tools of operant conditioning, are either positive (delivered following a response), or negative (withdrawn following a response). This creates a total of four basic consequences: Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 113

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

1. Positive reinforcement occurs when a behavior (response) is followed by a favorable stimulus (commonly seen as pleasant) that increases the frequency of that behavior. In the Skinner box experiment, a stimulus such as food or sugar solution can be delivered when the rat engages in a target behavior, such as pressing a lever. 2. Negative reinforcement occurs when a behavior (response) is followed by the removal of an aversive stimulus (commonly seen as unpleasant) thereby increasing that behavior's frequency. In the Skinner box experiment, negative reinforcement can be a loud noise continuously sounding inside the rat's cage until it engages in the target behavior, such as pressing a lever, upon which the loud noise is removed. 3. Positive punishment (also called "Punishment by contingent stimulation") occurs when a behavior (response) is followed by an aversive stimulus, such as introducing a shock or loud noise, resulting in a decrease in that behavior. 4. Negative

punishment

(also

called

"Punishment

by

contingent

withdrawal") occurs when a behavior (response) is followed by the removal of a favorable stimulus, such as taking away a child's toy following an undesired behavior, resulting in a decrease in that behavior. Marketers make use of this concept by offering extrinsic rewards like coupons, sweepstakes and rebates when their brand has no intrinsic ally superior reward compared to competing brands. Many airlines offer frequent flier programmes that accumulate mileage towards future free redemption. Modeling In this model the individual learns by observing others. Children learn from their parents, from their teachers, individuals learn from experts, etc. This type of learning is also called as imitation or imitative behaviour. There are four classes of people who are likely to be imitated by others: Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 114

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

1. Persons superior in age/grade hierarchy 2. Persons superior in social status 3. Persons superior in intelligence ranking system 4.

Superior technicians in any field

The choice of the model varies from culture to culture. The age hierarchy works more in eastern countries like Japan, India, China, etc. where elders are always respected and emulated. In western countries grade hierarchy is operational. In most societies the more educated are imitated by less educated persons, more skilled technicians are imitated by less skilled technicians and those who are in higher social class, are imitated by those in lower class. The middle class normally aspires to imitate the rich class.

4.12

Characteristics of learning

There are five characteristics of learning which are applicable irrespective of the approach. Strength of Learning A strong and long lasting learned response requires several parameters. The strength of learning is influenced by six factors: -importance, message involvement, mood, reinforcement, repetition and imagery. Importance This refers to the value that the consumer places on the information to be learned. More the importance of the information for the individual, the more effective and efficient the person becomes in the learning process. Importance is the dimension which distinguishes the high involvement learning situations from the low involvement learning situations. Most of the time marketers are faced with consumers in low involvement learning situations.


Page No. 115

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Message Involvement When a consumer is not very much motivated to learn, the strength of learning can be increased, by causing the person to get more involved with the message itself. Marketers use many techniques to increase the message involvement. They make the ads more interesting by involving factors such as a plot, possibility of surprise ending, uncertainty on the message till the very end, etc. Mood Research indicates that a positive mood during the presentation of information enhances its absorption. Learning enhancement caused by a positive mood suggests to the marketers to enhance the consumer’s mood through the commercials to improve the learning process. Reinforcement Anything that increases the likelihood that a given response will be repeated in the future, is considered reinforcement. Reinforcement has a significant impact on the speed at which learning occurs and also the duration of its effect. Reinforcement could be positive or negative. Positive reinforcement is a pleasant or desired effect. If a consumer visits a new restaurant and finds the food tasty, service excellent and ambience very pleasant, will have a positive reinforcement. Negative reinforcement is the removal or avoidance of an unpleasant response. Saridon tablet is d with the person suffering from severe headache getting relief with a single Saridon. This is an example of negative reinforcement. Punishment This is the opposite of reinforcement. This is any consequence that decreases the likelihood that a given response will be repeated in future. In the example of the person visiting the new restaurant, if the food was not


Page No. 116

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

tasty and the service poor this consumer is unlikely to visits the restaurant again. Repetition More times the people are exposed to the same information the more likely they will learn it. The effects of repetition will also be related to the importance of the information and the reinforcement given. Since many ments do not contain information of current importance to the customers or direct rewards for learning, repetition of ads will play a key role in the promotion process.

Imagery The brand name, the corporate slogan, etc. create images in the minds of the consumer. A properly selected brand name aids learning by leaving verbal as well as pictorial dimensions in the minds of a consumer. However marketers have to be careful in selecting a name which depicts a single attribute of the brand. In such cases the d attribute which have nothing to do with the brand name are difficult to . Pictures associated with the brand are also images & they enhance the consumer’s visual imagery which is a very effective learning devise. Hence the ads should contain the key communication points in the form of images or pictures which should also reinforce the headline. Background music, which conveys meanings, congruent with the meaning being conveyed through the verbal medium, has been found to be more effective in improving the learning process of the consumer. Extinction Extinction is forgetting what has been learnt. Extinction occurs when the reinforcement for the learned response is withdrawn, the learned response is no longer used or the consumer is no longer reminded of the response. The rate at which the extinction occurs is inversely related to the strength of the original learning. Sikkim Manipal University

There are some situations where the extinction is Page No. 117

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

desired. For example, manufacturers want consumers to forget some unfavourable publicity or some outdated product image. Stimulus Generalisation The rub off effect is what is termed as stimulus generalisation. This occurs when a response to one stimulus is elicited by a similar but distinct stimulus. Thus a consumer, who learns that Surf Excel manufactured by Hindustan Lever is a good product, assumes that another brand Lux soap made by the same company should also be good. Stimulus generalisation is quite common and most brand extensions are based on this premise. Stimulus Discrimination This refers to the process of learning to respond differently to similar but distinct stimuli. At some point the stimulus generalisation becomes less effective to the company and they would like the consumer to discriminate the stimulus instead of grouping together. This is achieved by advertising the specific brand differences. Sometimes, the product itself is altered in shape, size or colour for increasing the product differentiation. Response Environment Consumers tend to learn more information than what they can readily retrieve from their memory. One thing which helps in proper retrieval is the strength of the original learning. Stronger the original learning the more likely relevant information will be retrieved when required. The second factor which affects this is the similarity of the retrieval environment to the original environment in which the learning took place. Matching the retrieval environment similar to learning environment is hence important to marketers. This requires the knowledge of when and where the consumers make the brand or store decisions. For example a company may project a brand in a very pleasant and fun kind of situation without showing the product package properly, the consumer may find it difficult to retrieve when faced with many similarly packed products in the shelf of the store. Hence it


Page No. 118

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

may be better to associate the response with the situation which is what the consumer will face in the actual purchase situation.

4.13

Psychology of Simplification and Complication

In the real world the consumers may not follow the simple path of learning. They are likely to either simplify or complicate the learning process under different circumstance. Simplification: As the consumer keeps getting the experience of a lot of market related information in his/her lifetime, the customer develops a strategy of simplifying this enormous task by a process called ‘psychology of simplification’. When same problems are encountered repeatedly, such problems are ‘routinised’ with respect to their solutions. Problem routinisation will ensure that there is no need to make any new decisions for these problems. As consumers recall their previous experiences, they simply purchase the same brand as before. Such a buying strategy is termed as ‘habitual purchasing’. One of the underlying causes of brand loyalty is habit purchase. The consumers follow this practice simply because it simplifies their life. This is the psychology of simplification. With some exceptions, the consumers tend to reduce their choices; not increase them. This is needed especially in today’s marketplace which is flooded with too many choices. Consumers are creatures of habit; the incentives to change brands come from dissatisfaction with the current brand, lack of distinction among different brands, or offers of distinctly superior value by a competing brand. Complication The psychology of complication is the desire of the consumer to redefine a problem so that new decisions can be made. This happens due to three factors - Boredom, Maturation and forced irrelevance of Current solutions. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 119

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Boredom Human beings inherently desire variety. Repeated experience with the same stimulus will reduce its utility and the consumer will start looking for variety and novelty. Such a desire for variety is mostly from products with social or emotional value rather than performance value. Thus one does not get bored of using a washing machine; but they may get bored with food, clothing, perfume, recreational products, etc. which have sensory or emotional value. Maturation Consumers tend to outgrow old tastes as they grow. This is called as ‘maturation’. This is not the case of getting bored with the old; it is rather a feeling that old choices are no longer appropriate to the current time and age. Life status change is one reason for maturation. Major events in consumer’s life that change the status in life like moving to a new place, family composition changes (marriage, divorce, death, birth, etc.), employment status (appointment, promotion, etc.). These are some of the examples of life status change. These changes result in two types of needs. The first type of need is for products previously not needed like baby products when the baby is expected. The second type of need is a modification of the previous solution like an appointment may need more formal dresses compared to the student life. Maturation also may happen by a change in the self-concept that happens from the change in reference groups. A teenager may change his friends group which may in turn change the type of dresses worn. The third source of maturation is due to the rising expectations from the same product. As the consumers get satisfied with their previous expectations, their new expectations will raise making the old products unsatisfactory. This is what happens when consumers keep on buying latest models of computers, automobiles etc. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 120

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Forced Irrelevance of Current solutions This happens when the external environment makes the previous solutions obsolete and irrelevant. Three sources, which create this change, are marketers, business organisations and the government. Marketers may force change by phasing out certain products or by not having adequate stock at the retail counter or by going out of business. Thus consumer is forced to look for alternatives. Business organisations may change their employee medical insurance by which the employee may be forced to change. Governments may bring in new regulations like banning gutka, banning smoking in public places, banning certain imports, etc. which will force the consumer to look for a change. Self Assessment Questions II State whether the following statements are true or false: 1.

There are three basic principles of perceptual organisation- Figure & ground, Grouping & closure.

2. The price/quality relationship refers to the perception by most consumers that a relatively low price is a sign of good quality. 3. Classical Conditioning is a form of associative learning that was first demonstrated by B.F.Skinner. 4. Anything that increases the likelihood that a given response will be repeated in the future is considered reinforcement. 5. The psychology of simplification is the desire of the consumer to redefine a problem so that new decisions can be made. 6. Consumers tend to outgrow old tastes as they grow. This is called as ‘maturation’.

4.14

Summary

In this unit, you have learnt the process of Perception and Learning in an individual. You have studied the steps in the Perception Process like Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 121

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

Sensation, Organisation and Interpretation, the Factors affecting Perception and the Thresholds in the Perceptual Process. You have also learnt the process of Perceptual Organisation and Perceptual Interpretation. We have understood how this can be helpful in Marketing Strategies. We have also learnt the process of learning including Motivation, Cues, Response & Reinforcement. We have also studied various Theories of Learning like Cognitive Learning, Classical Conditioning, Operant Conditioning & Modeling. You have also learnt the Characteristics of learning & the Psychology of Simplification & Complication.

4.15 Terminal Questions 1. Explain the various steps involved in the perception process. 2. Explain how consumer characteristics affect perception. 3. What is selective interpretation and how does it affect perceptual process? 4. Explain the meaning of Differential Threshold. 5. Explain “Halo Effect” with examples. 6. Describe how price quality relationship affects quality perception.

4.16


SAQ I 1. Perception 2. Interpretation 3. Stimulus 4. Absolute 5. Differential


Page No. 122

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 4

SAQ II 1. True 2. False 3. False 4. True 5. False 6. True TQs 1. Refer section 4.3 2. Refer section 4.4 3. Refer section 4.5 4. Refer section 4.6 5. Refer section 4.8 6. Refer section 4.9


Page No. 123

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Unit 5

Individual Determinants of Consumer Behaviour

Structure 5.1


5.2

Motivation

5.3

Attitudes Self Assessment Questions I

5.4

Personality

5.5

Self concept Self Assessment Questions II

5.6

Summary

5.7

Terminal Questions

5.8


5.1 Introduction Consumer Behaviour is influenced by many factors like, individual, group, social,

economical

cultural

determinants.

Among

them

individual

determinants like, motivation, personality, attitude and self-concept play a very important role. This chapter takes you through the details of the said variables in individual determinants. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Explain the individual determinants of Consumer Behavior.



Understand

how

these

individual

determinants

like

motivation,

personality, attitude and self-concept influence Consumer Behaviour. 

Describe the theories and models of these determinants of Consumer Behaviour.


Page No. 124

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

5.2 Motivation Motivation is what makes people move and act. Motivation refers to the initiation, direction, intensity and persistence of behavior. Motivation is having the desire and willingness to do something. It is the driving force of all human behaviour. This driving force is produced by a state of tension which is the result of an unfulfilled need. Individuals always try to reduce this tension by behaving in such a way, which is likely to fulfill their needs and this response could be conscious or subconscious. Motivation is formally defined as the state of drive or arousal, which impels behaviour towards a goal object. Thus motivation is comprised of two components – 1. Drive or arousal, and 2. Goal Object. Drive or arousal provides the energy to take action. Goal object is something which the individual strives to achieve to reduce tension. This provides the direction to the individual to channelise the energy to act. There are different types of needs and goal objects, which motivate a consumer. Needs: All individuals have needs – some are innate and some are acquired. Innate needs are biogenic or physiological like food, water, clothing, etc. These are also known as primary needs. Individuals also acquire needs as a response to their environment. These are known as acquired needs or secondary needs. These are generally psychological or psychogenic. These are also termed as motives. Examples include prestige, affection, power, etc. Goal Objects: These are the results, which each individual seeks. All behaviour is goal object oriented. There could be generic goals, which are the general Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 125

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

categories of goals, which the consumers seek in order to fulfill their needs. For example, if the consumer states that he needs something by which he can clean his teeth, this is the generic goal. In this state the goal object can be of any product or any brand. The next stage is what is of interest for marketers and this is the product specific goal object, which clearly specifies the product as well as the brand. For example, if the consumer specifies that, he wants Colgate brand toothpaste in 200 Gms tube, this is a product specific goal object. Selection of Goals: For each need there could be different goal objects, that could satisfy the need. Consumers select their goal objects depending on their experiences, physical capacity, cultural environment and values, social environment, etc. The goal object has to be physically accessible and also socially acceptable. A consumer’s self perception also influences this selection. The consumer always tries to select a goal object which would be in consonance with the self image. A product, which would be closest to the consumer’s self image is most likely to get selected. Theories of Motivation There are a number of theories of motivation and many of them are very useful for a marketer. We shall deal with a few of them in this unit.  Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs: This is a theory in psychology, that Abraham Maslow proposed in his 1943 paper “A Theory of Human Motivation”, which he subsequently extended to include his observations of humans' innate curiosity. Maslow's theory contended that as humans meet 'basic needs', they seek to satisfy successively 'higher needs' that occupy a set hierarchy. Higher level needs are dormant till the lower levels are satisfied. In effect, according to this theory, dissatisfaction and not satisfaction motivates behaviour. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 126

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

This theory is based on four assumptions: a) All human beings acquire a similar set of motives through genetic factors as also social influences. b) Some motives among these are more basic than others. c) First the more basic motives are to be satisfied to a minimum level before other motives are activated. d) As more and more basic motives are satisfied, more advanced motives come into effect. Based on the above, Maslow proposed a hierarchy of needs. This hierarchy consists of the following needs- from the lowest to the highest (along with examples): e) Physiological needs (hunger, thirst, etc.)-food, water, medicines, etc.: This is the need required to sustain biological life; also known as biogenic or primary needs. These needs are dominant when they are unsatisfied. For example, for a person who is extremely hungry, he will have no other interest but food. He will want only food at that time. f) Safety & security needs (Protection, safety, etc.)- Smoke detectors, water purifiers, vitamin tablets, insurance, seat belts, safety helmets, etc. After the first level is satisfied, safety & security needs become the motivators for an individual’s behaviour. These needs are concerned not only with physical safety but also with Stability, order, routine, familiarity, & control over one’s life & environment. Health related products, insurance, savings s, education, vocational training, etc. are examples of these needs. g) Belongingness & love needs (social needs) - cosmetics, entertainment, gifts, greeting cards, gourmet foods, etc. This third level is the need for love, affection, acceptance, etc. Individuals look for warm and satisfying human relationships with other people and are motivated by their love


Page No. 127

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

for their families. Because of the importance of such feelings, the rs utilize this theme in many of their ments. h) Esteem & ego needs (self-esteem, recognition, status, etc.)- comfortable furniture, automobiles, hobbies, good clothes, etc. When social needs are satisfied, the fourth level becomes operative. This is concerned with ego needs. This can be inward directed like self acceptance. Self esteem, success, independence, etc. or outwardly directed like prestige, reputation, status, recognition, etc. The desire to “show off” one’s success and achievement through certain product possessions is an example of outwardly oriented ego need. i) Self-actualization (self-development) - education, meditation, yoga, religious rituals, mythologies, museums, etc. Maslow felt that most people do not satisfy their ego needs sufficiently to move to the next level i.e. the need for self actualization or self fulfillment. Maslow felt that the self actualization is not necessarily a creative urge; but it may take that form. Many large companies try to encourage their highly paid employees to find gratification and self-fulfillment in the work place by using this theory. 

McGuire’s Psychological Motives

McGuire proposed a system of classification, by which marketers could isolate motives likely to be involved in various consumption situations. In this system, motivation is first divided into four categories based on two criteria: a) Cognitive motivation or affective motivation: Cognitive motives deal with a consumer’s need for adapting to the environment and achieving a sense of meaning while satisfying the need. Affective motive is the one wherein the individual gets a feeling of satisfaction while attaining personal goals.


Page No. 128

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

b) Preservation of status quo or growth focus: Status-quo goal emphasizes on maintaining equilibrium while the growth-oriented motive emphasizes development. These four categories are further divided into 16 categories, based on the source and objective of the motive as under: a) Whether the behaviour is actively initiated or whether it is in response to the environment. b) Whether the behaviour helps the consumer to achieve a new internal state or whether it creates new external relationship to the environment. All these 16 motives are described briefly in the following paragraphs: 

Cognitive Preservation Motives:

1. Need for consistency (active, internal): A consumer always desires to have consistency in attitudes, behaviours, opinions, self-image, etc. If there is any inconsistency, the consumer will try to reduce such inconsistency. One of the examples is that of “Cognitive Dissonance” wherein the consumer tries to resolve the conflict in his mind of a wrong decision on a purchase by actively ing decision in his own mind by selective exposure and search. This will be dealt with more detail later. It is important for marketers to design their advertising campaigns so that the consumer beliefs are consistent with the information provided in the ment. If the objective of the marketer is to change the consumer’s attitude, different strategies have to be used which will be discussed later. 2. Need for attribution (active, external): This motive attributes the reason for a favourable or unfavourable outcome of a decision to self or to some outside element. This is based an area of research called as “ Attribution Theory” When a consumer feels that the salesman who is describing the product features is doing so for getting his commission, Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 129

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

he/she will discount the advice by attributing sales motive to the salesman. A similar advice given by a friend or relative may be accepted more readily since the consumer feels that this person is trying to be helpful. Since the consumers always attribute motives to the messages received by them from ments or sales people, many of these messages may not have the intended impact. One approach to overcome this is to use a credible spokes person in the ads. 3. Need to categorise (ive, internal): Consumers always organize the information received by them in meaningful and manageable categories. This will help them to process the vast amount of information in a proper way. For example, the consumer may categorise the price parameter of a product while taking a purchase decision. Hence Bata’s pricing strategy of prices for their footwear such as Rs. 99.95 instead of Rs. 100 will elicit better response since the consumer will categorise this product as being below Rs.100 level. 4. Need for objectification (ive, external): Feelings, impressions and attitudes of consumers are established by observing and comparing cues and symbols from outside. An individual always compares own behaviour with that of others and comes to conclusions as to these impressions. Clothing companies like Raymonds make use of this need to promote their products by presenting a subtle meaning of the desired image and lifestyle to the consumer. 

Cognitive Growth Motives:

1. Need for autonomy (active, internal): This is the need for

individuality and independence. This is characteristic of some cultures like that of USA. All cultures have this need at different levels, depending on the social acceptance of this need. While in America this need is actively encouraged from childhood, in Japan, this need is discouraged. Marketers respond to this need Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 130

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

by deg their products with unique features or by offering a wide variety of products. Many go for customisation of options as per the individualistic needs. Many products are d as unique, independent and individualistic to cater to this need. 2. Need for stimulation (active, external): This is a variety seeking

behaviour of a consumer just for self-stimulation. This behaviour results in brand switching and also impulse purchases. This need for stimulation keeps changing over time. Some consumers who in their early years want rapid changes become more stable over a period of time desiring stability. Some consumers who prefer stable environments may start getting bored & then look for stimulation by desiring change. 3. Teleological Need (ive, internal): Consumers have certain

images of desired outcomes and they try to compare that to their current status. Behaviours are constantly changed and the results are continuously monitored, by moving towards the desired state. This motive moves people to prefer certain patterns like good guys winning, hero and heroine getting together, etc. in mass media like movies, books, television serials etc. Marketers make use of these motives by deg their ad campaigns suitably. 4. Utilitarian Need (ive, external): In this need, consumer is vied

as a problem solver who always approaches situations or opportunities to acquire useful information and skills. For example, a consumer may learn new fashions and clothing styles, etiquette, lifestyles, etc. while watching a movie or a TV serial. Consumers


Page No. 131

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

may also approach advertising campaigns and store displays as a source of learning for future or current purchase decisions. 

Affective Preservation Motives:

1. Need for tension Reduction (active, internal): Individuals are always encountering situations which will induce stress and tension. In order to manage this, consumers look for products and services to reduce tension. Recreational products, holidays, etc. cater to this need. 2. Need for Expression (active, external): This is the need of the individual to express his/her identity to others. They feel the need to communicate to others, who and what they are by their actions, which include purchase and use of certain products and services. Clothing, automobiles, holidays in exotic locations, etc. allow the consumers to express their identity to others since these products have symbolic or expressive meanings. Many marketers have promoted their products to cater to this need by proper brand image building. 3. Need for Ego Defense (ive, internal): When a consumer’s identity is threatened, he/she will be motivated to defend and protect the selfimage by certain behaviours and attitudes. A person who feels insecure may go for well-known brands for highly visible products to avoid any chance of socially incorrect purchase. 4. Need for Reinforcement (ive, external): Because of expectation of appreciation based on past experiences, individuals act in certain ways. Many brands of clothing, furniture, paintings, handicrafts, etc. are designed to cater to this need wherein consumer expects appreciation from the society.


Page No. 132

Consumer Behaviour



Unit 5

Affective Growth Motives:

1. Need for Assertion (active, internal): Many individuals seek success, iration and dominance and they give a lot of importance to power, accomplishments and self esteem. Many sports goods and footwear are catering to this need. 2. Need for Affiliation (active, external): This is the need to develop mutually helpful and satisfying relationships with others by seeking acceptance and affection in interpersonal relations. This translates into a need for hip in groups and it is a critical part of most consumers’ lives. Many ad campaigns make use of such relationship themes. 3. Need for Identification (ive, internal): Every individual plays different roles in different situations. A woman may be a mother to the children, a cook in the kitchen, an executive in an organisation, a member of a women’s club, etc. Individuals gain pleasure from adding new satisfying roles and also by increasing the significance of already adopted roles. Many marketers promote their products to satisfy this need by encouraging consumers to assume new roles by using their products. 4. Need for modeling (ive, external): This is the tendency of individuals to base their behavior on others. Children try to imitate elders while learning to be consumers. Marketers use this need by showing desirable types of individuals using their brands. Other Models:  Murray’s List of Psychogenic Needs: Murray identified six psychogenic needs of individuals resulting in certain marketplace behaviours. These are: 1. Autonomy need-results in impulse buying, wearing unconventional clothes, etc. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 133

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

2. Dominance need- results in aggressively demanding attention in service organisations 3. Nurturance need – results in donating to humanitarian causes 4. Exhibition need- results in wearing high fashion clothing 5. Cognizance need- results in visiting museums, learning about new technology, etc. 6. Exposition need- results in playing opinion leaders.  Dichter’s list of consumption motives: Ernest Dichter, who was a strong

believer in Sigmund Freud’s

Psychoanalytical theory of personality, identified a set of motives, which underlie an individual’s consumption of diverse products. Since many of these motives are supposed to influence the consumption decision sub consciously, many rs have utilized this list by incorporating symbolism in their product advertising. This list of motives and the examples of consumption articles associated with each motive are as under: 1. Mastery over environment: Kitchen Appliances, Power tools 2. Status: Scotch Whisky, luxury car 3. Rewards: Chocolates, Sweets, Flowers, Gifts 4. Individuality: Tattoos, Flashy garments, Gourmet foods 5. Social Acceptance: Companionship, Sharing Coffee drinking 6. Love and affection: Toys for children, jewellery for wife 7. Security: Full drawer of neatly ironed shirts and pants 8. Masculinity: Toy Guns, heavy Shoes 9. Femininity: Dolls, decorations 10. Eroticism: Licking type Ice Cream bars, certain perfumes 11. Dis-alienation: Listening to and calling in TV talk shows (to stay connected) 12. Moral Purity/Cleanliness; White bread. Taking bath, khadi garments 13. Magic/mystery: Religious rituals, pyramids, and vastu. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 134

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Many more perspectives, theories and models are there in the classic literature of human needs. Marketers will have to evaluate the various models while applying for specific marketing problems. Customer Emotions and Moods: Emotions Emotions are closely related to needs. Emotions are also capable of driving an individual toward a goal object. Deprivations of goal objects may be experienced as negative emotions and their attainment may be experienced as positive emotions. A human being always tries to seek positive emotional experiences and avoid negative emotional experiences. Emotion, in its most general definition, is a complex psychophysical process, that arises spontaneously rather than through conscious effort, and evokes either a positive or negative psychological response or physical expressions, often involuntary, related to feelings, perceptions or beliefs about elements, objects or relations between them, in reality or in the imagination. Emotions have three components: physiological, behavioural & cognitive. Physiological component is the one, which happens by reflex – instantaneously and automatically as a response to a stimulus. Feelings of tremors, butterflies in the stomach, sudden perspiration, and sudden burst of energy, etc. in response to some external cues are examples of this component. After this, the next stage is that of the cognitive component- the thinking stage, when the individual tries to understand the stimulus- its meaning, whether friend or foe, etc.


Page No. 135

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Depending on the cognitive appraisal and the understanding of the initial stimulus, there could be further physiological response or behaviour – this time at a reduced level after calming down. Marketers can use this concept in two ways: 1. The product or service may be designed to fit appropriate consumer emotions. This takes the shape of deg the stimulus. 2. The second application is in helping in the cognitive appraisal. This can be done by proper communication such as attaching symbolism to products & services in advertising or in explaining certain deviations from the expected marketplace outcomes. The recent example is that of Nokia handling the problem of defective batteries in their cell phones. Psychologist Robert Plutchic has proposed eight primary emotions & eight secondary emotions. The primary emotions & the way of measuring these emotions by using relevant adjectives are as under: a) Fear: threatened, frightened, intimidated b) Anger: hostile, annoyed, irritated c) Joy: happy, cheerful, delighted d) Sadness: gloomy, sad, depressed e) Acceptance: helped, accepted, trusting f)

Disgust: disgusted, offended, unpleasant

g) Anticipation: alert, attentive, curious h) Surprise: puzzled, confused, startled Other emotions experienced by individuals are the combinations of these emotions. For example, joy & acceptance combination results in the emotion of love. The other such secondary emotions are: Acceptance + Fear

=

Submission

Fear + Surprise

=

Awe

Surprise + Sadness =

Disappointment

Sadness + Disgust

Remorse

=


Page No. 136

Consumer Behaviour

Disgust + Anger

Unit 5

=

Contempt

Anger + Anticipation =

Aggressiveness

Anticipation + Joy

Optimism

=

There are many research studies linking consumption of products and services to directly experienced emotions. These studies have helped marketers in deg many advertising campaigns and also in adding certain features in the products to take care of positive or negative emotions. Moods: A mood is a relatively less intensive emotional or affective state. Moods differ from emotions in that they are less specific, often less intense, less likely to be triggered by a particular stimulus or event, and temporary. Moods generally have either a positive or negative valence. In other words, people often speak of being in a good or bad mood, unlike acute, emotional feelings like fear and surprise. Mood also differs from temperament or personality traits which are even more general and long lasting. However, personality traits (e.g. Optimism, Neuroticism) tend to predispose certain types of moods. Mood is an internal, subjective state, but it often can be inferred from posture and other observable behaviors. Moods affect the consumer behaviour in general and also the response of the consumer to the marketing activities to which he/she is exposed to at the time. Hence this is a very important concept for marketing. Some examples of the marketing stimuli, which affect the moods of consumers (whether positive or negative), are as under: 

The ambience of a store or a restaurant



The response of a sales person



The sensory features of the product



The tone & manner of the advertising


Page No. 137

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Moods have been found to result in favourable or unfavourable response to the marketer’s efforts. Consumer researchers have found that customers are found to linger longer in positive mood environments and feel more positive towards brands, which create feelings of warmth. The recent ment campaign of Surf Excel – “Daag Achcha Hain Na”, is utilizing this concept in creating a positive feeling towards their product. Marketers can use advertising, point of sale material, celebrity endorsements, free gifts, store ambience, etc. to induce positive moods in consumers to enable a more positive evaluation of their brand thereby influencing choice. Motivational Research: Motivational research is invariably qualitative research, designed to find out consumers’ subconscious or hidden motivations, based on the assumption that, the consumers are not always aware of the reasons for their behaviour. Motivational research has been successfully used to discover underlying feelings, attitudes and emotions concerning any product, service or brand use. However there have been some criticisms of motivational research. Because of the intensive nature of the qualitative research, samples were necessarily small. Thus there was concern that about generalizing findings to the entire market. Criticism was also about the projective tests, which were originally designed and developed for clinical research, rather than for consumer behavior specifically. Despite all these criticisms, motivational research is still regarded as an important tool by marketers, who want to gain deeper insight into the unexplained reasons of consumer behavior beyond what conventional marketing research techniques can yield. Since these motivational researches often reveal unsuspected consumer motivations concerning product or brand usage, the principle use of such research is in Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 138

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

development of new ideas for promotional campaigns- ideas, which can penetrate

the

consumers’

conscious

awareness

by

appealing

to

unrecognized needs. Motivational research also provides marketers the basic knowledge for new product development and enables them to predict consumer behaviour to new product ideas and advertising to avoid costly errors. Further, these qualitative research findings will pave the way for the researchers to design structured quantitative marketing research studies, to be conducted on a larger more representative sample of customers. In spite of all the criticisms of motivational research, there is new compelling evidence that, the subconscious is the site of a far larger portion of mental life. The subconscious mind may understand and respond to non-verbal symbols, form emotional responses and guide actions for the consumer largely independent of the conscious awareness. Hence despite some shortcomings, motivational research has been proved to be of great value to marketers concerned with developing new product ideas & new advertising copy appeals. Motivation Theory and Marketing Strategy: Consumers do not buy products; they buy motive satisfaction or solutions to their problems or the benefits. For example, consumers do not buy perfume; they buy romance, sex appeal, sensual pleasure, sophistication, or many other emotional and psychological benefits. Marketers should recognise that they are not selling product attributes; but they are selling product benefits. It is important to discover the motives that their products and brands can satisfy and develop marketing mixes around these motives. There are many instances wherein multiple motives are involved in consumer behaviour. There are three steps in using these principles in developing suitable marketing strategies: Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 139

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

a) Discovering Purchase Motives: When a consumer is asked to tell the researcher the reasons why he buys a certain product, there are two types of responses, which are received: 1. Motives, which are known to the consumer and freely itted, are called as ‘Manifest Motives’. These are the motives the consumer immediately communicates without any hesitation. Motives, which conform to a society’s prevailing value system, are more likely to be manifest than those in conflict with such values are. 2.

The second group of motives which are either unknown to the consumer or that he /she is reluctant to it are called as ‘Latent Motives’.

The task of a Marketer is to determine the combination of manifest as well as latent motives influencing the target consumer. Manifest motives are relatively easy to determine. Direct questions will generally produce reasonably accurate assessments of these motives. Determining the latent motives is however substantially more complex and difficult. Motivational research or projective techniques are designed to provide information on latent motives. Apart from the traditional projective techniques used on a focus group, there are new developments like ‘laddering’ or constructing a ‘ means-end’ or ‘benefit’ chain. A product or brand is shown to a consumer who names all the benefits that use of that product may provide. Then for each benefit mentioned, the consumer is asked to identify further benefits that each of these named benefits will provide. This is repeated till the consumer can no longer identify additional benefits.


Page No. 140

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

b) Deg the Marketing Strategy: This is the next step after understanding the combination of motives influencing the consumer. This covers all aspects from product deg

to

marketing

communications.

There

are

several

considerations while deg these strategies. First, to the extent possible the product must provide more than one benefit, depending on its importance and the advertising should communicate these multiple benefits. Direct appeals are generally effective for manifest motives since consumers are aware and willing to discuss these motives. However since the latent motives are quite often not completely socially desirable, indirect appeals are frequently used. The ad campaign should cover the target consumer’s manifest as well as latent motives for purchasing the product. c) Handling Motivational Conflicts: With the multiplicity of manifest and latent motives of each consumer and the many situations in which these motives are activated, there are frequent conflicts between motives. The marketer should analyse the situations that are likely to result in a motivational conflict, provide a solution to the conflict and attract the patronage of these consumers who are facing the conflict. There are three types of conflict, which are important to marketers: d) Approach-Approach conflict: The consumer may face a conflict between two products or services to take a decision. For example a consumer may have to decide on whether to take his family for a holiday or buy an air conditioners for the house with the limited budget. The conflict is normally resolved by a timely ment for either of these alternatives or a price modification like- ‘buy now pay later’ offer which could result in the selection of both alternatives.


Page No. 141

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

e) Approach-Avoidance conflict: A person who is worried about his/her weight and at the same time wanting an ice cream, may face this type of conflict The development of low calorie or pro-biotic ice cream reduces this conflict and allows the diet conscious consumer to eat the ice cream at the same time controlling the calorie intake. Similarly, people who want to enjoy sunbathing in a beach may be worried about the suntan and also health risks of sun exposure. The marketer who offers a sun tan lotion, which will take care of these concerns will reduce the conflict of the consumer, who can enjoy the sun bathing after applying this lotion. f) Avoidance-Avoidance conflict: One example is that of a major breakdown of the washing machine and the consumer may not spend on a new washing machine, or pay to have the old machine repaired or go without the machine. Here again the offer of purchase with installment payments and offer of exchange of new machine for the old one will reduce the conflict for the consumer to motivate him to purchase the new machine. The other option is for the old brand of washing machine offering an annual maintenance contract, which will take care of the maintenance problems.

5.3 Attitudes Attitude is a hypothetical construct that represents an individual's like or dislike for an item. Attitudes are positive, negative or neutral views of an "attitude object": i.e. a person, behaviour or event. People can also be "ambivalent" towards a target, meaning that they simultaneously possess a positive and a negative bias towards the attitude in question. Attitudes are defined as learned predispositions to respond to an object or class of objects in a consistently favourable or unfavourable way.


Page No. 142

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Attitudes are learnt and they are formed on the basis of some experience or information about the object. The object in this context refers to many market related concepts like a product, brand, product category, service, product use, people, ment, price, retail outlet, etc. Attitudes remain in the mind. This is what is known as predisposition and this will propel the consumer towards behaving in a certain way or prevent the consumer from behaving in another way. Attitudes result in consistent response- favourable or unfavourable. However despite their consistency attitudes are not necessarily permanent and they do change. Attitudes come from judgments. Attitudes develop on the basis of three factors- affect, behavioral change or conation and cognition. The affective response is a physiological response that expresses an individual's preference for an entity. The behavioral intention is a verbal indication of the intention of an individual. The cognitive response is a cognitive evaluation of the entity to form an attitude. Most attitudes in individuals are a result of observational learning from their environment. The link between attitude and behavior exists but depends on human behavior, some of which is irrational. For example, a person who is in favor of blood transfusion may not donate blood. This makes sense if the person does not like the sight of blood, which explains this irrationality. The above three factors are discussed in more detail in the following paragraphs: Cognitions are also called beliefs. Beliefs are expectations of what something is or is not; or what something will do or will not do. There are three types of beliefs- descriptive, evaluative and normative.


Page No. 143

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Descriptive beliefs are about the quality or attributes of the object or person. The examples are- ‘this computer has a large memory or’, ‘this airline is always late”, etc. Evaluative beliefs are about personal likes and dislikes, preferences, etc. Normative beliefs are moral & ethical in nature and mostly they relate to the way someone acts. Hierarchies in Attitudes The three components of attitude are related and the sequence in which these components occur for a person is known as ‘hierarchy of attitudes’ There are three types of attitude hierarchy which are discussed in the following paragraphs: a) Learning Hierarchy: This is the most commonly occurring hierarchy. In this cognition or thoughts come first, affect or feelings come next and conative or action comes last. In this case the consumer thinks first, feels next and acts last. The learning hierarchy assumes brand beliefs lead to brand feelings and finally to brand purchase. An example is that of choosing a place for a holiday. In this case the consumer collects all the information about several alternatives, and based on the judgment of suitable alternatives evaluate the personal feelings generated by each of the alternatives and then finally decide on which place to go. b) Emotional Hierarchy: Here the consumer feels first and then acts and thinks last. Based on the feelings towards a brand the consumer buys or avoids a brand. The thinking and learning takes place through product usage. In this case, considering the example of holiday planning, the consumer may have some positive feelings about some beach resort, which the consumer has seen on TV and decide on this without going into any other information. The cognition or learning process takes place last when the consumer is staying in the resort. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 144

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

c) Low Involvement Hierarchy: This is the case wherein the consumer is not very much involved since not much is at stake unlike in the case of the earlier hierarchies of learning and emotional hierarchies where the consumer is highly involved. Take the example of a consumer who sees a new type of brown bread which seems to be good while shopping for other products in a store. The consumer may not think much about this and simply buy it and take it home. Thus the action of purchase (Conation) comes first in such a case, then the feelings (affect) and then thoughts (cognitive). Factors affecting Attitude Change: Attitudes can be changed through persuasion. The celebrated work of Carl Hovland, at Yale University in the 1950s and 1960s, helped to advance knowledge of persuasion. In Hovland's view, we should understand attitude change as a response to communication. He and his colleagues did experimental research into the factors that can affect the persuasiveness of a message: 1. Target Characteristics: These are characteristics that refer to the person who receives and processes a message. One such is intelligence trait intelligence – it seems that more intelligent people are less easily persuaded by one-sided messages. Another variable that has been studied in this category is self esteem. Although it is sometimes thought that those higher in self-esteem are less easily persuaded, there is some evidence that the relationship between self-esteem and persuasibility is actually curvilinear, with people of moderate self-esteem being more easily persuaded than both those of high and low selfesteem levels. The mind frame and mood of the target also plays a role in this process.


Page No. 145

Consumer Behaviour

2. Source expertise,

Unit 5

Characteristics: Trust

The

trustworthiness

major and

source

characteristics

Interpersonal

are

attraction

/

attractiveness. The credibility of a perceived message has been found to be a key variable here. If one reads a report on health and believes it comes from a professional medical journal, one may be more easily persuaded than if one believes it is from a popular newspaper. Some psychologists have debated whether this is a long-lasting effect and Hovland and Weiss (1951) found the effect of telling people that a message came from a credible source disappeared after several weeks (the so-called "sleeper effect"). Whether there is a sleeper effect is controversial. Received wisdom is that if people are informed of the source of a message before hearing it, there is less likelihood of a sleeper effect than if they are told a message and then told its source. 3. Message Characteristics: The nature of the message plays a role in persuasion. Sometimes presenting both sides of a story is useful to help change attitudes. 4. Cognitive Routes: A message can appeal to an individual's cognitive evaluation to help change an attitude. This is studied in more detail in the coming paragraphs. Routes for Changing of Attitude There are many questions faced by marketers like why do some attitudes persist indefinitely while some others change quite often? To understand such issues and also to influence changes in consumer attitudes, one has to understand how attitudes can be formed where none existed before and how the already existing attitudes can be changed. There are three routes for attitude formation and change: Cognitive, affective and conative. a) Cognitive Route: This is the most common and effective approach. In this case, the cognitive component of the consumer’s attitude is focused


Page No. 146

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

upon. There are four marketing strategies to achieve changes in attitude through this route: i) Change beliefs: In this strategy, the marketer tries to shift the beliefs of the consumer about the performance of the brand in one or more attributes. This is done by providing facts & statements about the performance of the particular attribute. When Coca-Cola faced the accusation that pesticide residues were found in many Coke bottles, they d giving the lab reports of reputed testing laboratories to prove that the pesticide residue was within tolerable limits. ii) Shift importance: Most consumers organize the various attributes of a brand in their mind in the order of their importance. Marketers try this method of convincing the consumer that the strong attributes of their brand are most important to the consumer. For example, Saffola brand cooking oil s that controlling cholesterol is important to the consumer and by inference since Saffola is known for this attribute the consumer is persuaded to change to this brand. iii) Add beliefs: This is another approach in which the marketer tries to add new beliefs to the already existing set of beliefs, pertaining to the brand attributes. One beer brand started advertising that date of packing of beer is important since freshness is an important attribute. This was relatively unknown to the consumer earlier and the consumer never bothered to look at the packing date. After this campaign the consumer started considering the age of beer as a relevant attribute. iv) Change ideal: In this strategy, the marketer tries to change the perceptions of the ideal brand. There are many five star hotels that have come up recently with proper certification on eco friendly concept being followed in their hotel. They try to change the attitude Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 147

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

of the hotel guests to consider an eco friendly hotel as an ideal attribute for an ideal brand. b) Affective Route: Many companies try to influence consumers’ liking of their brand without trying to change the beliefs. If the liking for the product increases in the mind of the consumer, it will lead to positive beliefs which in turn will lead to purchase of the brand. There are three basic approaches to achieve this: i) Classical Conditioning: In this approach a stimulus the consumer likes such as music is consistently paired with the brand name. Over a period, some of the positive feelings associated with the music will get transferred to the brand. Other such stimuli used are pictures, which create, warm, loving feelings, etc. ii) Affect towards ad: Positive feelings towards the ad may increase the liking for the brand. Using humour, celebrities, or emotional stories in the ads increase the affect towards the ad. Ads which arouse negative feelings or emotions like fear, guilt, sorrow, etc. can also bring in attitude change. For example CRY (Child Relief & You) a charity organisation shows pictures of destitute children to generate sympathy and thus contributions to the cause. iii) Mere Exposure: Just by increased exposure brand preference can be improved. Presenting the brand to the consumer on a large number of occasions does this. Repetitive ments of low involvement products have been proven to increase the liking of the consumer and subsequent purchase. Thus, in this route which utilizes the concept of classical conditioning, the following points will have to be noted: –

ments with this concept need not contain cognitive (Factual or attribute) information.


Page No. 148

Consumer Behaviour

–

Unit 5

Liking of the consumer for the ad itself will be critical for this type of campaign

–

Repetition of the ads is most important.

–

Traditional types of measuring effectiveness of advertising focusing on cognitive component will not be appropriate for these types of campaigns.

Psychological theories for Attitude Change: The route followed by a marketer for molding or changing the consumer attitude as discussed earlier are what is done externally to elicit the desired change in attitude. In the following paragraphs we shall study the theories of internal psychological processes which occur in the mind of the consumer to produce these changes. There are four groups of theories, which explain these processes: a) Learning Theories: All the four learning theories viz. classical conditioning, instrumental conditioning, modeling and cognitive learning can be used to explain & influence changes in attitude. i) Classical conditioning methods are used to reposition a brand. Gold Spot was repositioned as a children’s drink by showing its consumption in children’s birthday parties. This learning method is used as already discussed for – creating new associations by pairing with certain celebrities, situations or groups, – influencing the affective component by presenting emotional stimuli, – using environmental restructuring (like in the case of IBM repositioning itself as e-business solution provider rather than hardware manufacturer).


Page No. 149

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

ii) Instrumental Conditioning can also be used to change attitudes. Frequent use rewards given by airlines & hotels, free samples, etc. are examples of inducing attitude change through this method. iii) Modeling can also change attitudes. The fashion change induced by fashion shows by well known models is an example of this. By desired association even clothes which can be drastically different can find acceptance. iv) Cognitive learning is the most effective method of attitude change. Information is generated by the consumer himself or herself by a process of reasoning which is called ‘inference making’. Based on some initial information and some logical expectations, the consumer generates further information internally to fill in missing information. Price- quality relation ships, country of origin effects are some examples. b) Attribution Processes: Attribution motivation is the motivation to assign causes and to explain things. For changing attitude, this theory has been used for explaining consumers’ behaviour in changing to a less preferred brand. When the consumer does this switch due to a coupon of small amount, the attitude towards the new brand will be more positive. If the coupon value is high the consumer is likely to attribute the reason for switch as more due to the coupon & hence may not have a positive attitude towards the less preferred brand. Attribution theory has also been used in explaining two strategies used by marketers known as foot-in-the-door strategy and door-in-the-foot strategy. –

Foot-in-the-door strategy: The consumer agrees for a small request by the marketer first although reluctantly. This is attributed by the consumer as his own decision and when subsequently a larger request is made the consumer is likely to agree. This method is followed by many


Page No. 150

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

charitable organisations, which ask for a small donation first, followed by a larger one later, which the individuals are found to agree for. –

Door-in-the-face strategy: Knowing fully well that the request will be turned down, the marketer asks for a large request first. After it is refused, he will ask for a smaller request which the consumer is likely to accede since the consumer may feel bad and sometimes guilty for having turned down the initial request. This is called Door-in-the-face strategy.

c) Cognitive Consistency Theories: Every person has various cognitions and these cognitions have to be consistent with each other. When there is any inconsistency, the person will try to reduce the inconsistency by changing one of the cognitions. Festinger’s Cognitive dissonance theory explains this in more detail. Cognitive dissonance is a psychological term describing the uncomfortable tension that may result from having two conflicting thoughts at the same time, or from engaging in behavior that conflicts with one's beliefs, or from experiencing apparently conflicting phenomena. In simple , it can be the filtering of information that conflicts with what you already believe, in an effort to ignore that information and reinforce your beliefs. In detailed , it is the perception of incompatibility between two cognitions, where "cognition" is defined as any element of knowledge, including attitude, emotion, belief, or behavior. The theory of cognitive dissonance states that contradicting cognitions serve as a driving force that compels the mind to acquire or invent new thoughts or beliefs, or to modify existing beliefs, so as to reduce the amount of dissonance (conflict) between cognitions. One example is that of a consumer having made a purchase starts doubting subsequently whether he has made the right choice. Assuming that the product can not be returned, the consumer starts feeling the discomfort of dissonance between two cognitions- pre-purchase & postSikkim Manipal University

Page No. 151

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

purchase. One frequently observed consumer behaviour in such a situation is that the consumers become more attentive to the brand information after they have already bought the product. Such consumers are looking for positive reinforcements for their purchase decisions to reduce the dissonance. There is another theory proposed by Heider known as ‘balance theory’ based on the principle of cognitive consistency. According to this theory, when a respected opinion leader endorses a brand which was not initially favoured by the consumer, the consumer will either lower his/her opinion of the opinion leader or change the attitude towards the brand. By this process the consistency is brought about in the cognitions of the consumer. d) High and low involvement information processing: When a consumer is exposed to some stimuli like an ment, there are two ways in which this information is processed: –

Central processing route: In this route, the consumer actively scrutinizes the information and examines and interprets it carefully. Hence in such situations wherein the consumer involvement is high, the quality of information provided by the r plays a very important role.

–

Peripheral processing route: In this, the consumer attends to the message superficially and tends to make quick decisions by simply looking at some of the elements of the ad. In this case wherein there is low involvement, the form of the message rather than the content is more important in changing the consumer attitude.

After the initial attitudes are formed, it is important that these attitudes must persist till the actual purchase is done. This attitude persistence is more associated with high involvement processing. Since all marketers face low involvement consumers most of the time, it is important to find out the conditions under which attitude persistence occurs even in low involvement Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 152

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

situations. Research has established that the peripherally processed cues such as brand names or celebrity endorsers can lead to attitude persistence and hence marketers have to be extremely cautious while deciding on such cues. Functional theory of Attitude The process of attitude change does not fully explain differences in attitudes and also the willingness to change in different individuals. Some of this variation is due to the reasons behind the consumers’ attitudes. Psychologist Daniel Katz proposed his “Functional theory of Attitude” to explain this. According to this theory, individuals hold certain attitudes because the attitudes serve certain functions. He classified these into four categories – utilitarian, value-expressive, ego-defensive and Knowledge. a) Utilitarian Function:

This function of attitudes guides consumers to

consumers to achieve desired benefits. For example, the consumer who considers immediate relief and minimum side effects as important in selecting a pain-reliever is directed to brands, which fulfill these criteria. Conversely, in their utilitarian role, attitudes direct consumers away from brands, which unlikely to fulfill their needs. b) Value Expressive Function: The attitudes can express consumers’ self images and value systems particularly for high involvement products. The self image of a consumer who buys a sports car may be of a domineering person who after the purchase may show aggressiveness as that fits the image. Similarly, the person who dresses in a conservative way just because others in the workplace dress conservatively has accepted the values of conservatism as expression of success. rs often appeal to the value expressive nature of attitudes by implying that the use or purchase of a brand will lead to selfenhancement, achievement or independence. This is an appeal to the segment of consumers who value their self-expressive traits. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 153

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

c) Ego-Defensive Function: Attitudes protect the egos from anxieties and threats. Consumers purchase products like mouthwash to avoid anxiety producing situations. Most individuals use mouth wash to avoid bad breath rather than cure it. rs use this theory of consumers’ fears of social ostracism by showing greater social acceptance if they use certain brands. As a result the consumers develop positive attitude towards brands which are associated with social acceptance. Mercedes Benz has capitalized on this concept by projecting that the owners of Mercedes Benz will feel an air of status, power, social acceptance and influence. d) Knowledge Function: Attitudes help the consumers in organizing the huge amount of information they are exposed to daily. They sort out all these messages by using the knowledge function, which reduces uncertainty and confusion. Advertising that gives detailed information on new brands or new characteristics of their existing brands are valuable for this purpose.

Self Assessment Questions I a) __________ refers to the initiation, direction, intensity and persistence of behavior. b) Motivation is comprised of two components- Drive or arousal, & _________ _________. c) _____________ is a complex psychophysical process that arises spontaneously, rather than through conscious effort, and evokes either a positive or negative psychological response or physical expressions, often involuntary. d) Marketers should recognise that they are not selling product attributes; but they are selling product ___________.


Page No. 154

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

e) _________ are defined as learned predispositions to respond to an object or class of objects in a consistently favourable or unfavourable way. f)

All the four learning theories viz. __________ conditioning, instrumental conditioning, modeling & cognitive learning can be used to explain and influence changes in attitude.

5.4 Personality Meaning of Personality Personality can be defined as a dynamic and organized set of characteristics possessed by a person that uniquely influences his or her cognitions, motivations, and behaviors in various situations. Every person has a consistent way of responding to his or her environment and this is based on the person’s inner psychological characteristics, which determine the kind of such response. Personality is thought to be determined largely by either genetics and heredity, or environment and experiences. There is evidence for both possibilities. Some even believe it is a combination of both. We keep describing people in of their personality in everyday life and many such descriptions are- dominant, outgoing, assertive, aggressive, lively, warm, aloof, sentimental, thick skinned, etc. These are all references to a person’s personality. There are many theories to explain how a personality develops. One of them which is quite simplistic is that a person finds it cumbersome to develop a new response every time a situation arises and it is more efficient for the individual to develop a standard response every time a similar situation arises. The personality traits can have a strong influence on the way consumers respond to marketer’s promotional efforts and also as to when, where and how they consume particular products and services.


Page No. 155

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Hence an understanding of various personality characteristics will be very useful to plan and finalise various marketing mix strategies. Nature of Personality Personality is individualistic These are due to inherited characteristics as well as those imbibed from the environment. This combination results in unique personality traits which are never duplicated. Hence no two individuals can be exactly alike. Two persons may however resemble in one or more of some personality characteristics; but never in all the characteristics. Hence personality becomes a useful tool, which enables a marketer to segment customers into different categories, depending on one or more of the common traits. If there are no commonalities at all of at least some of the personality traits among all the consumers, then it would be impossible to do any market segmentation and it would be futile to develop products and promotions targeted at particular segments. Personality is enduring and consistent Each individual has a distinct set of psychological traits, which lead to consistent and also enduring responses to cues and stimuli from the external environment. These features of a personality help marketers to explain and predict consumer behaviour on the basis of the personality characteristics. It is however not possible to change the personality of a consumer. The objective of a marketer is to find out which consumer responses are influenced favourably to which particular personality traits, so that they can try to influence relevant traits in their target group of customers. Personality is only one of the factors, which influence consumer behaviour although it is one of the most important factors.


Page No. 156

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Personality can also change As the individual grows he cultivates a lot of traits which lead to consistent behaviour. However there are several circumstances which lead to gradual changes in the personality of the individual. For example the birth of a child may lead an aggressive person to become softer and more affectionate. Similarly major events in life like marriage, death of a loved person, estrangement from a lover, a big change in career, etc. can lead to noticeable changes in an individual’s personality. Aging also contributes to such changes resulting in an older person behaving in a more mature and calm way to adverse situations. The social changes like women’s empowerment also has brought in many changes in the general personalities in women in the last few decades & it has been found that women are showing many of the personality attributes traditionally exhibited by men. Development of Personality Personality development depends mainly on the genetic make up and the environmental effects. In the genetic factors, the psychological factors known as Psychogenic Traits and also the genetic group traits are the basic building blocks of development. Subsequently the environment in which the person grows up and lives will determine the personality. Psychogenic Traits Personality of an individual starts from the effect of hereditary factors. These are called psychogenic traits. Genetics have effects on an individual in four ways: 1. Physiological differences, 2. Hereditary diseases, 3. Biological clock and 4. Psychological effects.


Page No. 157

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Physiological differences This is the most obvious effect of genetics. A person’s physical features like height, weight, facial features, colour of skin, colour & texture of hair, etc. are all caused by heredity. Hereditary diseases Many diseases like hemophilia, Alzheimer’s disease, Schizophrenia, diabetes, etc. have been proven to be caused by genetic factors. Biological clock All living beings are governed by what is called a Biological Clock, which decides the rhythms of sleep wake cycles in our daily cycle of activity. This is also known as “Circadian Rhythm.” Psychological effects Such effects of genetics constitute the personality of the individual at birth. There is however an ongoing debate as to whether the behaviour of an individual gets predominantly influenced by the genetic factors or by the environmental factors while growing up. The first argument i.e. genetics being the major contributor credits the behavioral tendencies like our emotions, love of status, sexual preferences, notions of beauty, sociability, creativity, morality, etc. to our hereditary factors. The second argument insists that the personality gets predominantly influenced by the family and social environment like a person’s upbringing, family life, parental values, peer group influences, school/college, any religious groups, etc. The researchers trying to prove this point have studied the birth order of children. Birth order is the sequence in which the children are born to the same mother. Such researchers have proven after extensive studies that the birth order does matter. The older children are proven to be aspiring and ambitious. Having no younger children in the family during the initial period of their upbringing, they get influenced by the adult behaviour and learn to Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 158

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

act responsibly, and also maintain and enforce law and order in the family. The younger children by contrast have been found to take themselves less seriously, are more sociable, less judgmental, more risk taking, And more open to new things and change. Group Traits These are again due to several hereditary factors like race, gender and age. These are considered as group traits. An individual is born with these traits and these traits can not be altered. Researches have analysed these traits to examine whether significant differences exist between groups of customers with these common traits. Race: This is a person’s genetic heritage. This is the concept of dividing people into populations or groups on the basis of various sets of characteristics and beliefs about common ancestry. The most widely used human racial categories are based on visible traits (especially skin color, facial features and hair texture), and self-identification. One of the researches which was conceptualized by using a genetic distance map is given below:


Page No. 159

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

The personality traits of different races have been generally found to have many common personality traits. For example - the core values of the Japanese are found to be hard work, loyalty to the group, obligation to return favours, respect for age and tradition, etc. Indians are found to be deeply religious, hard working, ambitious, maintain tradition and customs, humility, self-denial for the sake of group, etc. Chinese are found to value hard work, long term reciprocal relationships, respect for authority, harmony in all things, discipline in delaying gratification, etc. Gender This is a group trait and is divided into two groups- male and female. These groups have common traits, which influence consumer values and preferences. Male Female differences are found to be influenced by the life cycle. Sex differences between male and female pre-puberty children are found to be very minimal. However as they move into teenage years, the differences begin to show up and as they grow into adulthood and parenthood these differences are found to be more significant. As a person moves into old age, the differences are found to become less acute. Age In this context we are referring to chronological age which is different from psychological age (how young a person feels). This has a significant influence on the personality and also the consumer behaviour. Marketers have successfully segmented the markets based on age criteria. Environment There are separate theories and research streams, which consider the environment as the major determinant of personality. In these studies it has been proved that a personality can be developed and molded by a society by

means

of

environmental

shaping.

The

American

psychologist

B.F.Skinner is the leading proponent of such a theory known as Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 160

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Behaviorism Theory. As per this theory, a person develops a pattern of behavioural responses because of the rewards and punishments offered by the environment of the person. Skinner believed that children do bad things because the behavior obtains attention that serves as a reinforcer. For example: a child cries because the child's crying in the past has led to attention. These are the responses and consequences. The response is the child crying, and the attention that child gets is the reinforcing consequence. Theories of Personality a) Psychoanalytic theory Psychoanalysis is a family of psychological theories and methods based on the work of Sigmund Freud. As a technique of psychotherapy, psychoanalysis seeks to discover connections among the unconscious components of patients' mental processes. Psychoanalysis was devised in Vienna in the 1890s by Sigmund Freud, a neurologist interested in finding an effective treatment for patients with neurotic or hysterical symptoms. As a result of talking with these patients, Freud came to believe that their problems stemmed from culturally unacceptable, thus repressed and unconscious, desires and fantasies of a sexual nature. As his theory developed, Freud developed and cast aside a myriad of different frameworks to model and explain the phenomena he encountered in treating his patients. These concepts were adopted by researchers in Consumer Behaviour to analise and explain the behavioural patterns of consumers in a market situation. According to this theory the human personality can be broken down into three significant components: the id, ego and superego. a) The id is the source of primitive energy that builds up and needs to be released or expressed in some way. The id is motivated by the pleasure principle seeking immediate satisfaction without concern for the specific


Page No. 161

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

means of satisfaction of basic physiological needs such as thirst, hunger, sex, etc. b) The ego is the structure that helps the id expresses itself. It emerges in order to realistically meet the wishes and demands of the id in accordance with the outside world. It operates according to the reality principle. Ego is the individual’s conscience mediator between the id (i.e. the unconscious & impulsive forces) and the superego (i.e. the societal ideals). The ego helps the person to respond in ways acceptable to the society and such behaviours are called “defense mechanisms”. For example, a person may want to buy a very beautiful house in a locality of his choice; but due to financial constraints he decides not to go for this purchase. It is the superego which reminds the ego that it is unwise to go for this purchase. To resolve this conflict, the person saves the ego by arguing that the neighbourhood of this house may really not be suitable since they are very rich. This argument is an example of the defense mechanism. c) Finally, the superego exercises moral judgment and societal rules in keeping the ego and id in check. The superego is the last function of the personality to develop and may be seen as an outcome of the interactions with one's parents during the long period of childhood dependency. According to Freud, personality is based on the interaction of these three components. He enunciated that the personality of an individual is determined by how that person deals with the conflicts that are experienced while ing through a number of distinct stages of infant and childhood development. Researchers who have applied Freud’s theories to consumer behaviour believe that, the id and superego operate to create unconscious motives for purchasing decisions. Since the focus of such research is to understand and Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 162

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

uncover these unconscious motives, application of psychoanalytic theory to marketing is known as Motivational Research. Many of the personality traits like aggression, rationalization, withdrawal, regression etc. in the market place have been explained by this theory. These theories have also been extended to observe link between the products purchased or consumed and the selected personality traits. In fact, there have been theories of Brands assuming personality characteristics and many companies have successfully exploited such theories in their brand promotion. b) Non Freudian Personality theory: Many researchers have disagreed with the Freudian theory that, personality is primarily instinctual and sexual in nature. They have viewed human beings as seeking to attain rational goals. The individual is supposed to overcome feelings of inferiority by striving for superiority, efforts to reduce tensions such as anxiety. They have classified the individuals into three personality groups: compliant, aggressive and detached. 1. Compliant individuals are those who lean towards others(they want to be loved, wanted and appreciated) 2. Aggressive individuals are those who normally move against others( they wish to excel and thus win iration) 3. Detached persons are those who move away from others (they desire independence, self reliance, self sufficiency and freedom from any obligations) These theories have been applied in the context of consumer behaviour. It has been found that the compliant persons prefer to use branded products, aggressive persons preferred brands with masculine appeal like Old Spice deodorant, and detached personalities were less likely to be brand loyal.


Page No. 163

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

c) Trait theory of Personality: The orientation of trait theory is primarily quantitative as opposed to psychoanalytical theories, which are qualitative. In this theory a person is considered as a composite of several personality traits. A personality trait is a consistent and characteristic way of behaviour of a person. Trait theories predict that, it is more realistic to expect, personality is linked to how consumers make choices and to the purchase and consumption of a broad category of products rather than individual brands. According to this theory there is more likely to be a relationship between a personality trait and whether he owns a convertible sports car, whereas this may not result in the purchase of a particular brand like Ferrari. Personality traits and personal context Personal Context The characteristics of the social, economic and cultural environment, in which a person has lived and is living, will have significant effect on the personality. These are termed as personal context. Personal Context has four dimensions, which affect consumer behaviour: Culture, Institutions & groups, Personal worth and social class. It is important to analyse these personal context factors to understand the consumer responses to various market situations. Culture Culture has been called "the way of life for an entire society". As such, it includes codes of manners, dress, language, religion, rituals, and norms of behavior such as law and morality, and systems of belief. According to many theories that have gained wide acceptance, culture exhibits the way that humans interpret their biology and their environment. According to this point of view, culture becomes such an integral part of human existence that it is the human environment, and most cultural change can be attributed to Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 164

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

human adaptation to historical events. Moreover, given that culture is seen as the primary adaptive mechanism of humans and takes place much faster than human biological evolution, most cultural change can be viewed as culture adapting to itself. Culture however excludes the genetically inherited instincts since these are not learnt. It also excludes the individual behaviours, knowledge, etc., which are exclusive to the person and not shared with others. Culture has a regulatory effect on society. It offers standards and norms of behaviour and in every culture the know the rules to follow. Since we keep interacting with the people with the same culture most of the times it makes things easier and more efficient to follow the culture. Culture keeps changing with the environment changes and it has a way of adopting itself. It envelops the entire society as if it is an environment itself and normally everyone takes it for granted. Subculture is a culture within the larger group. This group may share a number of common characteristics of the larger group and at the same time have its own distinct features. Culture has following elements: a) Values: Value is a concept that describes the beliefs of an individual or culture. A set of values may be placed into the notion of a value system. Values are considered subjective and vary across people and cultures. These are conceptions of what is good & desirable against what is bad and undesirable. b) Norms: A norm is a rule that is socially enforced. Social sanctioning is what distinguishes norms from other cultural products or social constructions such as meaning and values. These are rules of behaviour. They are a guide of do’s and don’ts. These dictate acceptable and unacceptable behaviour. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 165

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

c) Rituals: A ritual is a set of actions, often thought to have symbolic value, the performance of which is usually prescribed by a religion or by the traditions of a community. A ritual may be performed at regular intervals, or on specific occasions, or at the discretion of individuals or communities. It may be performed by a single individual, by a group, or by the entire community; in arbitrary places, or in places especially reserved for it; either in public, in private, or before specific people. d) Myths: Myths are stories generally of gods and heroes, which become somewhat sacred in each society. Ramayana, Mahabharata, Bible, etc. are all myths. Effects of Culture Culture has many effects on the behaviour of individuals, which are as under: a) Individualism vs. collectivism: This concerns the value individuals have, regarding the importance for the overall group benefits as against their own self-interest. Many cultures exhibit close ties among individuals with the group interest being given more importance than the self interest. There are some cultures wherein the individuals exhibit loose ties with others and also self interest over the group interest giving a lot of importance for the individual freedom and survival of the fittest. The United States is an example of Individualism whereas the Asian countries like Japan, China and India exhibit collectivism. The implication of this characteristic to a marketer is the kind of emotional appeal which would be most effective to influence consumer behaviour. In an individualistic culture the emotional appeals can be ego focused with emotions like happiness, pride, anger, frustration, etc. being prominent. In the collectivistic culture, emotions associated with social context like empathy, peacefulness, indebtedness, shame, etc are more effective in molding the consumer behaviour. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 166

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

b) Power Distance: This refers to the extent of submissive relation with authority in a culture. The power distance is supposed to be large when the authoritarianism is greater among different levels of people in the society. This could be among the of the family or the different managerial levels in a business organisation. In societies with a larger power distance, the people in lower levels are supposed to keep a distance from their superiors. In societies with smaller power distance, the of different levels are not so formal. Decision making is more participative in a culture with smaller power distance than in the other cultures. Many western countries like USA, England, , Switzerland, etc. are having a smaller power distance. Countries like India, Egypt, Malaysia, etc. are having a larger power distance. This characteristic will help in deciding on promotions and positioning of products in a marketing mix. c) Uncertainty avoidance: Many cultures have very clearly defined explicit and formal rules and regulations to avoid any ambiguity. In such societies new ideas and products are not easily accepted and the consumers are interested in greater dependability, reliability, warranties, guarantees, etc. on which the marketers have to concentrate in such cultures. d) Masculinity vs. femininity: Many societies have a masculine culture, wherein male and female roles are segregated and masculine roles are considered superior. In a masculine culture, money, success and material things play a dominant role and in a feminine culture the dominant features are improving quality of life, preserving

the

environment,

placing

relationships

above

monetary

considerations, etc.


Page No. 167

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

e) Abstract vs. associative thinking: In many cultures people associate events which may not have much logical basis, like associating with the influence of the supernatural or the effect of Gods etc. In abstract cultures the logical thinking, cause and effect relationships are important. In these cultures, face to face communication, eagerness to change and innovate are the predominant behaviours. Institutions and Groups Groups can be defined as two or more persons sharing a common goal. Institutions are structures and mechanisms of social order and cooperation governing the behavior of two or more individuals. Institutions are identified with a social purpose and permanence, transcending individual human lives and intentions, and with the making and enforcing of rules governing cooperative human behavior. Institutions are more permanent groups. Schools, colleges, family, religious groups etc. are examples of institutions. Institutions influence individual behaviour by having some norms, values and also of conduct. Types of Groups Depending on the frequency of and interaction, groups can be divided as Primary groups and Secondary groups. In primary groups, the meet frequently and it is important to follow the group opinions and norms. The examples are family, work organisation, etc. In secondary groups, the meetings are less frequent and the enforcement of group norms is less strict and less binding. The examples are distant relatives, musicians, artists, etc. Another way of differentiating the groups is according to whether the hip of these groups is real or symbolic. Groups also differ on whether they are formal or informal, whether the hip to the group is by choice of the member or whether it is assigned by the group. Different groups have differing influence on the behaviour of each individual with family being the most influential among all the groups. Families are Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 168

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

important in all cultures and influence of the on the decision making process of one another is significant. Another group which exerts influence on customer behaviour is the religious group. Religion is the main influencer of values, customs and beliefs of individuals and thus on his/her behaviour. Influence of Reference Groups: A reference group is a sociological concept referring to a group to which another group is compared. Reference groups are used in order to evaluate and determine the nature of a given individual or other group's characteristics and sociological attributes. Reference groups provide the benchmarks and contrast needed for comparison and evaluation of group and personal characteristics. Some behavioural scientists have established that, reference groups have significant influence on an individual’s consuming behaviour when the product or service is conspicuous. Conspicuous consumption is a term used to describe the lavish spending on goods and services that are acquired mainly for the purpose of displaying income or wealth. In the mind of a conspicuous consumer, such display serves as a means of attaining or maintaining social status. In such cases the reference groups wield enormous influence on the decisions of the consumer. There are different types of influence of the reference groups: 1. Information: The consumer looks forward to the reference group member’s advice since he feels that they have the expertise to give such advice. Professionals like doctors, lawyers, tax consultants etc. for household customers and management consultants, legal advisors, chartered ants, etc. for business customers are examples of such information influence. 2. Normative: When a consumer is interested in conforming to the expectations of someone else such influence is known as normative


Page No. 169

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

influence. Senior family have a normative influence on the junior . 3. Identification: When a consumer buys something which makes him/her to be like the role model this is known as identification influence. Movie stars, sports persons, etc. serve as reference groups for a huge number of consumers. Worth of a Person: Personal worth is another personal context, which has a direct effect on the consumer behaviour. This comprises of income of the individual, the wealth in his/her possession and also the borrowing power. This also has a direct effect on the consumption patterns in the marketplace. 1. Income: The earnings of a person will largely decide on the kind of products which are consumed by them. Poor families spend their income mostly on food, housing & basic clothing. As the income increases, the proportion of the income spent on food as a percentage of total income declines & they start spending on clothing, automobiles, electrical accessories, luxury goods, housing etc. will go up sharply. This also reaches an upper limit & then the savings go on increasing with the increase in income. 2. Wealth: This comprises of the assets of the person minus liabilities. Assets can be in of properties, bank balances, investment in shares, jewellery, etc. & the liabilities could be the loans taken for housing, luxury goods, automobiles or any other purposes. 3. Borrowing power: This indicates the economic condition of the individual. Borrowing power depends on the anticipated future income of the person & asset accumulation. The credit cards & loans granted by banks for housing, automobiles, electrical goods, etc. are based on their assessment of this borrowing power.


Page No. 170

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Social Class: Social class refers to the hierarchical distinctions between individuals or groups in societies or cultures. The factors that determine class vary widely from one society to another. Even within a society, different people or groups may have very different ideas about what makes one "high" or "low" in the social hierarchy. The most basic class distinction between the two groups is between the powerful and the powerless. Social classes with more power usually subordinate classes with less power, while attempting to cement their own power positions in society. In societies where such classes exist, one's class is determined largely by: 1. Occupation 2. Education and qualifications 3. Income (personal & household) 4. Wealth or net worth, including the ownership of land, property, means of production, etc. Social classes are normally ranked in of their social prestige. The social class of a person normally does not change in a short period and it is relatively permanent. There can however be movement from one social class to another over a long period of time it can be a movement upwards or downwards depending the changes in the situation of the individual. Within each strata of a social class there are many homogeneous characteristics. The kind of houses they live in, the neighborhoods, food habits, socializing patterns etc. are similar in one stratum of social class. It is to be however kept in mind that income is not the important determinant of social class and in most societies higher income does not necessarily mean a higher social class. It is not uncommon for a person of relatively lower income to be in a higher social class and vice versa. The social class does have a significant influence on consumption patterns and a consumer’s behaviour. This is true


Page No. 171

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

in most of the countries and more so in countries like India where the socialclass distinctions are prevailing for many centuries. Cognitive Personality factors Cognitive psychology is the school of psychology that examines internal mental processes such as problem solving, memory, and language. Based on this there are two predominant personality characteristics – Need for Cognition and visualisers vs. verbalisers. Need for Cognition This measures the person’s need for enjoying of the thinking process. Researchers have established that, the persons who are high on this need for cognition are more likely to be responsive to an ment, which is rich in product-related information and description. The consumers who are low on this need are more attracted to the background of the ad, an attractive model, a well known celebrity, etc. Consumers who are high in this need are likely to get convinced by a written matter in the ad whereas those who are low in this need are likely to get convinced with a cartoon message. For the first group, the ad message should emphasise forcefully on the relative benefits of the brand. Need for cognition seems to play a positive role in the internet usage, especially related to product information, current events, news, learning, education, etc. All such research findings are very helpful to marketers in market segmentation efforts as also the framing of the advertising campaigns to such segments. Visualisers vs. Verbalisers: Some people prefer written information as a way of securing information whereas some others prefer visual images or messages as sources of information. Based on these traits researchers have classified the consumers into two groups:


Page No. 172

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

1. Visualisers: These consumers prefer visual information & products that are rich in visual effects. Some marketers stress on the strong visual images to attract such consumers. 2. Verbalisers: Such consumers prefer written or verbal information & also products rich in verbal content. Such consumers respond favourably to ads, which raise a question and provide an answer, or give detailed description of product features. Consumption and possession Traits: These traits can be divided broadly into three types as follows. Materialism There is a long enduring debate on what is the extent to which a person is considered as materialistic. Americans are considered as materialistic and this term has more or less acquired the status of a personality trait. This is a trait, which distinguishes between individuals who regard possessions as essential to their identities and their lives and those for whom possessions are

secondary.

Researchers

have

found

some

of

the

following

characteristics of materialistic people. 1. Such

persons

especially

value

acquiring

&

showing

off

their

possessions. 2. They are particularly self centered & selfish. 3. They seek lifestyles full of possessions. 4. Their many possessions do not give them greater personal satisfaction. It has been found by research that the extent of consumer materialism varies from country to country. The marketing mix, which is successful in a particular country that is high on materialistic consumption, may not work in another country where such traits may be low.


Page No. 173

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Fixated Consumption Fixation refers, in human psychology, to the state in which an individual becomes obsessed with an attachment to another human, an animal, or an inanimate object. Fixated consumers are those who get fixated with regard to consuming or possessing certain products. This is normally accepted behaviour in society and fixated consumers frequently display these products and they openly share with others who have similar interest. Examples of such fixation are the serious collectors of various objects Even there could be fixation of games like cricket or football which drives such consumers to spend huge amounts in such hobbies like collecting coins, stamps, antiques, vintage cars, etc. Fixated consumers have following traits: 1. A deep and ionate interest in a particular product category, 2. Willingness to put in considerable efforts to secure additional pieces of such an object or product category, and 3. Spending of substantial money and time in searching for the object or the product. Compulsive Consumption This is an abnormal behaviour. Such consumers who are compulsive have an addiction and are out of control. Examples are uncontrollable shopping, drug or alcohol addiction, eating disorders, etc. From a marketer’s point, compulsive buying can also be a compulsive activity. Personality influences on Consumer Behaviour In order to apply these principles in Marketing, one has to understand how personality influences consumer behaviour. This will help in grouping the consumers into segments and then target them so that, they are likely to respond positively to their communications regarding the product or service being marketed. There are specific personality traits which provide insights into consumer behaviour.


Page No. 174

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Innovativeness Innovators are the persons who are most likely to be the first to try new products and services. Hence for marketers these are the key people whose response to their new products and services will indicate the possibility of success or otherwise of their products. Researchers have developed many measuring instruments of innovativeness, which provide the nature and limits of a consumer’s willingness to innovate. Recent studies have established a positive relationship between innovative s of the internet and buying on line. Internet shoppers tend to see themselves as being able to control their own future and they use the internet to seek information. They enjoy changes and are not afraid of uncertainty. Dogmatism This is a trait, which measures rigidity, as opposed to openness displayed by person’s unfamiliar information that is contrary to their own established beliefs. A person with high degree of dogmatism is defensive towards unfamiliar and he will be uncomfortable and uncertain about any such situation. Consumers who are high in dogmatism are more likely to choose established brands rather than try out new innovative product alternatives. However it has also been found that, such highly dogmatic individuals tend to be more receptive to ments of new products and services which contain an appeal from an authoritative figure. Hence marketers of new product ideas use experts and well-known personalities to endorse such products so that, the highly dogmatic consumers accept such new products. Consumers who are low on dogmatism however are likely to prefer new products in place of the established alternatives. Such consumers are likely to be more open to ments which contain factual differences in product benefits & also the information on new product usage.


Page No. 175

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Social Character Sociology research has identified the personality trait known as Social Character. This social personality trait can be of two types as follows: a) Inner Directed:

These are persons who rely on their own standards

and values, in evaluating new products and these persons are more likely to be product innovators. These consumers are attracted by ads, which stress on product features and benefits, which will enable them to do a self-evaluation of these claims of the marketer. b) Other Directed: These are like to look for others for advising them on what is right and what is wrong. These are less likely to be innovators. These persons are more influenced by their thoughts of social approval of their purchase decisions. Uniqueness Many people try to be unique. They avoid conforming to other’s expectations and standards. It has been found by research that when consumers are not concerned about their being criticized by others, they are more likely to make unique choices. Many marketing researchers measure the Consumer’s Need for Uniqueness to help them in the study of consumer behaviour. Stimulation Some persons prefer calm, simple and uncomplicated living whereas some others prefer novel, complex and unusual experiences. This is the need for stimulation and some studies have established that people who respond to high stimulation levels have a greater willingness to take risks in trying out new product. They try to be innovative and seek more product-related information. Consumers whose lifestyles are equivalent to their stimulation levels appear to be satisfied. Those who are under stimulated are likely to be bored. An under stimulated consumer is likely to get attracted to a great


Page No. 176

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

amount of activity and excitement, whereas an over stimulated person may prefer solitude, peaceful environment and relaxation. Personality of a Business Customer In a business environment the employees do bring their personality traits into the work they do. They can be aggressive or subdued, emotional or unemotional, task oriented or relationship oriented, etc. Some researchers have divided the business customers into two broad personality traits as below Assertive Such people make their stand in any situation very clear to others. They tend to be aggressive, forceful and demanding. In any social gathering they are likely to start a conversation and they normally take charge. They tend to fight, if placed in an uneasy social situation. In contrast the unassertive people are unassuming, contented, quiet and easygoing. Such people rarely express their own ideas and beliefs and also they tend to other’s ideas in most of the situations. When facing an uneasy social situation such people tend to avoid and may even take flight. Responsive A responsive person readily expresses all his feelings and emotions like joy, anger, sorrow, etc. openly. Such a person is normally relation ship oriented. In contrast an unresponsive individual is a controlling type. He tends to be reserved, serious and cautious. He also tends to be independent or indifferent to other’s feelings. He tends to predominantly use logic in taking decisions and is mostly task oriented. Based on the above two traits the personality can be divided into four social styles:


Page No. 177

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Analytical This person is normally low in assertiveness as well as in responsiveness. He tends to react slowly, takes maximum effort to organize. He has minimum concern for relation ships. He is cautious in any action and tends to reject any involvement. Amiable This person is low in assertiveness, but high in responsiveness. Normally unhurried, he will put in maximum effort to relate. He has minimum concern for any change; is always ive in all actions. He also tends to reject any conflicts. Driving This individual is high in assertiveness and low in responsiveness. Normally he is swift in taking action. He exerts maximum effort to control, has minimum concern for caution. He doesn’t like inaction. Expressive He is high in both assertiveness as well as responsiveness. He reacts rapidly with maximum effort to get involved. He doesn’t like routine and mostly thinking of future. He tends to reject isolation and takes impulsive action. Limitations of Personality theories in Consumer Behaviour Consumer Behaviour researchers have found some limitations in using personality characteristics to explain buyers’ behaviour in all situations. Such theories explain only those patterns of behaviour, which are consistent and enduring. Many times the application is in explaining aberrations rather than typical behaviour. These theories assume that consumer is motivated by deep rooted drives in his buying behaviour. Such theories have limited application when it comes to mundane day to day purchases & researchers have to look elsewhere to find solutions to such situations. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 178

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

5.5 Self concept Self-concept or self-identity is the mental and conceptual understanding and persistent regard that, individual hold for their own existence. In other words, it is the sum totals of a person’s feelings, knowledge and understanding of his or her self as an object. The self-concept is different from selfconsciousness, which is an awareness or preoccupation with one's self. Components of the self-concept include physical, psychological, and social attributes, which can be influenced by the individual's attitudes, habits, beliefs and ideas. These components and attributes can not be condensed to the general concepts of self-image and the self-esteem. Self-concept has at least three major qualities of interest to marketers: (1) it is learned, (2) it is organized, and (3) it is dynamic. a) Self-concept is learned: No one is born with a self-concept. It gradually emerges in the early months of life and is shaped and reshaped through repeated perceived experiences, particularly with others. The fact that self-concept is learned has some important implications: 

Because self-concept does not appear to be instinctive, but is a social product

developed

through

experience,

it

possesses

relatively

boundless potential for development and actualization. 

Because of previous experiences and present perceptions, individuals may perceive themselves in ways different from the ways others see them.



Individuals perceive different aspects of themselves at different times with varying degrees of clarity.



Any experience which is inconsistent with one's self-concept may be perceived as a threat, and the more of these experiences there are, the more rigidly self-concept is organized to maintain and protect itself.


Page No. 179

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

When a person is unable to get rid of perceived inconsistencies, emotional problems arise. 

Faulty thinking patterns, such as dichotomous reasoning (dividing everything in of opposites or extremes) or over generalizing (making sweeping conclusions based on little information) create negative interpretations of oneself.

b) Self-concept is organized: Most researchers agree that self-concept has a generally stable quality that is characterized by orderliness and harmony. Each person maintains countless perceptions regarding one's personal existence, and each perception is orchestrated with all the others. It is this generally stable and organized quality of self-concept that gives consistency to the personality. This organized quality of self-concept has corollaries. 

Self-concept requires consistency, stability, and tends to resist change. If self-concept changed readily, the individual would lack a consistent and dependable personality.



The more central a particular belief is to one's self-concept, the more resistant one is to changing that belief.



Basic perceptions of oneself are quite stable, so change takes time.



Perceived success and failure affect self-concept. Failure in a highly regarded area lowers evaluations in all other areas as well. Success in a prized area raises evaluations in other seemingly unrelated areas.

a. Self-concept is dynamic: To understand the active nature of self-concept, it helps to imagine it as a com: a continuously active system that dependably points to the "true north" of a person's perceived existence. This guidance system not only shapes the ways a person views oneself, others, and the world, but it also serves to direct action and enables each person to take a consistent Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 180

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

"stance" in life. Rather than viewing self-concept as the cause of behavior, it is better understood as the com of human personality, providing consistency in personality and direction for behavior. The dynamic quality of self-concept also carries corollaries. 

The world and the things in it are not just perceived; they are perceived in relation to one's self-concept.



Self-concept development is a continuous process. In the healthy personality there is constant assimilation of new ideas and expulsion of old ideas throughout life.



Individuals strive to behave in ways that are in keeping with their selfconcepts, no matter how helpful or hurtful to themselves or others.



Self-concept usually takes precedence over the physical body. Individuals will often sacrifice physical comfort and safety for emotional satisfaction.



Self-concept continuously guards itself against loss of self-esteem, for it is this loss that produces feelings of anxiety.



If self-concept must constantly defend itself from assault, growth opportunities are limited.

Interdependent and Independent Self Concepts The self-concept is different in different cultures. Researchers have categorised

self-concept

into

two

types:

independent

and

interdependent (also called as separateness and connectedness). The independent self-concept, places emphasis on personal goals, characteristics, achievements, desires etc. and this concept is predominant in western cultures like USA where individuals are inherently separate. Persons with such self-concept tend to be individualistic, egocentric, autonomous, self reliant and self contained. These persons define


Page No. 181

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

themselves in of what they are, what they have achieved & what they possess. The

interdependent

self-concept

emphasizes

family,

cultural,

professional and social relationships. Such a concept is predominant in most of the Asian countries in which individuals are inherently connected with each other. Individuals with interdependent self concept tend to be obedient, socio-centric, connected and relation oriented. They normally define themselves in of social roles, family relationships, and commonalties with other of their groups. A variation in the degree to which an individual is characterized by independent versus interdependent self-concept has been found to influence message preferences, consumption of luxury goods & products of

conspicuous consumption. For example the

ads

emphasizing individuality, autonomy, etc are more effective with consumers wit independent self-concepts and ads emphasizing group activities, group hip, etc, work better with consumers with interdependent self-concept. Possessions and extended Self Researcher R.W.Belk developed a theory that; the extended self consists of the self plus possessions. People tend to define themselves in part by their possessions. Thus some of these possessions are not just manifestation of the self concept; they become an integral part of self identity. If such key possessions are lost by the individual he/she will become a somewhat different person. While some of these key items could be major items like the house or the car, they can also be some small items like a souvenir, photograph, a pet, a wedding ring, mangala sutra for a Hindu wife, or even a favourite cup. These objects have meaning to the individual beyond their market value to the individual. Some products get Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 182

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

embedded with the person over a long period of usage having got associated with a lot of memories. For example, one of the products in a scientist’s extended self could be an old, worn out, cheap briefcase which he purchased to take to his first academic conference many decades ago & had accompanied him all round the world. Although worn out it has now become a part of the scientist and he plans to continue using it as long as possible. Measuring Self Concept Malhotra has developed a set of 15 pairs of adjectives in semantic differential scale. These have been very effective in describing ideal, actual and social self-concepts of individuals as well as images of automobiles and celebrities. Using Self Concept to Position Products The product brand image and consumer self concept relation ship will determine the consumer behaviour to seek brands that improve and maintain self-concept. Most of the time, this process is not deliberate at least at the conscious level. This can be used to ensure a match between the self concept of a target market, the image of a brand, etc. Hence marketers should develop product images consistent with the self concept of their target markets. While everyone’s self concept is unique, there is also a significant overlap across individuals. For example many consumers see themselves as environmental friendly. Companies and products, which create an image of being environment friendly, are likely to be ed by these consumers. Consumers prefer brands, which are in congruence with their self-concepts; however the degree to which they would be attracted to such a brand also depends on symbolism and conspicuousness of that product class.


Page No. 183

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Self Assessment Questions II 1. _____________ can be defined as a dynamic and organized set of characteristics possessed by a person that uniquely influences his or her cognitions, motivations, and behaviors in various situations. 2. Personality development depends mainly on the genetic make up and the _______________ effects. 3. All living beings are governed by what is called a Biological Clock or _________ _________ which decides the rhythms of sleep wake cycles in our daily cycle of activity. 4. _____________ is a family of psychological theories and methods based on the work of Sigmund Freud. 5. ______ class refers to the hierarchical distinctions between individuals or groups in societies or cultures. 6. ______

______or

self

identity

is

the

mental

and

conceptual

understanding and persistent regard that individual hold for their own existence.

5.6 Summary In this unit we learnt various Individual Determinants of Consumer Behaviour like Motivation, Attitudes, Personality and self-concept. Under the subject of Motivation we studied the Needs, Goal Objects, Selection of Goals, Theories of Motivation, Customer Emotions and Moods, Motivational Research, Motivation Theory and Marketing Strategy. While studying Attitudes, we touched upon Hierarchies in Attitudes, Factors affecting Attitude Change, Routes for Changing of Attitude, Psychological theories for Attitude Change and Functional theory of Attitude. Under Personality theory, we learnt about the Meaning of Personality, Nature of Personality, Development of Personality, Group Traits, Environment, Theories of Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 184

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

Personality, Personality traits and personal context, Effects of Culture, Institutions and Groups, Cognitive Personality factors, Consumption and possession Traits,

Personality

influences

on Consumer

Behaviour,

Personality of a Business Customer and Limitations of Personality theories in Consumer Behaviour. We also studied the concept of Self-concept, Interdependent and Independent Self-Concepts, Possessions and extended Self, methods of measuring self-concept and using self-concept to Position Products.

5.7 Terminal Questions 1. Explain the meaning of Goal Objects with examples. 2. Describe Maslow’s hierarchy of needs from the lowest to the highest (along with examples). 3. What are the three types of attitude hierarchy? Explain each one in a few words. 4. Explain the difference between Primary groups and Secondary groups with examples. 5. Self-concept can be divided into two types: independent and interdependent. Explain the meaning of each of these.

5.8 Answers to SAQs & TQs SAQ I 1. Motivation 2. Goal Object 3. Emotion 4. benefits 5. Attitudes 6. classical Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 185

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 5

SAQ II 1. Personality 2. environmental 3. Circadian Rhythm 4. Psychoanalysis 5. Social 6. Self-concept TQS 1. Refer Section 5.2 2. Refer Section 5.2 3. Refer Section 5.3 4. Refer Section 5.4 5. Refer Section 5.5 6. Refer Section 5.5


Page No. 186

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Unit 6

Consumer Decision Process

Structure 6.1


6.2

Definition of Consumer Decisions

6.3

Consumers as Decision Makers

6.4

Consumer Decision Making Process

6.5

Consumer choice Selection Models Self Assessment Questions I

6.6

Household and Family Decision Making

6.7

Howard-Sheth Model of Buying Behaviour

6.8

The Nicosia Model

6.9

Engel-Blackwell-Miniard Model

6.10 Post Purchase Behaviour Self Assessment Questions II 6.11 Summary 6.12 Terminal Questions 6.13 Answers to SAQs & TQs

6.1 Introduction Various sociological, cultural and psychological factors influence and contribute to different patterns of consumer behaviour. In addition to these we will also have to look at situational variables. We have to understand how situations and internal and external sources of influence affect the purchase decision process. This comprises of a series of activities like problem recognition, information search, evaluation, selection, outlet choice, decision to purchase, purchase and post purchase processes and activities.


Page No. 187

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Both cognitive (thinking) and emotional (feeling) factors are required to be studied at each stage of the decision making process. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Know the various steps in the Consumer Decision Process.



Understand the psychology of consumers as decision makers.



Explain the household and family decision making process.



Know the different models of decision making.



Describe the post purchase consumer behaviour.

6.2 Definition of Consumer Decisions Decision is the process of selecting an option from more than one choice. There could be several examples of decision making in a purchase process like: a. Whether or not to make a purchase. b. Whether to buy brand ‘x’ or brand ‘y’. c. Whether to purchase from store ‘x’ or store ‘y’. d. Whether to purchase with cash or credit card. It is hence clear that the scope of consumer decision is much broader than the mere selection of one brand from a choice of several brands. Scope and Levels of Consumer Decision Making The Consumer Decision Making process takes place in various steps like problem

recognition,

information

search,

evaluative

criteria,

actual

evaluation process, outlet selection, the purchase process and also post purchase behaviour. Consumer decision process also involves various factors, which affect the decision-making and also there will be many factors influencing the actual decision making process. There could be situational influences like communications, purchase dispositions, usage, social Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 188

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

influences, etc. There are many models proposed by many marketing experts to describe and predict the consumer decision making process. We shall try to cover all these subjects in this unit. Models of Purchase Decision Process There are many different models to explain how consumers make purchase decisions. We will consider four models based on differing views of consumers’ psychology. a. Economic View: In this case, the consumer is assumed to be highly rational. Theoretical economics is based on this assumption which depicts the consumer to behave perfectly in a world of perfect competition. For this view to be universally applicable, the consumer has to have a thorough knowledge of all available alternatives. Also, he should be capable of ranking them in a perfect way in of their features and benefits and finally be capable of identifying the best of all these alternatives. However, this is hardly true and such a perfect world does not exist. The classic economic model is also unrealistic due to following reasons: i. Consumers are bound by their pre existing habits, reflexes and skills. ii. They are also constrained by their values and goals. iii. They have their limitations of their knowledge. The consumers are in an imperfect world, in which, they can not make their decisions

on

perfect

economic

considerations

of

price,

quantity,

relationships, marginal utility, indifference curves, etc. In most situations, a consumer may be happy to settle for a ‘good enough’ or ‘satisfactory’ decision making process and the economic model has been rejected often for being too idealistic and simplistic. On example is that of a research finding of the purpose of bargaining by consumers. It has been found by research that, the motivation for bargaining in most situations may not be Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 189

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

indeed the desire for a better price as is normally thought of. It has been established that, the real motivation in many cases be related to the need of the consumer for achievement, affiliation or dominance. b. ive view: Many sales people of the past were of the view that, the consumers can be manipulated into purchase decisions and the consumers were thought of as impulsive and irrational in their decision making. They were hence assumed to be submissive to aggressive promotional efforts of the super sales people. This model fails to recognize that the consumer plays an important role in buying decisions. Sometimes they collect all relevant information and carefully evaluate all the alternatives before arriving at the decision to purchase considering the best alternative, which would satisfy their need to the fullest extent. At other times they may purchase a product impulsively to serve their emotion or mood at that moment. There are also situations wherein they are likely to follow the advice of the opinion leaders. In most of these situations, the consumer can not be considered as ive and hence capable of manipulation. Hence this simplistic view can also be considered as unrealistic. c. Cognitive View: In this model the consumer is considered as a rational problem solver. In this view the consumer is supposed to actively search for all the information when they have to select a product or service to fulfill and enrich their lives. This model focuses on the process of seeking and evaluating the information about the products and stores, for making the purchase decision. Information processing is the major factor in this model. This model however recognizes that this process does not happen every time the consumer wants to buy a product. It also predicts that the consumers will Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 190

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

stop seeking information at some stage when they feel that they have sufficient information to take that particular decision satisfactorily. The consumer is also found to take some short cuts in decision making in many situations and such shortcuts are called heuristic. There is also a possibility of the consumer getting overloaded with excess information and they are known to cope with such situations also in a suitable manner. The cognitive view is somewhere between the economic view of a perfect consumer making perfect decisions and a ive consumer who is easily manipulated. The consumer in this model is not attributed with total knowledge; but he is actively involved in seeking and evaluating information on various alternatives to his satisfaction. In this view goal setting is of primary concern for the consumer and each decision-making involves clear-cut goals and the evaluation of alternatives with respect to these goals. For example he may want a detergent for the clothes which not only gives a good wash but also ensure that the colours don’t run and result in fading of coloured clothes. d. Emotional View: It is easier for marketers to adopt suitable marketing strategies in case of either economic or ive models. In reality however the consumer goes through various emotions while purchasing a product or a service and these feelings or emotions can be highly involving to the consumer in many situations. A large number of the purchases made by consumers are quite impulsive, based on their emotions at the time of purchase and in such cases there is no careful searching, deliberations and evaluation of various alternatives before buying. This does not mean that such decisions are totally irrational. Products which offer emotional satisfaction are also perfectly rational consumer decisions. Many designer products make use of this factor to market their products by stressing that the consumer ‘deserves’ Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 191

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

this product although very expensive. Many consumers feel better when they make such expensive purchases on an impulse based on their emotions. Mood, which is a temporary emotion, is also important in a consumer decision making process. A retail environment makes use of this factor to create a positive mood for the consumer to make a decision to purchase. However compared to emotions, moods are lower in intensity. It has also been established by research that the consumers in positive moods recall the brands for a longer period, than those in a negative mood. Situational Influences It has been established that the consumers do not respond to stimuli like ments in isolation. They are influenced by both the stimulus as also the situation. The situation is the set of factors separated from the consumer and also the primary stimulus to which the consumer is responding. There are four situations, which affect the consumer’s decision making as a response to a stimulus. a. Communications Situation: When the stimulus is received by the consumer as a communication, the response depends on the situation in which this is received. For example, the response will depend upon whether the one is in a group or alone, in a good mood or a bad mood, in a hurry or relaxed, etc. Only when the consumer is in a receptive communication situation the message of the marketer will be effective. However it is very difficult to always find all the potential customers in a favourable communication situation at all times. b. Purchase Situation: The situation at the time of purchase will again influence the actual product selection. The company in which the consumer is, the shortage of time, etc. will decide as to many decisions


Page No. 192

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

like choice of the shop, the number of brands considered, and the price at which the consumer is prepared to buy. c. Usage Situation: The usage of the product will be influenced by the situation at the time of consumption. Many ments make use of this fact to communicate to the customers how their products create satisfaction in relevant consumption situation. It has also been proven that expanded usage situations can be successfully used to improve the sales of a well-established product. d. Disposition Situation: The new environmental awareness of the consumers has compelled the marketers to create a favourable disposition situation i.e. the disposal of the used product in a proper way. Some consumers prefer the products which can easily be recycled. Socially responsible disposition situations are affecting the way the consumers decide on a product purchase.

6.3 Consumers as Decision Makers When we describe consumers as decision makers, it gives a picture of an individual carefully evaluating the features of different brands and selecting very carefully after many deliberations, one brand that has all the required attributes at the least cost. This process is very rational and functional. This is only part of the true process, which takes place and that too while taking very important decisions. In many other situations, there could be very little conscious effort on the part of the consumer while making a purchase decision. There could be some other situations, wherein the consumer may be taking brand purchase decisions based more on feelings and emotions, rather than the attributes and features of the brand. The consumer in such situations is likely to imagine his/her feelings or the reactions from others in


Page No. 193

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

the society with whom he/she may be interacting while using or consuming the product. Most of the times, the consumer will be involved in making a decision to take care of a single problem, for example - buying of a dress. At some other time, the consumer may face a convergence of several problems - for example, whether to buy a ready-made dress or buy the cloth and get it stitched and if so, from where and what garment design. As the decision making process starts, the simple problem in the beginning may evolve into more complex stages. A consumer who sets out to buy a dress may decide to go to a mall, where he/she may get to buy not only a dress but there could be some fast food place to eat something and then probably watch a movie in a multiplex. Depending on the level of involvement, the consumer may go through different levels of complexities in decision making. We can consider different types of decision making situations based on several factors. However, one should keep in mind that, these situations and levels of decision making are not totally distinct from one another and there could be overlapping of these in actual practice. The effort required for the search and other decision- making processes varies with the relative complexity of the decision. Depending on such effort level, the decision making process can be divided into different categories. While studying these situations one should consider two types of involvement viz. purchase involvement and product involvement. Purchase Involvement This is the level of concern for or interest in the purchase process, triggered by the need to consider the particular purchase. This could be a temporary involvement in most situations and it happens mostly for an individual or household. This could be the result of the interaction individual, product and situational characteristics. There could be some situations where the Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 194

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

purchase involvement could be very low, although the consumer may have strong brand loyalty. For example, the consumer may be very loyal to a particular brand of toothpaste; but when he/she goes for the purchase, the process could be a very routine involvement in the purchase process, without much thought, because of several reasons like time pressure. Purchase involvement is different from product involvement, which is normally a long enduring involvement with strong brand loyalties. There could be different processes of purchase depending on the involvement level of the purchase process. These are described in the following paragraphs. Habitual Decision Making (Nominal Decision Making or Routine Problem Solving): This is the strategy used for purchase problems, which have been solved previously. The consumer has the experience and well established criteria with which to evaluate the purchase decision choices. If at all required, there could be a minor effort to collect some additional information, which may not be very critical. This is quite common in business to business situations wherein the search costs are normally very high and hence most of such purchases are routinised. In this situation, there is no decision making involved, since there is only a single preferred decision for the brand to be purchased. There will not be any evaluation of alternatives, unless the preferred brand fails to perform as expected. When there is low involvement with the purchase this process occurs. This is true for most routine purchases of the daily usage products, wherein the family have fixed preferences and these products may be picked up from the store shelf, without even checking the price or the other brands. Such a decision making process may be again bifurcated into two categories- brand loyal decisions and repeat purchases.


Page No. 195

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Brand Loyal Decisions In the initial stages of selection of the brand of a particular product, the consumer may be highly involved in the purchase process with a lot of deliberations regarding various alternatives, their attributes, their prices, etc. After having decided the particular brand & purchasing it, the consumer may be very happy with this decision. The consumer gets committed to the brand in such situations since he/she believes that this brand meets the needs to the best extent & there will be an emotional attachment to the particular brand. This is the brand loyalty which is very difficult to be broken by the competitors. In such situations there will be a high degree of product involvement but a low degree of purchase involvement because of the brand loyalty. If this consumer really wants to change the brand at some point of time it will mostly involve a high degree of involvement in the purchase process with a lot of thinking of various alternatives and their attributes. Repeat Purchases There may not be much brand loyalty and the consumer may feel that, all the brands are more or less the same. This particular purchase may not be very important from the consumer’s perspective and hence he/she may just repeat the same brand more out of habit, than due to any loyalty. If at any point of time the consumer decides to try a new brand, due to some external stimuli like an effective ment or some in-store promotion, this consumer may not think much before switching the brand. Limited Decision Making This strategy is adopted when the cost and risks involved are not very high and the product is not very complex, in of its technical features. There is a familiarity of the product, but there is also a desire for variety, or the previous choice is not readily available. In such situations, the consumer invests very limited time and effort to make the purchase decision. In this case, the consumer may involve in limited search, very few alternatives, Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 196

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

simple process of decision parameters or attributes and very limited prepurchase evaluation. This is somewhere between “Habitual Decision Making” and “Extended Decision making” and it somewhat resembles habitual decision making in its simplest form. For example, the consumer may just decide on buying the cheapest available brand of detergent displayed in the store at that time. Limited decision making may also happen when there is an emotional or environmental need. The consumer may just change the brand to try out something new, although he/she may be perfectly happy with the current brand. The decision making in such a case may involve only checking up some new brands and novelty aspects. Another example is that of a consumer trying out another option, depending on the anticipated reaction from the friends or relatives. For example, the teenager may decide to buy a new brand just because the friends may approve that brand although he/she might have been happy with the earlier brand. Limited Decision-Making is hence involving internal and limited external search and a few alternatives are evaluated on the basis of limited number of attributes and selection rules. There is very little evaluation of the actual purchase and use of the product post purchase, unless there is a product failure or some post sale service problem. Extended Decision Making This strategy is required in situations wherein the purchase costs are quite high and the risk of a wrong purchase is also pretty steep. This could also be true when the product itself is very complex or when the consumer’s ego is involved. In these situations the consumer has no established criteria for evaluation of alternatives. There has to be an extensive effort involving more deliberations and also in some cases more number of people. Such decision making is most likely when the consumer has a high involvement with the product. Certain facilitating conditions are also necessary for this strategy. The most important is the availability of adequate time for the decision Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 197

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

making. If the decision has to be taken quickly such extended problem solving exercise will not be feasible. The other condition is the availability of sufficient information. Insufficient or inaccurate information also can result in delay in decision making in such cases. The third condition is the capability of the consumer to evaluate various alternatives. If the consumer gets confused and is not able to process the information of different choices, there could be delay in the process. In this situation, the consumer is involved in an extensive internal and external search for information followed by a complex evaluation of various alternatives and there will also be a likelihood of serious post purchase evaluation. This happens due to high level of purchase involvement. Even after the purchase there could be a doubt about the correctness of the decision and hence there could be a thorough evaluation post purchase. Very few decisions of the consumer are likely to reach this level in daily life situations. The products which are normally at this level are appliances like stereo systems, personal computers, refrigerators, air conditioners, etc., automobiles, houses and so on. Even highly emotional decisions like buying some birthday gift for the boy friend or girl friend would involve high level of decision making.

6.4 Consumer Decision making process The process of consumer decision making consists of various steps as follows: First Step: Problem Recognition The decision process begins with this step. The consumer first notices & recognizes the need to be satisfied or problem to be solved for fulfilling some need. A consumer feels the thirst & looks for water or a beverage. Another consumer finds that the ink in his pen is over & hence looks out for Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 198

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

a refill. Problem recognition is the state in which the consumer feels the need to buy something to help him/her get back to the original state of physical or psychological comfort. There are two types of stimuli which result in problem recognition: 1. Internal Stimulus: This is internal state of physical or psychological discomfort felt by the consumer, for example- hunger, thirst, boredom, etc. 2. External Stimulus: This is the outside influence like an ment of a product, or the fresh bread smell near a bakery which would stimulate the need in the mind of the consumer. The external stimuli can influence a consumer in three different states of mind. i. When the consumer has already recognized the problem and is looking for a solution. This is when the consumer may even actively pursue the external stimuli like ments or the salesmen to look at various alternatives. ii. When the consumer had recognized the problem in the past but was not able to find a solution for various reasons like not having the time, not a priority, etc. For example a consumer wanted to buy a microwave oven which was getting postponed & when a neighbour bought a microwave oven, the need surfaced strongly to push the consumer to look at alternatives. iii. When a problem, which was dormant was not recognized in the past. This happens with most of the technological advances and innovations. The consumer who would have been happy with an old product may feel that the old product not satisfying his/her need when the new product is d. For example, before the e-mail the consumer never recognized the normal snail mail, which took so much effort, cost and delays as a problem. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 199

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Based on these facts there are two types of demand for a product or a service: 1. Primary Demand: This is the demand for the category of the product or service itself, which seeks to convert a non-buyer of it into a buyer. All the marketing efforts for promoting a new product or service are to generate the primary demand. This is done normally by educating the consumer about the benefits of the new product/service and also as to how this can solve a problem which has not been noticed or recognized till now. 2. Secondary or selective demand: This is the conversion of the demand from one brand to another. In mature markets of any product the marketers concentrate on the secondary demand creation. There has been a controversy in the basic function of marketing- whether it is to create a need or whether it is satisfy an already existing need. Many people argue that, no one needed many of the products like a video camera, a mobile phone etc. and that high profile marketing efforts created such demand. However when one defines the needs in proper perspective, incorporating the principles of Marketing Myopia, it is easy to figure out how these new concepts and products are catching up and why these are just satisfying the dormant needs of a consumer. Second Step: Prepurchase Search: This is the second step in the consumer decision process. Once the problem has been recognized by the consumer, the next step is to search for relevant information to solve the problem. This search is confined to a set of brands which can be classified as follows: 1. Awareness Set: This is the set of brands, which the consumer is aware of.


Page No. 200

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

2. Recalled Set: This is the set of brands, which the consumer can when deciding. 3. Considered Set: This is the set of brands, which the consumer considers for the final selection after discarding the other brands. The pre-purchase information may be obtained from various sources, like ments, brochures, salesmen, shop displays, company website, etc. which is basically given by the marketer. The consumer may also get the information from friends and acquaintances or from his/her own past experience. Nowadays there are many other sources, most important of which is the internet, which can produce a huge number of alternatives to the consumer, whether he/she intends to buy the product/service online or offline. In fact some researchers have listed the following benefits of an internet search which is responsible for the phenomenal popularity of this medium: 1. Cost: the internet offers the lowest cost for information search, which is the most attractive feature of this source. 2. Selection: The consumers are able to get a fairly large number of alternatives by searching the internet very quickly. 3. Reliability: The consumers find the internet sources more reliable than the store salesmen or ments. In fact many websites, blogs, etc. that encourage actual consumer reviews have increased the credibility of this information. 4. Quick product comparison: There are many sites which give product comparisons and this has again helped the consumers in taking more informed quick decisions which would have been either too laborious or time consuming before the advent of this feature in the internet.


Page No. 201

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

The extent of search effort by a consumer depends on many factors. These are as under:  Perceived Risk: This is the extent of loss incurred by the consumer if he takes a wrong decision, in the buying process. There can be many risks involved in making a purchase decision by a consumer like: a. The product may not perform as well as the expectation. b. Your immediate social circle may disapprove. c. The consumer may not be feeling comfortable psychologically with the product, although it may not have any product-related problems. d. There may be another equivalent brand, which is lower in price or the same brand may be available at a cheaper rate at some other outlet. e. This product may become obsolete in the near future and the new products may have much better features. When the perceived risk of the buyer is high he/she is likely to go for extensive search. The consumer may not find much risk in routine purchases and hence may not seek a lot of information before the purchase decision.  Involvement: This is the perceived importance of the product for the consumer. There are some products, which a consumer buys routinely without much thought and there are some products, which will involve a great deal of involvement and care of the consumer in decision making. This depends on how the consumer considers the importance of the product either financially or psychologically. Sometimes the emotional involvement of the consumer in a buying decision may be high although the cost of the product/service may not be high. Such high purchase decision involvement results in extensive search of prepurchase information.


Page No. 202

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

 Experience: The consumer may have the previous experience with the product or the brand, which will lead to less extensive search for prepurchase information. In such situations the purchase decisions will be routinely made. This may get disturbed only in certain situations like: f.

When the experience is not satisfactory after the previous purchase.

g. When there are some new innovations and products introduced in the market after the previous purchase. h. When the consumer is interested in an assortment of different brands of the same product. i.

If the previous experience is quite old & there is an urge to reconsider.

j.

When the perceived risk of wrong decision is high even with the previous experience.

k. When the consumer is highly involved with the product & hence enjoys the entire experience of evaluating various alternatives.  Urgency: when there is urgency for taking the decision quickly the extent of search gets restricted. Many marketers have taken advantage of this aspect and have devised marketing strategies aimed at consumers who value time by offering products and services, which would save time for them.  Brand Parity: when the competing brands are not very distinguishable from each other, the consumer has to resort to more search efforts in of getting more reviews by past consumers or by comparing their features more extensively. Sometimes, too much information results in the consumer get confused, as to how to sort out this excessive information. Many products are d with so many features, that the consumer finds it very difficult to understand the relative importance of these features, which could result in a decision, which may not be favourable to the marketer. Hence it is important for the Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 203

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

marketers to consider carefully what information is important from the consumer’s perspective and avoid excessive information which is termed as ‘information overload’. Third Step: Evaluation of Alternatives After completing the search of relevant information, the consumer has to evaluate the various alternatives. For this purpose we have to first understand how consumers make choices. There are different methods by which a consumer makes a choice, some of which are discussed below. i. Affective Choice: This is based on the feelings of the consumer rather than the actual benefits of the product or service. Buying of a dress, having a holiday, etc. will normally involve the anticipated feelings of the consumer while using the product or service. The decision will be based mostly on such anticipated feelings rather than the attributes of the product or service. In such situations, marketers have to design products and services, which will provide appropriate emotional response in the consumers. The advertising strategy also has to take care of helping the consumers visualize how they will feel while consuming the product or service. The advertising campaign –“God’s own Country” for Kerala Tourism was very effective in following this strategy, to evince the right emotions and feelings for the travelers looking for such experience of nature. ii. Cognitive Choice: This is based on the rational comparison of various attributes of the product or service. This requires the knowledge of all the relevant attributes at the time the choice is made and also it involves the comparison of each attribute of various brands. This requires a lot of time and effort and generally results in an optimal decision. Such choice is more relevant in the case of more complex decision making when the cost of purchase is high & the perceived risk of wrong decision is also high. This approach is also resorted to when the relevant brand wise Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 204

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

information on various attributes are readily available. Many marketers use this strategy to introduce brands, which are lacking in strong brand image or reputation in a competitive market. iii. Attitudinal Choice: This involves the general attitudes, impressions and intuitions of the consumer rather than an informed choice. A variety of situations force a consumer to go for this type of choice in preference to other types. Time pressure, lack of relevant information, etc. would result in a consumer decide on this method. Many marketers follow a dual strategy for important & expensive products and services by targeting both types of consumers viz. those going for cognitive choice as well as those going for attitudinal choice. Criteria for Evaluation The various dimensions, features and benefits, which a consumer looks for in response to the recognized problem, are termed as evaluation criteria. These are mainly the product benefits and features as well as the costs. There are various evaluative criteria used by consumers while making purchase decisions. These criteria can differ in type, number and importance. The type of criteria can be tangible factors like cost and performance features or they can be intangible benefits like style, taste, image, etc. The number of criteria can vary from product to product and normally these are limited in case of simple products and more in case of complex decisions like buying a house or an automobile. The importance of criteria may vary among different consumer segments or even from consumer to consumer. Depending on the relative importance of each criterion the ultimate decision of purchase may vary. Measurement of evaluative criteria: It is important for a marketer to determine the following factors to decide on a suitable marketing strategy: l.

The evaluative criteria used by a consumer


Page No. 205

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

m. How the various alternatives are perceived by the consumer on each criterion. n. The relative importance of each criterion. There are direct as well as indirect methods used to measure evaluative criteria. In direct methods, simple straightforward questions are asked and the consumers are assumed to provide correct data on desired attributes. Indirect methods like projective techniques are used to get results, by asking indirect questions and here the assumption is that the consumers will not or can not express correctly the evaluative criteria. Perceptual mapping is another technique of indirect collection of data by ranking different brands indicating pairs of brands and pairs of attributes which are similar. Cont analysis is another most popular indirect method. In this method, the consumer is asked to rank a set of product descriptions in which evaluative criteria vary in each description. Many times what are known as ‘Surrogate indicators’ are used to evaluate consumer’s evaluation of alternatives. A surrogate indicator is an attribute used to stand for or indicate another attribute. For example price has been found to influence the perceived quality of many products. Higher the price, higher is the consumer’s confidence in the product. Hence price has been the most popular surrogate indicator in such studies. Fourth Step: Outlet Selection and Purchase In this step the consumer has three alternatives for the final purchase process. 1. Brand first and Outlet later: In the discussions so far only the brand selection process has been dealt with in detail. It has been assumed that the consumer will first decide on the brand of the product which he wishes to purchase and then select the store from which to purchase


Page No. 206

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

based on various parameters like the lowest price, easy access, good image, good service, etc. 2. Outlet first and Brand later: Many consumers may follow this alternative for certain products. In such cases, the consumer may be familiar with some store, which is regularly patronized and hence he/she may visit this store for purchasing the product. 3. Brand and Outlet simultaneously: When the consumer has no particular preference for either the brands or the stores, he/she may visit a couple of stores and evaluate the brands in all these outlets on the spot. The final purchase decision may be taken on the basis of the attributes of both brands and the stores. For example, the consumer may prefer to buy a second best product from a store, which is perceived as giving better after sales service. Even the final purchase process can be further broken into three sub-steps: a. Preferred Brand identification: Based on the various evaluative criteria and the process of choice model, the consumer identifies the brand, which he/she prefers to buy. b. Purchase Intent: At this stage the consumer finally decides and determines that he/she will go ahead with the purchase. This requires the consumer having the necessary funds/ budget approval for making the purchase. c. Purchase implementation: This is the final stage of the purchase process. This involves finalization of payment , seeking and obtaining the transfer of title or ownership, making the payment and receiving possession. While going through these steps there could be delays due to various reasons. Some of the factors which could cause this are- lack of time, need for more information, inability to afford the product at that point of time, etc. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 207

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

If the marketers can understand the correct reasons for such delays by consumers they can devise their strategies to overcome these problems to push the consumer for taking the final step. The final step of purchase can also get altered when the consumer decides to deviate from the identified choice. This could happen due to several reasons likea. The identified brand may be out of stock. b. Some new information either in the store or from some new external source may reopen the evaluation process. c. Financial offered by the store may not be feasible for the consumer who may decide either to abandon the purchase or change the brand.

6.5 Consumer choice Selection Models There are some models of selection of choices by consumers and most of these models are only indicative and not very precise since the mental processes of consumers are often unconscious and unpredictable. These models try to predict how a consumer tries to organize the attributes of different brands and evaluate them to arrive at his/her choice. There are two types of such models- compensatory and non-compensatory. Non compensatory models consider that, very good performance of one attribute can not compensate for the poor performance of another attribute. We shall cover four non-compensatory models and one compensatory model in this unit. Each model will yield a different choice. Hence, the marketers should first understand as to which model is most suitable for explaining the decision making process of their target customers and accordingly decide on positioning and promotional strategies for their brand.


Page No. 208

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

 Compensatory Model: In this model, the consumer will average out some very good features with some less attractive features of a brand in determining the overall preference for the brand. The compensatory decision model states that the brand that rates highest in the sum of the consumer’s judgments of the relevant evaluative criteria will be chosen. In this model the total mix of the relevant attributes must be considered to be superior to those of the competition.  Conjunctive Model: In this model, the consumer establishes the minimum required performance standards for each evaluative criterion and selects the first of all brands that sures these minimum standards. Since individuals have limited ability to process information, this model is frequently used to reduce the size of the information processing task to a manageable level. This model is often used to eliminate the alternatives which are out the consumer’s price range, or they are outside the preferred location or they do not offer some desired features. This model is often used in purchases of products like houses, automobiles, computers, mobiles and also low involvement products. In all such cases the consumer will select the first brand which meets all his minimum requirements.  Disjunctive Model: In this model the consumer establishes a minimum level of performance for each important attribute. All brands which sur the performance level for any key attribute are considered acceptable. When this model is used, it is critical to sur the consumer’s requirement on at least one of the key criteria. In this model, since the consumers are supposed to purchase the first brand, which exceeds one of the important retirements, extensive distribution and predominant shelf space in a store display play vital roles.


Page No. 209

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

 Elimination-by-aspects model: This requires the consumer to rank the evaluative criteria in of their importance and to establish a cutoff point for each criterion. All brands are first evaluated on the most important criterion and those which are not up to the mark are dropped from further consideration. If more than one brand es this stage, the process is repeated for the second most important attribute. This repeated till only one brand remains in the end. In this model, it is critical to exceed the consumer’s expectation in one more attribute than the competition. Many advertising campaigns for products use this model for emphasizing on the high level of one attribute which other brands do not have.  Lexicographic Model: In this model the consumer first ranks the attributes in the order of importance & then selects the brand, which performs the best in the most important attribute. If two are more brands are equal in this comparison, then they are again evaluated on the second most important attribute and so on till only one brand remains in the end. In this model the brand which sures others in the most important attribute will be chosen. This superiority should be emphasised in the advertising campaigns for such products. Self Assessment Questions I 1. __________ View is the case of assuming the consumer to be highly rational. 2. __________ Decision Making (Nominal Decision Making or Routine Problem Solving) is the strategy used for purchase problems which have been solved previously. 3. _________ or selective demand is the conversion of the demand from one brand to another. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 210

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

4. _________ Risk is the extent of loss incurred by the consumer if a wrong decision is taken by him in the buying process. 5. After completing the search of relevant information, the consumer has to __________ the various alternatives.

6.6 Household and Family Decision Making “Household” is defined as all the people who occupy a housing unit (a house, flat, group of rooms, single room, etc.). A “Family” is defined as a group of two or more people related by birth, marriage or adoption and living together. A “Family Household” is defined as a household consisting of a family and any unrelated people residing in the same hosing unit. A “Nonfamily Household” is a householder living alone or exclusively with others to whom he or she is not related. In this chapter we shall be focusing on family households since several influence the decision making in such households and it is distinctly different from individual decision making. The family decision making is different from individual decision making in many ways. There are influences of one family member on another while taking decisions and the roles of initiator, influencer, payer, buyer and may be played and shared by different family in different decision making situations. Invariably the family purchases are inherently emotional and affect the relationships among the family . The processes the families use to make purchase decisions and their outcomes have long standing and important effects on the well being of individual family and the family itself.


Page No. 211

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Roles of Family in Decision Making There are six roles in a family decision process which are played by individual tly or individually in different purchase situations.  Initiator: This is the member who first recognizes the need for purchase and initiates the process of purchase.  Information Gatherer: This member normally has the expertise and also interest to collect information in a particular purchase process. Different may also seek information on different aspects of purchase or at different times.  Influencer: this member has maximum influence on the process of evaluation of alternatives and the final choice.  Decision Maker: This member makes the final decision.  Buyer: This member is involved in the actual buying action.  : this member uses the product/service. In all the above roles there could be more than one member at each level of decision making. It is important for marketers to understand this concept of different roles played by different family especially for their brands so that they can formulate their marketing strategies to ultimately influence the purchase decision. Husband-Wife Decision Roles Family decision making has been categorized as ‘husband dominant’, ‘wife dominant’, ‘t’ or ‘individual’. Depending on the product and the situation the above patterns of relative influence may vary in the same family. There are several factors which affect these decision sharing patterns. Some of them are discussed here


Page No. 212

Consumer Behaviour

I.

Unit 6

Gender Role: In each culture and in each family the specific behaviours and norms are linked to a person’s gender. In certain cases it could also depend on the product or service being purchased and each gender may have a specific role in the decision making process. For example, in Indian families the kitchen related products are the domains of the wife.

II. Wife’s Employment Status: It has been found that the wife’s status of employment directly affects the gender roles in a decision making process. A working wife has more importance in t decisions & in many situations the wife takes individual decisions. She is considered to be more knowledgeable because of the exposure to the outside world and since she is contributing to the family finances she will have more say in all-important decisions of the family. III. Family Stage: The different stages of the family like- newly married couple, couples with small children, with teenage children, etc. affect the decision making process of the families. In the initial stages of marriage the couples are found to take t decisions & as they grow, the decisions pertaining to their individual chores get more distinct and consequently the decision making process also gets affected. IV. Time Pressure: Families under high time pressure may rely less on t decisions and in many situations individual decisions are taken although t decisions would have been more efficient. V. Complexity of Purchase: More complex the decision more the possibility of t decisions. Such cases may be when the cost of purchase is very high or when the risk of a wrong decision is pretty high. These are mostly decisions which the family has to live with for a long period- like purchase of a house or a car.


Page No. 213

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Conflict in Family decisions Family decision making may give rise to conflict if the family decision process involves t decision-making. There could be disagreements on goals or market values or on perceptions or evaluation of alternatives. The nature of conflict will differ depending on whether the disagreement is in one or both of these areas. There could be four alternatives and for each of these the resolution of conflict also could differ. a. When goals are agreed upon but evaluations are not: this is a case of solution conflict as in the case of a family vacation when the conflict is in the place for vacation. In such cases the conflict is resolved through problem solving. This requires gathering of more information or to add more alternatives. b. When goals are divergent and evaluation is also differing: this is a case of compounded complex and this normally happens in case of important decisions like buying a new home. There could be differences in both the selection of the goal as also the evaluations. In such a case the conflict resolution takes place through politicking and bargaining. Bargaining requires trading favours like agreeing upon some preference of the husband and some of the wife in selecting the home. c. The third type is when the goals are divergent and the evaluation is agreed upon. Such cases result in Goal conflict, as in the case of what product to buy. The wife may want a safe and large car for accommodating the whole family whereas the husband may want to buy a powerful and sleek car. Resolution of this conflict is through persuasion by analyzing the goal hierarchy, i.e. which goals take precedence over which other goals in the given situation. d. The fourth situation is when both goals and the evaluations are convergent when there is obviously no conflict. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 214

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

6.7 Howard-Sheth Model of Buying Behaviour Schematic Diagram Description of the model The above is a schematic diagram of this model. This model provides the framework for including various concepts like learning, perception, attitudes, etc., which play a role in influencing consumer behaviour. Many of these concepts have already been discussed in detail in the earlier paragraphs. The factors affecting consumer behaviour are explained below.

Howard-Sheth Model of Consumer Behavior Howard Howard-Sheth

Social, Symbolic and Direct Stimuli

Inputs

Perceptual Constructs

Overt Search

Learning Constructs

Outputs

Motives

Atte ntion

Confide nce

Sti mulus Ambiguity

Brand Compre he ns ion Choice Crite ria

Attention

Brand Compre he ns ion

Attitude

Attitude Atte ntion Intention

Perceptual Bi as

Satisfaction

Purchase

Inputs: In the Howard Sheth theory, the most significant stimulus affecting the buying behaviour is the information cues about the attributes of the product. These cues may come to the buyer from the marketing firm or from other sources. These product attributes acting as information cues are quality, price, distinctiveness, service, availability, etc. These cues could come from impersonal sources like mass media communications and advertising, over which the firm has no control. The information may also come from sources like sales and service personnel who are involved in the marketing efforts of the firm. The third source is social information cues which could affect buying behaviour towards the product or brand and these Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 215

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

sources include family, friends or other of the group with whom buyer comes into or to which he aspires to be in. The social source is also personal and the company has no control over this source. Perceptual Constructs: This refers to all the complex states or psychological processes (perception) and how the individual deals with the information cues received from various sources. It can be seen that all information available is not attended to (attention) and may not always be crystal clear in its meanings (ambiguity). Although the individual may be engaged in his/her own overt search for information, sometimes he/she may be receiving unwanted information. Moreover, any information cues to which the individual may attend may be distorted (perceptual bias) as result of his own frame of reference. Learning Constructs: The second set of hypothetical constructs in this theory are more complex and numerous. ‘Motives’ refers to the goals the individual attempts to achieve through his/her buying behaviour. These goals are derived from the various drives (needs), which may be acting as a cue for his/her motive. More closely related to the buyers intention is his attitude towards the product/brandwhether he/she forms a positive attitude towards the product/brand. Other learning

constructs

include

‘brand

comprehension’

i.e.,

knowledge/awareness about the brand attributes which form the basis for the buyers evoked set of alternatives; choice criteria, and the confidence the individual has about his/ her brand comprehension, attitudes, or intentions. Finally, the model includes a construct, ‘satisfaction’. This refers to ‘’ mechanism, i.e., the post purchase and post use evaluation of the output of the process.


Page No. 216

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Output: The purchase decision is the output. If after using the product, the consumer is satisfied with it, this will reinforce his positive attitude and purchase intent about the product and brand. Also, the positive attitude makes the consumer more attentive to the product/brand’s stimuli and further increases his brand comprehension. If the consumer is dissatisfied with experience of using the product/brand, it will trigger off a reaction of negative attitude, low attention to the product stimuli. Poor brand comprehension and negative intention to purchase. External Variables: This model also includes a number of variables, which are not explained but have a bearing on some or all of the constructs discussed above and indirectly influences the output or consumer response. 1. Social and organizational setting: Man is basically a social animal. Because of his interactions with various groups and society, they get influenced by each other regarding decisions on what to buy, how to buy, etc. 2. Social class: In order to conform to the norms of the social class to which he/she belongs, the individual will be engaged in behaviour, which will be acceptable to the social class to which it belongs. Income may or may not have a bearing on the social class, which is based on many other factors like the occupation, education, etc. 3. Culture: refers to the shared, somewhat consistent pattern of behaviour of a group of people. Each culture has a set of beliefs, values, etc. So the pattern of buyer behaviour will be based on a pattern of behaviour shared in a specific subset of a larger culture-a subculture trait. 4. Purchasing power/ Financial status: The money/income available for purchasing goods and services during some specific time period also plays a role in influencing the consumption pattern and thereby his buying behaviour.


Page No. 217

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

6.8 The Nicosia Model In an early study of the buyer decision process literature, Frank Nicosia (Nicosia, F. 1966) identified three types of buyer decision making models. They are the univariate model (He called it the "simple scheme") in which only one behavioural determinant was allowed in a stimulus-response type of relationship; the multi-variate model (He called it a "reduced form scheme") in which numerous independent variables were assumed to determine buyer behaviour; and finally the system of equations model (He called it a "structural scheme" or "process scheme") in which numerous functional relations (either univariate or multi-variate) interact in a complex system of equations. He concluded that only this third type of model is capable of expressing the complexity of buyer decision processes. Nicosia builds a comprehensive model involving five modules. The encoding module includes determinants like "attributes of the brand", "environmental factors", "consumer's attributes", "attributes of the organization", and "attributes of the message". Other modules in the system include consumer decoding, search and evaluation, decision, and consumption. The model is split into four key fields: (1) The source of a message to the consumers’ attitude (2) The search for and evaluation of alternatives (3) The act of purchase (4) Storage and the use of the purchased product. The model attempts to demonstrate how the company influences the consumer through its promotional and advertising activities.

6.9 Engel-Blackwell-Miniard Model The features of this model have also been discussed in the earlier paragraphs in this unit in detail. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 218

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

The main attraction of the model is that it deals with low-involvement situations. It is suggested that in low involvement situation the degree to which the various stages in the model are undertaken decreases. The problems with this model are that there is no way of testing it. There is also no specific theory i.e. the variables are named in superficially plausible way but not specified in any operational detail. This model breaks down the consumer decision making process into 5 steps. These steps are as under: 1. Problem recognition: the consumer will recognise a difference between his or her actual state and what the ideal state should be. This may occur on of external stimuli. 2. Information search: Initially the information available with the consumer may be consistent to other beliefs and attitudes held by him or her. While being involved in an information seeking or search stage, the consumer will try to gather more information from various sources. The individual gets exposure of the stimuli which may catch his or her attention, be received and retained in memory. This method of information is selective in nature and the consumer will accept the information, which is in consonance with what is perceived by them. 3. Alternative evaluation: Now the individual will evaluate the alternate brands. The methods used for evaluating the various brands will depend on the consumer’s underlying goals, motives and personality. The consumer also has certain predetermined beliefs about the various brands in of the characteristics associated with the different brands. 4. Choice: the consumer’s choice will depend on his or her intention and attitude and is influenced by other people like friends, family etc. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 219

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

5. Outcome: The outcome may either be positive or negative. Apart from these 5 steps the model also includes a number of other related variables grouped into five categories. Information input Information processing Product-brand evaluation General motivating influences Internalized environmental influences This model consists of four components: i. Information processing ii. Central control Unit iii. Decision Process and iv. Environmental influences i.

Information processing: this component comprises the consumer’s selective exposure, attention, comprehension and retention of stimuli relating to a brand received from marketing and non-marketing sources. As a marketer, the first step is to ensure that a consumer is exposed to the message or stimuli, pays attention to it, understands what it is all about and also re it.

ii. Central Control Unit: The stimuli thus received and retained are processed in the central control unit. The stimuli are processed and interpreted with the help of four psychological filters: a. Stored information and past experience about the product/brand which serves as a memory for comparing different alternatives; b. Evaluative criteria which the consumer uses in judging the alternatives; Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 220

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

c. General and specific attitudes which influence the purchase decision; d. Basic personality traits, which influence how the consumer is likely to respond to various alternatives. iii. Decision process: The decision process component of the model consists of: a. Problem recognition b. Internal search and evaluation c. External search and evaluation d. Purchase processes e. Decision outcomes If the purchase decision is such that it requires extensive problem solving, the consumer would go through all the above five stages. In case of limited problem solving or routinised response behaviour, some of the intermediate stages may be skipped and the consumer may directly reach the purchase decision. iv. Environmental Influences: The environmental factors that may influence the consumer’s purchase decision are income, culture, family, social class and physical situations. Depending on the specific product under consideration, these factors may have a favorable or unfavorable influence on the purchase decision.

6.10 Post purchase Behaviour As the consumers use the product, they evaluate the performance critically in the initial stages by comparing with their expectations. Such an evaluation may lead to following three outcomes:


Page No. 221

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

a. Performance matches expectations: This leads to a neutral feeling and satisfaction. There is a likelihood of this consumer buying this brand again in future from the same store. b. Performance exceeds expectations: This could lead to a strong brand and store loyalty in future purchases. c. Performance is below expectations: In this case especially if the involvement is intensive, the consumer may respond in different ways as explained below. i.

Cognitive Dissonance: This may result in doubting the wisdom of the choice which creates what is called “Cognitive Dissonance” which is a disturbance in the mind. The consumer may then try to reduce such disturbance by trying to justify the soundness of the decision by seeking further positive information about their choice and avoid any negative inputs they may get at this stage. Thus they will re-read the product brochures, giving positive features and avoid competitors’ ments, or any negative inputs by friends or acquaintances. Marketers can make use of this psychology, by asking their sales people to get a from the consumers, which may reveal some of the positive features neglected by them previously.

ii. Exit: This is the extreme reaction when the consumer is totally convinced that the choice was indeed bad. He/she may then decide not to buy this brand again. They may go through the entire process of the purchase process from the very beginning when they need to buy the product again. iii. Complain: Dissatisfied customers may either complain or just keep quiet. The likelihood of the consumer voicing a complaint depends on three factorsSikkim Manipal University

Page No. 222

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

a) Extent of dissatisfaction (whether the dissatisfaction is serious or not), b) Attribution to marketer (whether the consumer feels that this complaint can definitely be attributed to the marketer) or c) Consumer’s

personality

(degree

of

aggressiveness/

submissiveness, self-confidence, assertiveness etc.) If this results in a complaint and if the marketer successfully redresses the complaint, the consumer may perceive that justice has been done. Such a result is possible when the consumer feels that he/she was treated with respect during the process of conflict resolution, the policy and procedure followed was fair and the final decision was justified. If the consumer is satisfied that justice has been done, he is likely to continue with the same brand and store. If the consumer is dissatisfied with this the hostility increases. There could be adverse word of mouth publicity. It has been found by research that consumer complaints are good for the marketers. A relatively low percentage of consumers actually complain and if the complaint is redressed they are likely to become loyal customers. A majority of dissatisfied consumers may not complain; but simply turn to competitors brands. It has also been found by research that the negative publicity of dissatisfied customers is much more widely done than the positive publicity of satisfied customers. The satisfied customers are less likely to spread the word across about the good features of the product. However the dissatisfied customer is more likely to take the initiative to spread the word around about the negative aspects of his/her experience which could be more damaging. Hence complaint redressal system is a very important part of a successful marketing strategy.


Page No. 223

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

Self Assessment Questions II 1.

There are six roles in a family decision process which are played by individual tly or individually in different purchase situations. __________ is the member who first recognizes the need for purchase and initiates the process of purchase.

2. _________ is the member who is involved in the actual buying action. 3. Family decision making has been categorized as ‘husband dominant’, ‘__________ dominant’, ‘t’ or ‘individual’. 4. When goals are agreed upon but evaluations are not is a case of ‘__________ conflict’. 5. In the Howard Sheth theory, the most significant

stimulus

affecting the buying behaviour is the information __________ about the attributes of the product.

6.11 Summary In this unit, we have discussed how Consumer Decision process takes place. In this, we learnt the Definition and Scope of Consumer Decisions, Levels of Consumer Decision-Making, Models of Purchase Decision Process, Situational Influences and Consumers as decision- makers. We also studied the steps in the Consumer Decision making process like Problem Recognition, Prepurchase Search, Evaluation of Alternatives, Outlet Selection and Purchase and post purchase behaviour. We also learnt about various Consumer choice selection models like Compensatory Model, Conjunctive Model, Disjunctive Model, Elimination-by-aspects model and Lexicographic Model. We also covered various facets of Household and Family Decision-Making including Roles of Family in DecisionMaking, Husband-Wife Decision Roles and Conflict in Family decisions. We


Page No. 224

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 6

also studied Howard-Sheth Model of Buying Behavior, The Nicosia Model and Engel-Blackwell-Miniard model.

6.12 Terminal Questions 1. Describe the Scope and Levels of Consumer Decision-Making process. 2. Explain the Lexicographic Model of consumer choice selection. 3. When is the Limited Decision Making strategy adopted by the consumer? Explain with examples. 4. Describe the different types of Conflict in Family decisions. 5. List the three outcomes of post purchase behaviour. Explain the meaning of Cognitive Dissonance.

6.13


SAQI 1. Economic 2. Habitual 3. Secondary 4. Perceived 5. evaluate SAQII 1. Initiator 2. Buyer 3. wife 4. solution 5. cues TQ a. Refer Section 6.2 b. Refer Section 6.5 c. Refer Section 6.3 d. Refer Section 6.6 e. Refer Section 6.10 Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 225

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Unit 7

Consumer Research

Structure 7.1


7.2

Primary Research

7.3

Qualitative Research Self Assessment Questions I

7.4

Quantitative Research

7.5

Experimental Methods

7.6

Secondary Research

7.7

Managerial application of consumer research in marketing Self-Assessment Questions II

7.8

Summary

7.9

Terminal Questions

7.10 Answers to SAQs & TQs

7.1 Introduction Research is the scholarly or scientific practice of gathering existing or new information in order to enhance one's knowledge of a specific area. Research has many categories, from medicine to literature. Marketing research, or market research, is a form of business research and is generally divided into two categories: consumer market research and business-to-business (B2B) market research, which was previously known as industrial marketing research. Consumer marketing research studies the buying habits of individual people, while business-to-business marketing research investigates the markets for products sold by one business to another. Consumer marketing research is a form of applied sociology that Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 226

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

concentrates on understanding the behaviours, whims and preferences, of consumers in a market-based economy. Arthur Nielsen pioneered the field of consumer marketing research as a statistical science with the founding of the ACNielsen Company in 1923. Depending on whether the data required already exists or not, there are two classifications: a. Primary Research & b. Secondary Research. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Know the different types of consumer research.



Understand various methods of qualitative & quantitative research.



Explain the managerial applications of consumer research.

7.2 Primary Research Primary research (also called field research) involves the collection of data that doesn't already exist. The term is widely used in market research. There are different methods of collecting primary data. Some of these are: 

Observation: Looking at and recording what people do and how they behave. Today, store cameras can be used to observe consumer behaviour.



Experiments: Market researchers can use experimental techniques. For example- test marketing, blind taste tests.



Surveys: Involves asking questionnaires to respondents.



Consumer s: A select group of consumers that the company regularly surveys to identify changing attitudes.

There are two broad categories of primary research to understand consumer behaviour.


Page No. 227

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

a. Qualitative Research: This involves measuring in of general descriptions and categories. b. Quantitative Research: In this category, the measurement is in of numbers.

7.3 Qualitative Research Qualitative research involves an in-depth understanding of consumer behavior and the reasons that govern that behavior. Unlike quantitative research, qualitative research relies on reasons behind various aspects of behavior. Simply put, it investigates the why and how of decision-making, as compared to what, where and when of quantitative research. Hence, the need is for smaller but focused samples rather than large random samples, which qualitative research categorizes data into patterns as the primary basis for organizing and reporting results. Unlike quantitative research, which relies exclusively on the analysis of numerical or quantifiable data, data for qualitative research comes in many mediums, including text, sound, still images, and moving images. In qualitative research, the method does not ask the consumer to limit his or her answers to pre-assigned response categories. The responses are verbal rather than numbers and the respondent is asked to rate the answer in his or her own words. If the answer is a True/False or a multiple-choice category, this is a quantitative answer. If the answer is in of an essay, it is qualitative. In this method, the researcher may not even know what the possible answers could be and in fact this method is adopted precisely for that reason. This approach allows the researcher to discover the consumption

motives,

attitudes,

opinions,

perceptions,

preferences,

experiences, actions, future intentions, etc. There are different techniques in Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 228

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

qualitative research. Some of them are described in the following paragraphs: Focus Groups A focus group is a form of qualitative research, in which a group of people is asked

about

their

attitude

towards

a

product,

service,

concept,

ment, idea, or packaging. Questions are asked in an interactive group setting where participants are free to talk with other group . Focus groups are seen as an important tool for acquiring regarding new products, as well as various topics. In particular, focus groups allow companies wishing to develop, package, name, or test market a new product, to discuss, view, and/or test the new product before it is made available to the public. This can provide invaluable information about the potential market acceptance of the product. In traditional focus groups, a screened (qualified) group of respondents gathers in the same room. They are screened to ensure that they are part of the relevant target market and that the group is a representative subgroup of this market segment. There are usually 6 to 10 in the group, and the session usually lasts for 1 to 2 hours. A guides the group through a discussion that probes attitudes about a client's proposed products or services. The discussion is loosely structured, and the encourages the free flow of ideas. The is typically given a list of objectives or an anticipated outline. He/she will generally have only a few specific questions prepared prior to the focus group. These questions will serve to initiate open-ended discussions. Client representatives observe the discussion from behind a one-way mirror. Participants cannot see out, but the researchers and their clients can see in. Usually, a video camera records the meeting so that, it can be seen by others who were not able to travel to the site. Transcripts can be created Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 229

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

from the videotape. If the participants speak a different language than the clients, a simultaneous interpreter may be used. Researchers examine more than the spoken words. They also try to interpret facial expressions, body language, and group dynamics. s may use straight questioning or various projective techniques, including fixed or free association, story telling and role-playing. Focus groups are often used to garner reaction to specific stimuli such as concepts, prototypes and advertising. It is often suggested that, respondents feel group pressure to conform and this can contaminate the results. Others hold that, by using trained and experienced s who appropriately manage the discussion, this potential problem can be mitigated. Further, despite the potential for groupthink, marketers and sociologists find that group dynamics are useful in developing new streams of thought and covering an issue thoroughly. Focus group discussions are not representative of the total population of the target consumers since this sample is not representative. This group is a window to the customer’s mind, bringing to surface those things, which the marketer may not have known about the consumer & his/ her views on many issues. Types of focus groups: Different types of focus groups include i. Two-way focus group – one focus group watches another focus group and discusses the observed interactions and conclusions. ii. Dual focus group – one ensures the session progresses smoothly, while another ensures that all the topics are covered. iii. Dueling focus group – two s deliberately take opposite sides on the issue under discussion. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 230

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

iv. Respondent focus group – one or more of the respondents are asked to act as the temporarily. v. Client participant focus groups – one or more client representatives participate in the discussion, either covertly or overtly. vi. Mini focus groups – groups are comprised of 4 or 5 rather than 8 to 12. vii. Teleconference focus groups - telephone network is used. viii. Online focus groups – computers and internet network is used. Traditional focus groups can provide accurate information, and are less expensive than other forms of traditional marketing research. There can be significant costs however if a product is to be marketed on a nationwide basis, it would be critical to gather respondents from various locales throughout the country since attitudes about a new product may vary due to geographical considerations. This would require a considerable expenditure in travel and lodging expenses. Additionally, the site of a traditional focus group may or may not be in a locale convenient to a specific client, so client representatives may have to incur travel and lodging expenses as well. The use of focus groups has steadily evolved over time and is becoming increasingly more widespread. On Line Focus Groups With the advent of large-scale computer networks, such as the Internet, it is now possible to link respondents electronically. Respondents share images, data, and their responses on their computer screens. This avoids a significant amount of travel expenses. It allows respondents from all over the world to gather, electronically, while avoiding countless logistical headaches. Like in-person focus groups, online groups are usually limited to 8-10 participants.


Page No. 231

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Such a system eliminates the logistical headaches and travel expenses associated with conducting focus groups. Many platforms even allow for a 'back room', so that clients can observe and talk among each other and with the as the group proceeds, just like in-person focus groups, even though they are physically apart from the . In this way, questions can be added in real time to further probe a particular response. Such a system prohibits participation on the different chat discussions based on the class of the participant (, observer, and participant). In addition to the savings on travel, online focus groups often can be accomplished faster than traditional groups because respondents are recruited from online who are often qualified to match research criteria. Applications of Focus Groups Some of the applications of focus groups are as under: a. Generating ideas for product improvements or new products. The discussions will focus on the customers currently face in using the product or as to how the product can be made more useful and this can suggest new directions for product research and development. Some customers in fact use some products innovatively and this can in fact lead to new uses of the same product, which the firm can capitalize on. b. Understanding customer perceptions of competing brands. The firm’s brand is displayed along with the competing brands without revealing the identity of the client’s brand and the consumers are encouraged to compare these brands. c. Testing new concepts. New product concepts, packaging prototypes, new distribution channels, new brand names, advertising art works, new commercials can be shown to the focus group to get their feed back.


Page No. 232

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Customer Visits A programme of customer visit involves visiting a predetermined number of customers, to hold interviews with these customers and observe each customer’s experience. A team from different functional departments like R&D, production, marketing, logistics, etc makes the visit. Specific objectives of the visit is developed and communicated to the customer well ahead. The purpose of the visit is to understand the customer’s experience and not to sell the product. Advantages of Customer Visits There are several advantages of such visits. Some of them are as follows: a. It affords a good opportunity to understand customer requirements. Face to face interactions help to develop the specifications of the product tly so that the product may be better fit of the customer requirements and also easier for the firm to produce. b. The technical team from the factory and R&D can understand and respond to the customer’s thought process first hand and will help the whole process task oriented. c.

The technical people will become more customer oriented since they understand the customer psychology & needs first hand rather than get to know from a third person from the marketing department. They feel confident that they are getting unfiltered information about the consumer behaviour without any biases brought in by the marketing people.

d. Certain things can be learned not by interviews, but by observing the actual handling of the product, by the customer. In fact, even logistics person of the firm may observe how the customer handles the packaging, so that there could be some new ideas, which may occur for improvement of packaging.


Page No. 233

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Disadvantages and criticism of Focus Groups However, focus groups also have disadvantages: The researcher has less control over a group than a one-on-one interview, and thus time can be lost on issues irrelevant to the topic; the data are tough to analyze because the talking is in reaction to the comments of other group ; observers/ s need to be highly trained, and groups are quite variable and can be tough to get together. Moreover, the number of of a focus group is not large enough to be a representative sample of a population; thus, the data obtained from the groups is not necessarily representative of the whole population, unlike in opinion polls. A fundamental difficulty with focus groups (and other forms of qualitative research) is the issue of observer dependency: the results obtained are influenced by the researcher, raising questions of validity. The design of the focus group study (e.g. respondent selection, the questions asked, how they are phrased, how they are posed, in what setting, by whom, and so on) affects the answers obtained from respondents. In focus groups, researchers

are

not

detached

observers

but

always

participants.

Researchers must take this into when making their analysis. Motivation Research This type of research is directed at discovering the reasons for a person’s behaviour. In consumer behaviour, motivation research is conducted to find out the conscious and subconscious reasons that motivate people to buy or not to buy a brand, to patronize or avoid a store, to accept or reject a marketing communication, etc. A number of techniques are used in motivation research: a. Non-disguised structured techniques: In this design, the research purpose will be obvious and may seek response along pre-specified Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 234

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

response categories. The researchers often ask for opinions or attitudes on pertinent topics by using rating statements, which clearly indicate the purpose of study and the responses like ‘agree/disagree’ or ‘true/false’ will make the response also unambiguous. Normally, political exit polls and referendums are examples of such design. b. Non-disguised non-structured Techniques: In this type, the purpose of the study is not disguised; but the consumer response categories are not predetermined. The questioning is open-ended, encouraging the consumer to supply whatever answer he/she feels fit. This set is also known as unstructured interviews, qualitative interviews, non-directive interviews, etc. The researcher simply names a broad topic and encourages the respondent to talk about whatever he/she thinks, knows and feels about the topic. c. Disguised structured techniques: In this design, the real purpose is disguised; but the response categories are provided. For example, a researcher may ask- “Of the following, who is most likely to own a Maruti 800 car: a. a professor, b. a student, c. an actor, or d. a mechanic.” The respondent’s answer will reveal the image he/she holds of a Maruti 800 owner. d. Disguised non-structured techniques: in this, the respondent knows neither the purpose of research nor the response categories prestructured. The respondent is given a fairly vague stimulus and is then asked to interpret the stimulus. These are also called as projection techniques. This technique is very helpful in uncovering motives that respondents would not knowingly and voluntarily reveal. The specific techniques used in this design are word association, sentence completion and story completion.


Page No. 235

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

e. Word Association: In this technique, the researcher either reads or flashes a set of words before the consumer who is instructed to respond with whatever word comes to his/ her mind. For example, the word or expression ‘ instant coffee’ may bring out such associations as tasteless, ordinary, cheap, etc. revealing the reason this set of consumers may not buy this. Another group who are heavy s of instant coffee may respond with words like convenient, quick, invigorating, etc. f. Sentence Completion: This is similar to word association excepting that the respondent is presented with an incomplete sentence and is asked to complete the sentence. An incomplete sentence like- ‘I drink instant coffee only when I am ______’ might get such responses like- “ in a hurry”, “ in the office”, “ relaxing”, “at home”, etc. g. Story Completion: The most popular form of story completion is “Thematic Apperception Test”(TAT). The Thematic Apperception Test has been amongst the most widely used, researched, and taught projective psychological tests. Its adherents claim that it taps a subject's unconscious to reveal repressed aspects of personality, motives and needs for achievement, power and intimacy, and problem-solving abilities. The TAT is popularly known as the picture interpretation technique because it uses a picture (like in a product buying or usage situation) about which the subject must tell a story. The subject is asked to tell as dramatic a story as he/she can for each picture, including: –

what has led up to the event shown

–

what is happening at the moment

–

what the characters are feeling and thinking, and

–

what is the outcome of the story.


Page No. 236

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Interpretative Research This is another qualitative research method. In this method, the researcher observes a customer or a group of customers in their natural setting and interprets the behaviour based on an extensive understanding of the social and cultural characteristics of that setting. The researcher in fact becomes a participant observer of the scene. These are also called ethnographic studies. The purpose here is not limited to the buying behaviour of the consumer; it also covers the consumer’s lifestyle, his/her satisfaction level, the role of material objects and worldly activities in his/her life, etc. There are many advantages of interpretative research. First the researcher will be observing the behaviour of the consumer in the natural setting and hence the artificialness of surveys, focus group rooms, or other laboratory type settings are avoided. Second, The consumer is observed over a long period of time stretching from a few hours to a few weeks rather than a few minutes. Third, the researcher gets a first hand knowledge of the consumer behaviour rather than getting third party respondents’ reactions. Fourth, because of the extended mutual exposure between the researcher & the customer, a greater trust is built which can then lead to customer answers being more sincere and honest. Finally the customer activity being analysed & questioned is much more immediate and physically present. This method however has a few shortcomings. It requires highly skilled and well-trained researchers who are less preoccupied with recording the responses than the interpretation of their observations. This is also very time consuming and quite expensive. The interpretation of data is quite subjective in spite of following certain analytical procedures. Finally these methods are good at generating hypotheses; but not at confirming hypotheses or suggesting any general principles.


Page No. 237

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Self Assessment Questions I 1. __________ research (also called field research) involves the collection of data that doesn't already exist. 2. Unlike quantitative research, qualitative research relies on reasons behind various aspects of behavior and investigates the _________ and _________of decision making, as compared to what, where, and when of quantitative research. 3. A ________ group is a form of qualitative research in which, a group of people are asked about their attitude towards a product, service, concept, ment, idea, or packaging. 4. The __________ __________Test has been amongst the most widely used, researched, and taught projective psychological tests. 5. __________ Research is another qualitative research method in which the researcher observes a customer or a group of customers in their natural setting and interprets the behaviour based on an extensive understanding of the social and cultural characteristics of that setting.

7.4 Quantitative Research Quantitative marketing research is the application of quantitative research techniques to the field of marketing. It has roots in the modern marketing viewpoint that marketing is an interactive process in which both the buyer and seller reach a satisfying agreement on the "four P's" of marketing: Product, Price, Place (location) and Promotion. As a social research method, it typically involves the construction of questionnaires and scales. People who respond (respondents) are asked to complete the survey. Marketers use the information so obtained to understand the needs of individuals in the marketplace, and to create strategies and marketing plans. Both descriptive and inferential statistical techniques can be used to analyse Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 238

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

data and draw conclusions. It involves a quantity of respondents, sometimes ranging in number from ten to ten million, and may include hypotheses, random sampling techniques to enable inference from the sample to the population. Marketing research may include both experimental and quasiexperimental research designs. Steps involved in Quantitative Research: There are five important steps involved in the research process: a. Defining the Problem: This involves problem audit and problem definition i.e. – What is the problem? What are the various aspects of the problem? What information is needed? b. Research

Design:

This

involves

conceptualization

and

operationalisation i.e. – How exactly do we define the concepts involved? How do we translate these concepts into observable and measurable behaviours? Hypothesis specification: What claim(s) do we want to test? a. Research design specification: What type of methodology to use? examples: questionnaire, survey b. Question specification: What questions to ask? In what order? c. Scale specification: How will preferences be rated? d. Sampling design specification – What is the total population? What sample size is necessary for this population? What sampling method to use?- examples: Probability Sampling: (cluster sampling, stratified sampling, simple random sampling, multistage sampling, systematic sampling) and Non- probability sampling: (Convenience Sampling, Judgment Sampling, Purposive Sampling, Quota Sampling, Snowball Sampling, etc.). e. Data Collection: Use mail, telephone, internet, mall intercepts. Make adjustments to the raw data so it is compatible with statistical techniques Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 239

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

and with the objectives of the research – examples: asg numbers, consistency

checks,

substitutions,

deletions,

weighting,

dummy

variables, scale transformations, scale standardization. c. Analysis: Statistical analysis – Perform various descriptive and inferential techniques on the raw data. Make inferences from the sample to the whole population. Test the results for statistical significance. a. Interpret and integrate findings – What do the results mean? What conclusions can be drawn? How do these findings relate to similar research? d. Report Writing & presentation- Report usually has headings such as: 1) xecutive summary; 2) objectives; 3) methodology; 4) main findings; 5) etailed charts and diagrams.

7.5 Experimental Methods One limitation of the survey method of quantitative marketing research is that the questions are limited to assessing consumer opinions and thoughts. In respect of behaviour, these survey methods can only measure what the respondents say they will do; not what they actually do. To avoid this problem experimental methods are used. An experiment is a method in which the researcher places respondents in a situation that does not normally occur and then observes and records their response. On important example of this method is Test Marketing. Test Marketing A test market, in the field of business and marketing, is a geographic region or demographic group used to gauge the viability of a product or service in


Page No. 240

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

the mass market prior to a wide scale roll-out. The criteria used to judge the acceptability of a test market region or group include: 1. A population that is demographically similar to the proposed target market; and 2. Relative isolation from densely populated media markets so that advertising to the test audience can be efficient and economical. The test market ideally aims to duplicate 'everything' - promotion and distribution as well as `product' - on a smaller scale. The technique replicates, typically in one area, what is planned to occur in a national launch; and the results are very carefully monitored, so that they can be extrapolated to projected national results. The `area' may be any one of the following: *

Television area

*

Test town

*

Residential neighborhood

*

Test site

A number of decisions have to be taken about any test market: * Which test market? * What is to be tested? * How long a test? * What success criteria? The simple go or no-go decision, together with the related reduction of risk, is normally the main justification for the expense of test markets. At the same time, however, such test markets can be used to test specific elements of a new product's marketing mix; possibly the version of the product itself, the promotional message and media budget, the distribution


Page No. 241

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

channels and the price. In this case, several `matched' test markets (usually small ones) may be used, each testing different marketing mixes. Clearly, all test markets provide additional information in advance of a launch and may ensure that launch is successful: it is reported that, even at such a late stage, half the products entering test markets do not justify a subsequent national launch. However, all test markets do suffer from a number of disadvantages: 1. Replicability - Even the largest test market is not totally representative of the national market, and the smaller ones may introduce gross distortions. Test market results therefore have to be treated with reservations, in exactly the same way as other market research. 2. Effectiveness - In many cases the major part of the investment has already been made (in development and in plant, for example) before the `product' is ready to be test marketed. Therefore, the reduction in risk may be minimal; and not worth the delays involved. 3. Competitor warning- All test markets give competitors advance warning of your intentions, and the time to react. They may even be able to go national with their own product before your own test is complete. They may also interfere with your test, by changing their promotional activities (usually by massively increasing them) to the extent that your results are meaningless. 4. Cost- Although, the main objective of test markets is to reduce the amount of investment put at risk, they may still involve significant costs. Simulation and Virtual Reality Techniques The considerable amounts of time and resources necessary to conduct test markets restrict the amount of test markets, which can be conducted by companies. The risk to reveal a new product design too early is another Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 242

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

concern for companies in fast moving and highly competitive markets, which is independent from any cost and time considerations. To overcome these limitations a new type of test markets, so called Virtual Test Markets, was devised. Virtual Test Markets are computer simulations of consumers, companies and the market environment. The technological basis for this kind of test market is a Multi-agent system as well as methods from Artificial Intelligence. In a Virtual Test Market, new products or marketing and distribution strategies can be tested without the risk and time constraints discussed above. Another advantage is the ability to test many different products in one Virtual Test Market, as the computer simulation can always be reset to the original situation before the introduction of a new product. Advanced computer technology including graphic ability is now available to simulate the entire procedure on computers. To do this the real world store environment is mimicked on the computer. For example, the computer can show store shelves with the test brand and other brands displayed exactly as they would be in the real store. The ments, aisle displays, shelf tags, store specials, point of purchase ads, manufacturer’s coupons, etc. are all displayed and made available on the computer. The consumer sits on the computer terminal and ‘goes’ on a weekly shopping trip. The computer automatically records his/her purchases.

7.6 Secondary Research Secondary research (also known as desk research) involves the summary, collation and/or synthesis of existing research rather than primary research, where data is collected from, for example, research subjects or experiments. A researcher’s first attempt should always be to study secondary data since they already exist & can save the expense of collecting primary data. However often the secondary data is outdated or the information sought by Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 243

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

the researcher may not exist. Then there is no other choice but to go for primary research. There are two types of secondary data: a. Public sources & b. Proprietary sources. a. Public Sources: Secondary data from public sources are mostly government, semi government or industry associations. Some such sources in India are Census of India; National Readership surveys (NRS), National Council of Applied Economic Research (NCAER), Bombay Stock Exchange Directory, and Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy (CMIE), etc. b. Proprietary Data: Private business firms for their own use normally collect such data, or they could be firms who are in the business of collecting and marketing such information. Some such sources are Thompson Urban and Rural Indices, Kothari’s Industrial Directory, etc.

7.7 Managerial application of consumer research in marketing There are a number of applications of consumer research & some of them are discussed in the following paragraphs: Attitude Research: A person’s evaluations of an object, such as brand or service can be measured, by various types of scales. a. Semantic Differential Scale: In this method, the respondent is asked to rate the object in of pairs of traits – for example- like/dislike, agree/disagree, poor/excellent, effective/ineffective, etc. b.

Likert Scale:

In this method the respondent is asked to giving a

numerical rating to the extent to which they agree or disagree with a statement. For example, the respondent ‘s response is requested by circling the appropriate number from the options as under: Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 244

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

1. Strongly agree, 2. Agree, 3. Undecided, 4. Disagree and 5. Strongly disagree c. Pictorial scale: Pictorial scales are used for less literate respondents or respondents who speak a different language. Pictures of various facial expressions can also be used when the research purpose is to measure the emotions the respondent experiences. They can also be useful for researching children as customers. Image/Self-concept Measurement Consumers’ own self image and also their image of specific brands and services can be measured by using semantic differential scale likemodern/traditional, economic/uneconomic, pleasant/unpleasant, feminine/ masculine, etc. The researchers present a series of statements about possible activities, interests, opinions, etc. and the respondents indicate their agreements or disagreements with these statements. Some of the examples of such psychographics, which are measured are- ‘child-oriented’, ‘optimist’, ‘price conscious’, ‘fashion conscious’, etc. Multi-attribute Attitude model A consumer’s attitude towards a brand or service can be a result of his/her beliefs about a set of attributes or characteristics of the brand. Each attribute may have different weightage for the consumer. Hence consumer’s perceptions or beliefs about the attributes of the product are measured first and then the importance assigned by the consumer for these attributes are measured. Then the weighted average is calculated for each of the attribute which will give the multiattribute attitude of the person. Perceptual or preference mapping: Perceptual mapping is a graphics technique used by marketers that attempts to visually display the perceptions of customers or potential Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 245

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

customers. Typically the position of a product, product line, brand, or company is displayed relative to their competition. Perceptual maps can have any number of dimensions but the most common has two dimensions. Any more is a challenge to draw and confusing to interpret. The perceptual map below shows consumer perceptions of various automobiles on the two dimensions of sportyness/conservative and classy/affordable. This sample of consumers felt Porsche was the sportiest and classiest of the cars in the study (top right corner). They felt Plymouth was most practical and conservative (bottom left corner).

The consumer sees cars that are positioned close to each other as similar on the relevant dimensions. For example consumers see Buick, Chrysler, and Oldsmobile as similar. They are close competitors and form a competitive grouping. A company considering the introduction of a new model will look for an area on the map free from competitors. Some perceptual maps use different size circles to indicate the sales volume or market share of the various competing products.


Page No. 246

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Eye Movement A number of methods are available for conducting research by quietly observing the consumers as to what information they are acquiring and evaluating. An eye camera is a devise to capture the pupil movement as the consumer looks through a piece of information. This method can be used to study consumer’s information acquisition while reading or viewing an ment, looking at aisle displays, examining the package information in a supermarket, etc. The researcher uses the data gathered by the eye camera to identify the information at which the consumer gazed the longest. Such studies help the researcher to pinpoint the selective appeal and use of information by the consumer. Galvanic Skin Response Galvanic skin response (GSR), also known as electro dermal response (EDR) is a method of measuring the electrical resistance of the skin. There has been a long history of electro dermal activity research, most of it dealing with spontaneous fluctuations. There is a relationship between sympathetic activity and emotional arousal, although one cannot identify the specific emotion being elicited. The GSR is highly sensitive to emotions in some people. Fear, anger, startle response, orienting response and sexual feelings are all among the emotions, which may produce similar GSR responses. This concept is used to indicate the consumer’s response to a stimulus, such as an item of ment (like price) or an emotional story line of an ment. Electroencephalography Electroencephalography is the neurophysiologic measurement of the electrical activity of the brain by recording from electrodes placed on the scalp or, in special cases, subdurally or in the cerebral cortex. The resulting traces are known as an electroencephalogram (EEG) and represent a Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 247

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

summation of post-synaptic potentials from a large number of neurons. These are sometimes called brainwaves, though this use is discouraged, because the brain does not broadcast electrical waves. The EEG is a brain activity test. One of the activities measured in this way is called Alpha activity. Alpha activity inversely measures the brain’s attentiveness. Alpha activity is high when we are sleeping, resting or inactive. This will be low when we are paying attention to a commercial. When measured while viewing different ads, they will indicate the ad’s ability to attract and hold viewer’s attention. Self-Assessment Questions II State whether the following statements are true or false: 1. Qualitative Research method typically involves the construction of questionnaires and scales. 2. A test market is a geographic region or demographic group used to gauge the viability of a product or service in the mass market prior to a wide scale roll-out. 3. Virtual Test Markets are computer simulations of consumers, companies and the market environment. 4. Primary research (also known as desk research) involves the summary, collation and/or synthesis of existing research. 5. Perceptual mapping is a graphics technique used by marketers that attempts to visually display the perceptions of customers or potential customers.

7.8 Summary In this unit we learnt about different types of consumer research like Primary

Research,

Experimental

Qualitative

Research

Methods

Research, and

Quantitative

Secondary

Research,

Research.

Under

Qualitative research we covered Focus Groups, Customer Visits, Motivation Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 248

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

Research and Interpretative Research. Under Experimental Methods we studied Test Marketing, Simulation and Virtual Reality Techniques. We also understood the various Managerial applications of consumer research in marketing. We also learnt various types of Attitude Research like Image/Self-concept Measurement, Multiattribute Attitude model, Perceptual or preference mapping and also the usage of latest technologies like recording

of

Eye

Movement,

Galvanic

Skin

Response

&

Electroencephalography in such research.

7.9 Terminal Questions 1. What are Focus Groups? Describe any three types of focus groups. 2. List jand explain four types of Motivation Research. 3. Describe five Steps involved in Quantitative Research. 4. Explain the meaning & uses of Test Marketing & explain how it is conducted. 5. Explain how Perceptual Mapping is done with a schematic diagram.

7.10


SAQ I 1. Primary 2. why and how 3. focus 4. Thematic Apperception 5. Interpretative SAQ II 1. False 2. True Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 249

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 7

3. True 4. False 5. True TQS 1. Refer Section 7.3 2. Refer Section 7.3 3. Refer Section 7.4 4. Refer Section 7.5 5. Refer Section 7.7


Page No. 250

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

Unit 8

Diffusion of Innovation

Structure 8.1


8.2

Concept of Diffusion

8.3

Process of Adoption Self Assessment Questions I

8.4

Opinion Leadership

8.5

Market Mavens

8.6

Consumer Innovator

8.7

Managerial applications Self Assessment Questions II

8.8

Summary

8.9

Terminal Questions

8.10 Answers to SAQs And TQs

8.1 Introduction Diffusion is the process by which the acceptance of an innovation (a new product, new service, new idea, or new practice) is spread by communication (mass media, sales people, informal conversations) to of a social system (the target customers) over a period of time. Consumer behaviour towards new products or innovative products etc. is related to the process of diffusion. Different parameters which influence diffusion is discussed in this chapter. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Know the meaning and definition of innovation and diffusion.



Understand the process of adoption.


Page No. 251

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8



Explain the characteristics of consumer innovator.



Know the managerial applications of these concepts.

8.2 Concept of Diffusion Diffusion is the movement of particles of a substance from an area of high concentration to an area of low concentration, resulting in the uniform distribution of the substance. In the marketing context, this refers to the process by which innovations spread i.e. how they are assimilated by the market. The definition of diffusion includes four basic elements of the diffusion process: 1. The innovation,

2. The channels of Communication,

3. The social

System and 4. Time. The Innovation: When studying the diffusion of innovations it is important to understand that you are not just looking at the spread of an innovation through a society but rather the spread of different kinds of innovations through a society. An innovation is an item, thought, or process that is new to a certain area but not necessarily to the world. The term innovation may refer to both radical and incremental changes to products, processes or services. The often unspoken goal of innovation is to solve a problem. Innovation is an important topic in the study of economics, business, technology, sociology, and engineering. Since innovation is also considered a major driver of the economy, the factors that lead to innovation are also considered to be critical to policy makers. In the organisational context, innovation may be linked to performance and growth through improvements in efficiency, productivity, quality, competitive positioning, market share, etc. All organisations can innovate, including for example hospitals, universities, and local governments. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 252

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

While innovation typically adds value, innovation may also have a negative or destructive effect as new developments clear away or change old organisational forms and practices. Organisations that do not innovate effectively may be destroyed by those that do. Hence innovation typically involves risk. A key challenge in innovation is maintaining a balance between process and product innovations, where process innovations tend to involve a business model, which may develop shareholder satisfaction through improved efficiencies, while product innovations develop customer however at the risk of costly R&D that can erode shareholder returns. Innovations can be classified in four ways depending on the orientation. a. Company Oriented: This approach treats the newness from the perspective of the manufacturer. When the product is “new” to the company, it is considered new although it may not be new in the marketplace. This approach is not useful when we want to understand the consumer acceptance of a new product. b. Product Oriented: This approach focuses on the features inherent in the product and on the effect these features have on consumers’ established consumption patterns. Depending on the extent to which a new product is likely to disrupt the established consumption patterns, this is further classified into three categories: i. Continuous Innovation: This type of innovation is a simple changing or improving of an already existing product where the adopter still uses the product in the same fashion as they had before. An example of a continuous innovation is now seen in the automobile industry as it continues to change and develop. This involves modifications in the existing product rather than a totally new product. This has the least disruptive influence on established


Page No. 253

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

practices of the consumer. Examples are that of “improved Surf Excel”, “New Taste maker in Maggi Noodles” etc. ii. Dynamically Continuous Innovation: Here the innovation can either be a creation of a new product or a radical change to an existing one. Here the consumption patterns of people are altered some. An example of this type of innovation would be compact discs. This may involve the creation of a new product or a modification of the existing product which does not alter the established consumption patterns. This somewhat more disruptive than a continuous innovation. Some examples are that of “Maruti 800 with MPFI engine”, Camcorders with DVD recording”, etc. iii. Discontinuous Innovation: This is a totally new product in the market. This is the big idea innovation. In this situation, because the product has never been seen before, there are total changes to consumers buying and using patterns. This requires consumers to adopt to

totally new

consumption patterns.

Examples are-

locomotives, airplanes, radios, TVs, automobiles, home computers, internet, etc. c. Market Oriented: In this approach the newness of the product is judged in of how much exposure the consumers have to the new product. There are two definitions of a new product in this approach: d. If the product has been purchased by a relatively small percentage of the potential target consumers, it is considered as a new product. e. A product is considered new if it has been in the market for a relatively short period of time. Both these definitions are quite subjective since the researcher has to establish the degree of sales penetration or how long is considered as short time for the purpose of considering the product as new.


Page No. 254

Consumer Behaviour

f.

Unit 8

Consumer Oriented: Some researchers favour this approach wherein any product which is judged by the consumer as new is considered “new”. In other words the newness of the product is based on the consumer’s perception of the product rather than the physical features or the market penetration.

Characteristics of Innovations There are five different characteristics of innovations. Each characteristic affect the rate of adoption of an innovation differently. Like a lot of things in life, the innovation does not have to be better or easier to use than the product it is competing with but only be perceived to be better or easier to use by the consumer. This idea of perception is stronger than information is seen throughout the advertising world. All products that are new do not have equal potential for consumer acceptance. Some products are accepted almost immediately whereas some products take a long time before they are accepted. If the marketers can anticipate the reasons for this and also if they can anticipate how consumers will react to their new products, their uncertainties will be reduced. For example if the marketer knows in advance that certain features of the product are likely to inhibit its usage, some strategy to compensate for this can be designed. Market Researchers have identified five product characteristics, which seem to influence consumer acceptance of new products as below. 1. Relative advantage, 2.Compatibility, 3. Complexity, 4. Divisibility and 5. Communicability/Observability.  Relative Advantage: This characteristic expresses to what extent the new product is better than the one it is replacing. Of course, the first thought would be greater profit potential. Although profit does fit into the equation, relative advantage can be judged on other factors like ease of use and storage as well as uncontrollable factors like war. During


Page No. 255

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

wartime when workers are gone fighting industries find relative advantage in innovations that do not require as many laborers to run.  Compatibility: No matter how superior or efficient an innovation is it will not be successful if it does not take into consideration local values and customs of the adopters. Compatibility is the level of which an innovation fits into the specific society. The smoother the innovation fits into the culture, the faster the rate of adoption. The diffusion of certain types of birth control pills in certain areas is unattainable due to religious beliefs and cultural values. The perception of the consumers in feeling that the new product does really take care of their present needs, values and practices is a measure of its compatibility. For example it is difficult to imagine men using hair removers used by women for removing their facial hair although this may solve the problem of shaving everyday since it is incompatible with most men’s current values.  Complexity: This type of innovation is the extent of how difficult it is for an adopter to understand and use an innovation. It is very logical to think that the harder an innovation is to use, or at least perceived to use, the less likely that an adopter would be to consume it. A contemporary example would be the Internet. Although the Internet is easy to use, for someone who has never been on a computer it is extremely intimidating. The degree to which a new product is difficult to understand or use affects the product acceptance. On the contrary if it is easier to understand the use of product easily, it is more likely to be accepted faster. The recent example is the fast popularity and acceptance of Ipod, which has easy usage features and which are consumer friendly. Four

predominant

types

of

“technological

fear”

(also

called

‘technophobia’) act as barriers to new product acceptance: 1. Fear of technical complexity, 2. fear of rapid obsolescence, 3. fear of social rejection and 4. fear of physical harm. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 256

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

 Divisibility/Trialability: This refers to the degree to which a new product is capable of being tried on a limited basis. The greater the opportunity to try the new product easier it is for the consumers to evaluate & then adopt it. Marketers, who are aware of this, provide either free samples or free limited period trial offer with a guarantee to take back if the consumer is not satisfied. Being able to try out a product before purchase helps increase the rate of adoption drastically.  Communicability/Observability: This is the ease with which a product’s benefits can be observed, imagined or described to potential consumers. Products which are highly visible like fashion garments are more easily diffused than the products which are used in private. A tangible product is easier to promote than an intangible product. When an innovation’s benefit does not directly or immediately solve or fix a consumers problem or need it will not diffuse through a society as quickly compared to an innovation that is more of solution to a problem. A fictional example that helps understand this principle would be a new drug on the market that you would take everyday to ward off headaches before they come. Although the drug may work, because the results do not fit into our first problem then solution ideal, it would take more time for it to be adopted. It is important to note that these five characteristics are not the only ones that affect the rate of adoption. Also the adoption of an innovation is not always a positive occurrence. Over-adoption, where adopters act irrationally without all the information or without full comprehension of an innovation can actually be harmful to the diffusion process. Some new products are almost instant successes, whereas some others have to really struggle to get accepted by the consumers. To understand the reasons for this, marketers look at the product characteristics as described above. The extent of consumer resistance is found to increase when the Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 257

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

perceived relative advantage, compatibility, trialability and observability are low and the perceived complexity is high. The channels of Communication The communications between the marketer and the consumer and also the communication among consumers are important determinants in the speed with which the innovation spreads through the market. Both impersonal sources like advertising and press coverage and interpersonal sources like sales people and opinion leaders are important in this regard. Increasingly new sources like the internet are becoming powerful information channels for new products. Product comparison sites like Mouthshut.com in India are also helping the internet savvy consumers in arriving at quick decisions on new innovations. It was first thought that, the communication process of the diffusion of innovations was only a one-step process, from the mass media channels to the individual with little or no interaction between the individuals. This obviously is not the case. Not only do individuals communicate with each other, some individuals along their influence as well as their knowledge to other individuals. Opinion leaders are individuals in a social system that others come to for information and guidance. With the understanding of opinion leaders in society it is clear to see that the original one-step process invalid. Now the process takes us through mass media channels to opinion leaders then to the individuals. This two-step flow of communication is probably not complete as well, but the important idea to arrive at is that no matter how many steps are involved there will always be a two-step exchange of knowledge/influence at any given step during the diffusion process. With the addition of steps to the communication process, the idea of personal influence comes into play. Personal influence refers to any Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 258

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

communication between two individuals where one individual creates a change in consumer behavior in the other. A more practical way of stating personal influence is peer pressure. Looking at the three different types of selectivity shows why personal influence can be a stronger factor in the diffusion process than mass media. a. Selective exposure – the idea, that an individual will be more susceptible to channels of communication, that already agree with their current attitudes and feelings. b. Selective perception – the idea, that an individual will view new ideas in relation to their old ones. c. Selective retention – the idea, that an individual will mainly a new idea, if directly relates to their-own situation or remedy a specific problem. The Social System A social system is a physical, social or cultural environment to which people belong and within which they function. For the purpose of consumer behaviour we can define this as market segment or target market of the innovation. For example, for a new drug for cancer, the community of cancer specialists will be the social system. The diffusion of the new product is normally examined within the boundary of the social system. The orientation of the social system with its own special values and norms will have significant influence on the acceptance or rejection of the innovation. When the social system is modern in orientation the innovation is likely to be accepted quickly. If the social system is traditional, innovations which are perceived as radical, are likely to be rejected. Social systems can be split into two categories of norms: traditional and modern. According to researchers, traditional norms are characterized by:


Page No. 259

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

1) A less developed or complex technology 2) Low levels of literacy and education 3) Little communication between the social system and outsiders 4) Lack of economic rationality 5) One-dimensional in adapting and viewing others Modern norms are characterized by: 1) A developed technology with complex jobs 2) Strong importance placed on education 3) Acceptance of free thought and new ideas 4) Strong preparation and high importance on economic considerations 5) Ability to see and understand other peoples situations Not only do modern systems accept and adapt to innovation faster and easier than traditional system but the individual is more likely to be innovative in thinking and doing in a modern society. Time for Diffusion: Time is the main constituent of the diffusion process. This affects diffusion in three distinct but interrelated ways: a. The amount of purchase time, b. The identification of adopter categories, and c. The rate of adoption. a. The amount of purchase time: This is the amount of time that elapses between consumer’s initial awareness of the new product & the point at which he/she purchase or reject it. This is important because the average time the consumer takes to adopt a new product will be the precursor to the overall length of time it will take for widespread adoption. For example if the individual purchase time is short, then the rate of diffusion will be faster. b. Adopter Categories: This involves a classification that indicates where a consumer is situated in comparison with other consumers in of Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 260

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

time. The process of adoption over time is typically illustrated as a classical normal distribution or "bell curve." Everett Rogers (1931) achieved academic fame for his Diffusion of innovations theory. He proposed that adopters of any new innovation or idea could be categorized as innovators (2.5%), early adopters (13.5%), early majority (34%), late majority (34%) and laggards (16%), based on Bell curve mathematic division. These categories, based on standard deviations from the mean of the normal curve, provided a common language for innovation researchers. Each adopter's willingness and ability to adopt an innovation would depend on their awareness, interest, evaluation, trial, and adoption. People could fall into different categories for different innovations.

The model indicates that the first group of people to use a new product is called "innovators," followed by "early adopters." Next come the early and late majority, and the last group to eventually adopt a product are called "laggards”.  Innovators: venturesome, educated, multiple info sources; Very eager to try new ideas, more cosmopolitan social relationships, Communicate with other innovators.  Early adopters: social leaders, popular, educated; More integrated into the local social system, the persons to check with before adopting a new idea, greatest number of opinion leaders, role models. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 261

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

 Early majority: deliberate, many informal social s; adopt new ideas just prior to the average time, seldom hold leadership positions, think for sometime before adopting.  Late majority: skeptical, traditional, lower socio-economic status; adopt new ideas just after the average time, adopting may be due to economic necessity or due to peer pressures. Innovations approached cautiously.  Laggards: neighbours and friends are main info sources, fear of debt; the last people to adopt the innovation, most ‘localite’ in outlook, oriented to the past, suspicious of the new. c. Rate of Adoption: This is concerned with how long it takes a new product or service to be adopted by of a social system, i.e. how quickly it takes a new product to be accepted by those who will ultimately adopt it. The diffusion of new products worldwide is becoming more rapid now, compared to earlier decades. The time taken to reach the same level of penetration for different products have been coming down rapidly. For example, radio took 38 years, telephone-25 years, cable television-10 years and now internet has taken less than 5 years to reach the same level of penetration. Marketers would like to gain acceptance of their new products as quickly as possible. They desire a rapid rate of product adoption to penetrate the market and quickly establish market leadership before competitors start responding. A penetration policy is usually accompanied by a relatively low introductory price designed to discourage the competition from entering the market. Under certain circumstances, marketers may prefer to avoid rapid adoption. For example, marketers who wish to use a high pricing strategy which will enable them to recover their product development costs quickly, may follow Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 262

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

what is known as skimming policy. They first make the product available at very high price to select consumers who are willing to pay and then gradually lower the price in several steps to attract additional market segments at each price reduction.

8.3 Process of Adoption The second major process in the diffusion of innovation is adoption. The stages through which a consumer es while arriving at a decision -to try or not to try, or to continue using or discontinue using a new product- is called “Adoption process”. There are five stages in arriving at a decision to purchase or reject a new product. 1. Awareness, 2. Interest, 3. Evaluation, 4. Trial and 5. Adoption (or Rejection) 1. Awareness: The consumer is first exposed to the new product. At this stage the innovation is introduced to the person but there is no true knowledge of the product. Because of this lack of information the person does not feel the need to run out and find out more information, much less consider consuming it. The awareness stage merely sets the groundwork for the following stages. It is argued that a person often stumbles upon the innovation on accident during the awareness stage it will provide little incentive to get more information. Others feel that for a person to become aware, the innovation must fill a particular need in their life for them to notice. 2. Interest: The consumer is interested in the product & starts searching for additional information. At this stage, the person decides to invest time and energy into finding out more about the innovation. At this point the person feels good about the innovation but does not really know how


Page No. 263

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

or if it can be useful in his/her own life. The interest stage is purely to gather knowledge, not to decide whether to adopt. 3. Evaluation: Consumer decides whether or not to believe that this product or service will satisfy his/her need. At this stage, the person firsts begins to make a decision about the innovation. How could I use it? Do I really need it? Would it be to my advantage if I had it? These are all question the consumers ask themselves during the evaluation stage. Then if the innovation appears to be positive for their life they will try it out. If the innovation has a negative connotation to the individual they may seek the advice and knowledge of their peers. 4. Trial: Consumer uses the product on a limited basis. This is the next stage called the trial stage. Here the individual physically gives the innovation a chance by trying it out for a limited basis. What they are looking to find out during this trial stage is how the innovation can fit into their needs and desires. Research proves that most people will not adopt an innovation without personally testing it first to see if it really “works”. 5. Adoption/Rejection: If trial is favourable, the consumer decides to use the product on a full scale basis; if unfavourable, the consumer decides to reject. This final stage is the adoption stage. Here the individual uses information that they have gathered in the interest and evaluation stages and with the outcome of the trial stage decides to adopt the innovation. At this point in the adoption process the individual not only adopts the innovation but embraces it for the future. There is, however, another possible stage to adoption process. After the individual adopts the innovation they may decide to reject it for whatever reason. This decision to reject the innovation after agreeing to adopt it is called discontinuance.


Page No. 264

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

This is a very simplistic model, as there could be several other steps involved in this process. In many cases the post adoption or post purchase evaluation can lead to a strengthened commitment, or to a decision to discontinue use. The adoption of some products may have very little effect on the behavioural and lifestyle changes of consumers. Some innovations may lead to major changes in these spheres. Examples of innovations which had major impact on society include the automobile, locomotive, telephone, refrigerator, television, airplane, personal computer, etc. Self Assessment Questions I 1. In the marketing context, __________ refers to the process by which innovations spread i.e. how they are assimilated by the market. 2. An __________ is an item, thought, or process that is new to a certain area but not necessarily to the world. 3. ___________ Innovation is a simple changing or improving of an already existing product where the adopter still uses the product in the same fashion as they had before. 4. Divisibility or _________ refers to the degree to which a new product is capable of being tried on a limited basis. 5. The amount of _________ time is the amount of time that elapses between consumer’s initial awareness of the new product & the point at which he/she purchase or reject it. 6. Adopters of any new innovation or idea could be categorized as innovators (2.5%), early adopters (13.5%), early majority (34%), late majority (34%) and __________ (16%). 7. The stages through which a consumer es while arriving at a decision -to try or not to try, or to continue using or discontinue using a new product- is called “___________ process”.


Page No. 265

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

8.4 Opinion Leadership Opinion Leadership is a concept that arose out of the theory of two-step flow of communication propounded by Paul Lazarsfeld and Elihu Katz. This theory is one of several models that try to explain the diffusion of innovations, ideas, or commercial products. The opinion leader is the agent who is an active media and who interprets the meaning of media messages or content for lower-end media s. Typically the opinion leader is held in high esteem by those that accept their opinions. Opinion leadership tends to be subject specific, that is, a person that is an opinion leader in one field may be a follower in another field. An example of an opinion leader in the field of computer technology might be a neighbourhood computer service technician. The technician has access to far more information on this topic than the average consumer and has the requisite background to understand the information. Another example of Key Opinion Leaders (KOLS) is that of physicians, who influence their peers' medical practice, including but not limited to prescribing behavior. Pharmaceutical companies generally engage key opinion leaders early in the drug development process to provide advocacy activity and key marketing . Key opinion leaders generally belong to specific area of expertise, such as oncology, cardiology, diabetes, or sometimes do specialized in very niche therapeutic areas such as Colorectal Cancer, Non small Cell Lung Cancer, etc. Some KOLs also belong to istration, the FDA or government labs. Pharmaceutical companies engage KOLs in publications, conducting of clinical trials, or conducting marketing research through online s.

8.5 Market Mavens A maven is a trusted expert in a particular field, who seeks to his or her knowledge on to others. The role of mavens in propagating knowledge and Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 266

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

preferences has been established in various domains. Market Mavens have been defined as individuals, who have information about many kinds of products, places to shop and other facets of markets and initiate discussions with consumers and respond to requests from consumers for market information. Market mavens are different from opinion leaders in that, the opinion leaders’ expertise and influence is limited to a specific product category or related products. In comparison, market mavens are knowledgeable about the marketplace in general – about what new products are available, what price deals are being offered where, where can you find specific products with such price deals, etc. To fulfill this self assumed role, market mavens attend to diverse sources of market information, windowshop more, enjoy shopping, frequently engage in market related conversations with others.

8.6 Consumer Innovator These are the relatively small groups of consumers who are the earliest purchasers of a new product. As already discussed in the bell curve model of

Everett

Rogers,

2.5%

of

the

social

systems

are

innovators.

Innovativeness has been defined in different ways by different researchers. Some researchers define innovators as those who purchase the new product within the period in which the new product is considered ‘new’. For example, some products may be considered new for a period of 3 months after it is introduced in the market & the innovators in this case are those who purchase the product within these three months. Other researchers have defined them in of their innovativeness, i.e. their purchase of a minimum number of new products from a select group of new products. Non innovators have been defined as those who purchase none or very few of the new products which are available.


Page No. 267

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

In any case the consumer innovator is very important for the marketers for the success of their innovations. The characteristics of such innovators are very important for marketers. Some of these characteristics are discussed in the following paragraphs: 

Interest in the Product category The consumer innovators are much more interested in the product category in which the innovation is introduced, than the later adopters or non-adopters. For example early adopters in non fat cooking oil are those who have a high interest in such a product because they are health and diet conscious. Such consumers are also more likely to search for information from many sources and are also likely to involve in more deliberations in purchasing these products. Sometimes it may not be true that the innovators of new products are heavy s of that product category. For example, the professional photographers are found to shun the automatic digital cameras and prefer the cameras with manual controls.



Innovators as Opinion Leaders There is a strong tendency of consumer opinion leaders to be innovators. The consumer innovators provide other consumers with information and advice about new products and such consumers, who receive such advice, follow this advice. Thus in the role of an opinion leader the consumer innovator often influences the acceptance or rejection of new products. When innovators are enthusiastic about the new products and advise others to try such products, the product is likely to receive broader and quicker response. When such innovators are dissatisfied with a new product, the acceptance of the product may get severely affected and may even lead to total failure. Because motivated consumer innovators can influence the rate of acceptance or rejection of a new product, they influence its eventual success or failure.


Page No. 268

Consumer Behaviour



Unit 8

Personality Traits Consumer innovators are found to be less dogmatic than non innovators. They tend to approach the new products with considerable openness and little anxiety. In contrast the non-innovators are found to fear new products and they prefer to delay purchase till the success of the product is clearly established. The consumer innovator is also found to have a need for uniqueness. Marketers try to appeal to this need for uniqueness to gain rapid acceptance of a new product. Consumer innovators are also found to differ in their social character. These are inner-directed i.e. they rely on their own values or standards when making a decision about a new product. In contrast they noninnovators are other-directed, i.e. they look for guidance from others on how to respond to a new product rather than trusting their own personal values or standards. There is also a link between optimum stimulation level & consumer innovativeness. Individuals who seek high stimulation level i.e. those who seek a lifestyle rich with novel. Complex, unusual experiences are more willing to risk trying new products. Consumers who are variety seeking tend to be brand switchers and also purchasers of innovative products and services. They are also open minded, extroverts, low in authoritarianism and creative.



Perceived Risk This is the degree of uncertainty or fear about the consequences of purchase that a consumer feels when considering the purchase of a new product. Consumers who perceive little or no risk in the purchase of a new product are much more likely to make innovative purchases than consumers who perceive a great deal of risk. In other words, consumer


Page No. 269

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

innovators normally don’t perceive high risk in their purchase decisions of new products. 

Purchase and consumption characteristics Consumer innovators have purchase and consumption traits which are distinctly different from those of non innovators. For example, consumer innovators are fewer brands loyal; they are more prone to brand switching. They are also more attracted by special promotional offers and deals like free coupons, samples, etc. They are also likely to be heavy s of the product category in which they innovate. A positive relationship exists between innovative behavior and heavy usage. Hence consumer innovators form an important segment not only for starting the usage of the product but also substantial s after adopting the new product. However one should also they are more prone to switching brands and also get attracted by new promotional schemes and hence they will stick to this brand only till they find a new and potentially better alternative.



Media Habits Innovators have somewhat greater total exposure to magazines than non innovators, particularly special interest magazines devoted to the product category in which they innovate. Consumer innovators are also less likely to watch television than non innovators. This view has been consistently ed by several researches. It has been proven that consumer innovators have higher than average magazine exposure and lower than average TV exposure.



Social Characteristics Consumer innovators are more socially accepted and socially involved than non-innovators. They also belong to more social groups and organisations than non-innovators. This greater social acceptance and


Page No. 270

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

involvement of consumer innovators helps explain why they function as effective opinion leaders. 

Demographic Characteristics Research suggests that consumer innovators tend to be younger than either late adopters or non-innovators. Consumer innovators have more formal education, have higher personal or family incomes and are more likely to have high occupational status. In other words, consumer innovators tend to be more upscale than the other consumer segments and can therefore better afford the risk of making a mistake should the innovative new product proves to be unacceptable.



Consumer innovators are product specific Consumer innovators in one product category are unlikely to be consumer innovators of other product categories. The overlap of innovativeness over product categories exists to limited extent to those categories which are closely related to the same interest area. Research also suggests that consumers who innovate within a specific product category will innovate again within the same product category. For the marketer such a pattern suggests that it is a good marketing strategy to target a new product to consumers who were the first to try other products in the same basic category.



Change Leaders and Technophiles In the area of high tech innovations, there will be generalized high tech innovators and these are called “Change Leaders”. Such individuals tend to embrace and popularize many of the innovations that are ultimately accepted by the mainstream population. They tend to have a wide range of personal and professional s representing different occupational and social groups.


Page No. 271

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

Change leaders also appear to fall into one of the two distinct groups: 1. A younger group that can be characterized as being simulation seeking, sociable and having high levels of fashion awareness or 2. A middle aged group that is highly self confident and have very high information seeking needs. Similar to change leaders, “Technophiles” are individuals who purchase technologically advanced products soon after they are introduced in the market. Such individuals tend to be technically curious people. Such consumers are typically younger, better educated and more affluent.

8.7 Managerial applications New product marketers are vitally concerned with identifying the consumer innovators so that, they may direct their promotional campaigns to these consumers, who are most likely to try their new products, adopt them and influence others. Consumer research has identified a number of consumer characteristics like product interest, opinion leadership, personality factors, purchase and consumption traits, media habits, social characteristics, demographic characteristics, etc. which distinguish the consumer innovators from others. These have already been discussed in detail. These serve as useful indicators for marketers for segmenting their markets specifically for new product introductions. Diffusion research has focused on five elements: 1) The characteristics of an innovation which may influence its adoption; 2) The decision-making process that occurs when individuals consider adopting a new idea, product or practice; 3) The characteristics of individuals that make them likely to adopt an innovation;


Page No. 272

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

4) The consequences for individuals and society of adopting an innovation; and 5) Communication channels used in the adoption process. When looking at the diffusion process it is hard not to see the importance to the advertising world. Learning the process an individual as well as a society goes through before they will accept an innovation is vital to the success of any company that plans to be on the frontier of innovation. Just coming up with the idea first only gets you a part of the way there. You must realize and be catalysts for its diffusion into society. Self Assessment Questions II State whether the following statements are true or false: 1. Consumer Innovation is a concept that arose out of the theory of twostep flow of communication propounded by Paul Lazarsfeld and Elihu Katz. 2. Market Mavens have been defined as individuals who have information about many kinds of products, places to shop and other facets of markets and initiate discussions with consumers and respond to requests from consumers for market information. 3. Innovators have been defined as those who purchase none or very few of the new products which are available. 4. There is a strong tendency of consumer opinion leaders to be innovators. 5. Consumers who perceive little or no risk in the purchase of a new product are much more likely to make innovative purchases than consumers who perceive a great deal of risk. 6. Consumer innovators in one product category are likely to be consumer innovators of other product categories.


Page No. 273

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

7. “Technophiles” are individuals who purchase technologically advanced products soon after they are introduced in the market.

8.8 Summary In this unit, we have studied the concept of Diffusion of Innovation and its managerial applications. First we dealt with the meaning of Diffusion and Innovation. Later we dealt with the channels of Communication, The Social System and Time for Diffusion. We also learnt how the Process of Adoption takes place starting from Awareness, Interest, Evaluation, Trial and finally Adoption/Rejection. We then studied the meanings of Opinion Leadership, Market Mavens and Consumer Innovators. We also touched upon the factors influencing Innovators like Interest in the Product category, Innovators as Opinion Leaders, Personality Traits, Perceived Risk, Purchase

and

consumption

characteristics,

Media

Habits,

Social

Characteristics, Demographic Characteristics, Consumer innovators being product specific and finally Change Leaders and Technophiles. We also studied the Managerial applications of the concept of diffusion of innovation.

8.9 Terminal Questions 1) List the four classifications of Innovation depending on the orientation and describe briefly each one of them. 2) Explain briefly the five steps involved in the process of adoption. 3) Describe some of the characteristics of an Opinion Leader. 4) Explain at least 5 characteristics of a Consumer Innovator. 5) Describe some of the applications of the concept of Diffusion of Innovation in Marketing.


Page No. 274

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 8

8.10 Answers to SAQs & TQs SAQ I 1. Diffusion 2. innovation 3. Continuous 4. Trialability 5. purchase 6. laggards 7. Adoption SAQII 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. True 6. False 7. True TQS 1. Refer Section 8.2 2. Refer Section 8.3 3. Refer Section 8.4 4. Refer Section 8.5 5. Refer Section 8.7


Page No. 275

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

Unit 9

Consumerism and Marketing Ethics

Structure 9.1


9.2

Consumerism In India

9.3

Conspicuous Consumption

9.4

Anti-Consumerism

9.5

Consumer safety and Consumer Protection

9.6

Environmental concerns and green movement

9.7

Green Marketing

9.8

Organic Foods

9.9

Consumer privacy Self-Assessment Questions I

9.10

Business and Marketing Ethics

9.11

Corporate Social Responsibility Self-Assessment Questions II

9.12

Summary

9.13

Terminal Questions

9.14


9.1 Introduction Consumerism is the equating of personal happiness with the purchasing of material possessions and consumption. It is often associated with criticisms of consumption starting with Karl Marx and many others. Although consumerism is commonly associated with the Western world, it is multicultural and non-geographical, as seen today in Japan, Singapore, Indonesia, Hong Kong, China, Taiwan, Israel, Bahrain, India, Dubai, etc. Consumerism, as in people purchasing goods or consuming materials in Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 276

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

excess of their basic needs, is as old as the first civilizations (like Ancient Egypt, Babylon and Ancient Rome). Since consumerism began, various individuals and groups have consciously sought an alternative lifestyle through simple living. While consumerism is not a new phenomenon, it has only become widespread over the 20th century and particularly in recent decades, under the influence of capitalism. In many critical contexts, consumerism is used to describe the tendency of people to identify strongly with products or services they consume, especially those with commercial brand names and obvious statusenhancing appeal, e.g. an expensive automobile, expensive jewelry. A culture that is permeated by consumerism can be referred to as a consumer culture. Impulse buyers who cannot resist spending money are commonly termed shopaholics. Opponents of consumerism argue that many luxuries and unnecessary consumer products are social signals that allow people to identify likeminded individuals through consumption and display of similar products. Some believe that relationships with a product or brand name are substitutes for the healthy human relationships lacking in dysfunctional modern societies and along with consumerism itself are part of the general process of social control and cultural hegemony in modern society. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

know the meaning and definition of Consumerism, Consumer safety and Consumer Protection



understand about environment safety, green movement and green marketing



explain the linkage between Marketing Concepts and Marketing Ethics


Page No. 277

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

9.2 Consumerism In India "Consumerism" is likely to dominate the Indian market in the current Millennium, thanks to the economic reforms ushered in and the several agreements signed under the World Trade Organisation. The transition is from a predominantly "sellers market" to a "buyers market" where the choice exercised by the consumer will be influenced by the level of consumer awareness achieved. By "consumerism" we mean the process of realizing the rights of the consumer as envisaged in the Consumer Protection Act (1986) and ensuring right standards for the goods and services for which one makes a payment. This objective can be achieved in a reasonable time frame only when all concerned act together and play their role. The players are the consumers represented by different voluntary non-government consumer organisations, the government, the regulatory authorities for goods and services in a competitive economy, the consumer courts, organisations representing trade, industry and service providers, the lawmakers and those in charge of implementation of the laws and rules.

9.3 Conspicuous Consumption Conspicuous consumption is a term used to describe the lavish spending on goods and services that are acquired mainly for the purpose of displaying income or wealth. In the mind of a conspicuous consumer, such display serves as a means of attaining or maintaining social status. A very similar but more colloquial term is "keeping up with the Joneses". With significant improvement of living standards and the emergence of the middle class in the 20th century, the term conspicuous consumption is now broadly applied to individuals and households with expendable incomes whose consumption patterns are prompted by status seeking rather than their substantial needs and are thereby socially wasteful.


Page No. 278

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

9.4 Anti-Consumerism Anti-consumerism is the rejection of consumerism. It is similar but not identical to anti-corporate activism. Consumerism is a term used to describe the effects of the market economy on the individual. "Consumer" has come to be a derogatory term within selling companies and debt-management consultants. It implies the mindless purchasing and disposing of any product delivered through the market. Concern over the treatment of consumers has spawned much activism, as well as the incorporation of consumer education into school curricula. Anti-consumerist activism often has parallels with environmental activism and anti-globalization, and sometimes animal-rights activism, in their condemnation of the practices of modern organizations such as the McDonald's Corporation. Opposition to economic materialism primarily comes from two sources: religion and social activism. Religions oppose materialism, some stating that it interferes with connection with the divine, or that it leads to an immoral lifestyle. Various notable individuals have claimed that spiritual inspiration led them to a simple living lifestyle, such as Mahatma Gandhi and Jesus of Nazareth. Social activists have linked forms of materialism with wars, crimes, and general social malaise.

9.5 Consumer safety and Consumer Protection Consumer protection is a form of government regulation, which protects the interests of consumers. For example, a government may require businesses to disclose detailed information about products—particularly in areas where safety or public health is an issue, such as food, electrical goods, Children's toys, etc. Consumer protection is linked to the idea of consumer rights (that consumers have various rights as consumers), and to the formation of


Page No. 279

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

consumer organizations, which help consumers make better choices in the marketplace. Consumer protection law or consumer law is considered an area of public law that regulates private law relationships between individual consumers and the businesses that sell those goods and services. Consumer protection covers a wide range of topics including but not necessarily limited to product liability, privacy rights, business Cartels and other unfair business practices, fraud, misrepresentation, and other consumer/business interactions. a. Consumer Protection Act in India The issues relating to consumer welfare affects the entire 11 billion people since everyone is a consumer in one way or the other. Ensuring consumer welfare is the responsibility of the government. Accepting this, policies have been framed and the Consumer Protection Act, 1986, was introduced. A separate Department of Consumer Affairs was also created in the Central and State Governments to exclusively focus on ensuring the rights of consumers as enshrined in the Act. This Act has been regarded as the most progressive, comprehensive and unique piece of legislation. In the last international conference on consumer protection held in Malaysia in 1997, the Indian Consumer Protection Act was described as one "which has set in motion a revolution in the fields of consumer rights, the parallel of which has not been seen anywhere else in the world." The special feature of this Act is to provide speedy and inexpensive redressal to the grievance of the consumer and provide him relief of a specific nature and award compensation wherever appropriate. The aim of the Act is also to ensure the rights of the consumer, viz. the right of choice, safety, information, redressal, public hearing and consumer education. The Act defines the consumer as one who purchases goods and services for his/her use. The of such goods and service with the permission of Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 280

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

the buyer is also a consumer. However, a person is not a consumer if he purchases goods and services for resale purpose. The most important feature of the Act is the provision for setting up three-tier quasi-judicial machinery popularly known as "consumer courts" at national, state and district levels. The apex court, National Commission functions in Delhi. Every State Government has a State Commission. The third tier is in each district and is called district forum.

9.6 Environmental concerns and green movement The environmental movement (a term that sometimes includes the conservation and green movements) is a diverse scientific, social, and political movement for addressing the concerns of environmentalism. In general , environmentalists advocate the sustainable management of resources and stewardship of the natural environment through changes in public policy and individual Behaviour. In its recognition of humanity as a participant in (not enemy of) ecosystems, the movement is centered on ecology, health, and human rights. The environmental movement is represented by a range of organizations, from the large to grassroots. Due to its large hip, varying and strong beliefs, and occasionally speculative nature, the environmental movement is not always united in its goals. At its broadest, the movement includes private citizens, professionals, religious devotees, politicians, and extremists. Environmentalists are also often linked with other social movements, such as human and animal rights and pacifism. Today, the sciences of ecology and environmental science, rather than any aesthetic goals, provide the basis of unity to most serious environmentalists. As more information is gathered in scientific fields, more scientific issues like biodiversity, as opposed to mere aesthetics, are a concern. Conservation Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 281

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

biology is rapidly developing field. Environmentalism now has proponents in business: new ventures such as those to reuse and recycle technical equipment are becoming more and more popular. Computer liquidators are just one example. In recent years, the environmental movement has increasingly focused on global warming as a top issue. As concerns about climate change moved more into the mainstream, from the connections drawn between global warming and Hurricane Katrina to Al Gore's film An Inconvenient Truth, many environmental groups refocused their efforts. In the United States, 2007 witnessed the largest grassroots environmental demonstration in years, Step It Up 2007, with rallies in over 1,400 communities and all 50 states for real global warming solutions. The Green movement is a political movement which advocates goals common to Green parties, including environmentalism, sustainability, nonviolence, and social justice concerns. ers of the Green movement, called Greens, adhere to Green ideology and share many ideas with the ecology, conservation, environmental, feminist, and peace movements. The political term Green, as an adjective, was first applied to ers of the nascent Green ideology in the late 1970s, as the first local Green parties were founded in various countries. The term political ecology is sometimes used in Europe and in academic circles.

9.7 Green Marketing Green marketing is the marketing of products that are presumed to be environmentally safe. Thus green marketing incorporates a broad range of activities, including product modification, changes to the production process, packaging changes, as well as modifying advertising. Yet defining green


Page No. 282

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

marketing is not a simple task. Other similar used are Environmental Marketing and Ecological Marketing. The term green marketing came into prominence in the late 1980s and early 1990s. The American Marketing Association (AMA) held the first workshop on "Ecological Marketing" in 1975. The proceedings of this workshop resulted in one of the first books on green marketing entitled "Ecological Marketing". From an organizational standpoint, environmental considerations should be integrated into all aspects of marketing — new product development and communications and all points in between. The holistic nature of green also suggests that besides suppliers and retailers new stakeholders be enlisted, including educators, of the community, regulators, and NGOs. Environmental issues should be balanced with primary customer needs. One of green marketing's challenges is the lack of standards or public consensus about what constitutes "green". In essence, there is no definition of "how good is good enough" when it comes to a product or company making green marketing claims. This lack of consensus -- by consumers, marketers, activists, regulators, and influential -- has slowed the growth of green products, because companies are often reluctant to promote their green attributes, and consumers are often skeptical about claims. Despite these challenges, green marketing has continued to gain adherents, particularly in light of growing global concern about climate change. This concern has led more companies to their commitment to reducing their climate impacts, and the effect this is having on their products and services.


Page No. 283

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

9.8 Organic Foods Organic foods are produced according to certain production standards. For crops, it means they were grown without the use of conventional pesticides, artificial fertilizers, human waste, or sewage sludge and that they were processed without ionizing radiation or food additives. For animals, it means they were reared without the routine use of antibiotics and without the use of growth hormones. In most countries, organic produce must not be genetically modified. Increasingly, organic food production is legally regulated. Currently, the United States, the European Union, Japan and many other countries require producers to obtain organic certification in order to market food as organic. Historically, organic farms have been relatively small family-run farms which is why, organic food was once only available in small stores or farmers' markets. Now, organic foods are becoming much more widely available. Organic food sales within the United States have grown by 17 to 20 percent a year for the past few years while sales of conventional food have grown at only about 2 to 3 percent a year. This large growth is predicted to continue, and many companies are jumping into the market.

9.9 Consumer privacy Consumer privacy laws and regulations seek to protect any individual from loss of privacy due to failures or limitations of corporate customer privacy measures. They recognize that the damage done by privacy loss is typically not measurable, nor can it be undone, and that commercial organizations have little or no interest in taking unprofitable measures to drastically increase privacy of customers - indeed, their motivation is very often quite the opposite, to share data for commercial advantage, and to fail to officially


Page No. 284

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

recognize it as sensitive, so as to avoid legal liability for lapses of security that may occur.  Consumer privacy concerns This issue date back to the first commercial couriers and bankers, who in every culture took strong measures to protect customer privacy, but also in every culture tended to be subject to very harsh punitive measures for failures to keep a customer's information private. The Hippocratic Oath includes a requirement for doctors to avoid mentioning ills of patients to others, not only to protect them, but to protect their families - the same basic idea as modern consumer privacy law and regulation, which recognizes that innocent third parties can be harmed by the loss of control of sensitive information, and that therefore there is a responsibility beyond that to the 'customer' or 'client'. Today the ethical codes of most professions very clearly specify privacy measures beyond that for the 'consumer' of an arbitrary service.  Consumer privacy measures These measures are those taken by commercial organizations to ensure that confidential customer data is not stolen or abused. Since most such organizations have a strong competitive incentive to retain an exclusive access to these data, and since customer trust is usually a high priority, most companies take some security engineering measures to protect customer privacy. Since they operate for-profit, commercial organizations also cannot spend an unlimited amount on precautions and remain competitive - a commercial context tends to limit privacy measures, and to motivate organizations to share data when working in partnership. This has led to many moral hazards and outrageous customer privacy violation incidents, and has led to consumer privacy laws in most countries. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 285

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

Some services, notably telecommunications including Internet, imply collecting a vast array of information er's activities in the course of things, and may also require consultation of these data to prepare bills. Telecom data must be kept for seven years in the US and Canada, to permit dispute and consultation about phone charges. Telecom regulation has always enforced a high level of confidentiality on these very sensitive customer communication bills and the underlying records. However, this approach has to a degree been outmoded as other industries also now gather sensitive data. Such

common

commercial

measures

as

software-based

customer

relationship management, rewards programs and target marketing tend to drastically increase the amount of information gathered (and sometimes shared). These very drastically increase privacy risks, and have accelerated the shift to regulation, rather than relying on corporate desire to preserve goodwill. Self Assessment Questions I 1. _________ , as in people purchasing goods or consuming materials in excess of their basic needs, is as old as the first civilizations. 2. Impulse buyers who cannot resist spending money are commonly termed ________. 3. _____________ _____________is a term used to describe the lavish spending on goods and services that are acquired mainly for the purpose of displaying income or wealth. 4. The special feature of the _______

__________Act is to provide

speedy and inexpensive redressal to the grievance of the consumer and provide him relief of a specific nature and award compensation wherever appropriate.


Page No. 286

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

5. The _____________________is a political movement which advocates goals

common

to

Green

parties,

including

environmentalism,

sustainability, nonviolence, and social justice concerns. 6. _____________________is

the

marketing

of

products

that

are

presumed to be environmentally safe. 7. __________ foods mean they were grown without the use of conventional pesticides, artificial fertilizers, human waste, or sewage sludge and that they were processed without ionizing radiation or food additives. 8. _______________________measures are those taken by commercial organizations to ensure that confidential customer data is not stolen or abused.

9.10

Business and Marketing Ethics

Business ethics is a form of the art of applied ethics that examines ethical principles and moral or ethical problems that can arise in a business environment. In the increasingly conscience-focused marketplaces of the 21st century, the demand for more ethical business processes and actions (known as ethicism) is increasing. Simultaneously, pressure is applied on industry to improve business ethics through new public initiatives and laws. Business ethics can be both a normative and a descriptive discipline. As a corporate practice and a career specialization, the field is primarily normative. In academia descriptive approaches are also taken. The range and quantity of business ethical issues reflects the degree to which business is perceived to be at odds with non-economic social values. Historically, interest in business ethics accelerated dramatically during the 1980s and 1990s, both within major corporations and within academia. For example, today most major corporate websites lay emphasis on commitment to Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 287

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

promoting non-economic social values under a variety of headings (e.g. ethics codes, social responsibility charters). In some cases, corporations have redefined their core values in the light of business ethical considerations (e.g. BP's "beyond petroleum" environmental tilt). Marketing ethics is the area of applied ethics which deals with the moral principles behind the operation and regulation of marketing. Some areas of marketing ethics (ethics of advertising and promotion) overlap with media ethics. Some of the specific issues in marketing ethics are discussed in the following paragraphs: Market research Ethical danger points in market research include: * Invasion of privacy: Invasion of privacy is a legal term essentially defined as a violation of the right to be left alone. The right to privacy is the right to control property against search and seizure, and to control information about oneself. The right to privacy refers to your right to be left alone. There are several different ways a person's right to privacy can be invaded. The most common privacy invasions recognized by law are as follows: 

Intrusion of solitude - physical or electronic intrusion into one's private quarters.



Public disclosure of private facts -- the dissemination of truthful private information which a reasonable person would find objectionable



False light - the publication of facts which place a person in a false light, even though the facts themselves may not be defamatory.



Appropriation -- the unauthorized use of a person's name or likeness to obtain some benefit.


Page No. 288

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

* Stereotyping: Stereotyping occurs because any analysis of real populations needs to make approximations and place individuals into groups. Stereotypes are seen by many as undesirable beliefs imposed to justify the acts of discrimination and oppression. Other effects are: justification of ill-founded prejudices or ignorance unwillingness to rethink one's attitudes and Behaviour towards stereotyped group There's usually more than one stereotype for the same group. For example, according to stereotypes about Black Americans, Black men are generally supposed to be good musicians and basketball players, but at the same time seen as aggressive, prone to lives of crime, and likely to be on drugs. The effects of stereotypes can have positive and negative effects: In some market research studies, students who were implicitly made aware of their gender behaved as the stereotype suggested. Asian-American women performed better in math tests when being aware of being Asian, and did worse when being reminded of being women. Stereotyping can also be created by the media, showing an incorrect judgment of a culture or place. Target Market Ethical danger points include: * Targeting the vulnerable (e.g. children, the elderly) and * Excluding potential customers from the market: Selective marketing is used to discourage demand from undesirable market sectors or disenfranchise them altogether. Examples of unethical market exclusion or selective marketing are past industry attitudes to the gay, ethnic minority and obese ("plus-size") Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 289

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

markets. Contrary to the popular myth that ethics and profits do not mix, the tapping of these markets has proved highly profitable. For example, 20% of US clothing sales are now plus-size. Another example is the selective marketing of health care, so that unprofitable sectors (i.e. the elderly) will not attempt to take benefits to which they are entitled. A further example of market exclusion is the pharmaceutical industry's exclusion of developing countries from AIDS drugs. In the case of children, the main products are unhealthy food, fashion ware and entertainment goods. Children are a lucrative market; but are not capable of resisting or understanding marketing tactics at younger ages. At older ages competitive feelings towards other children are stronger than financial sense. The practice of extending children's marketing from television to the school ground is also controversial. Other vulnerable audiences include emerging markets in developing countries, where the public may not be sufficiently aware of skilled marketing ploys transferred from developed countries, and where, conversely, marketers may not be aware how excessively powerful their tactics may be. For example Nestle infant milk formula scandal which discouraged breast feeding. C. Pricing practices Some of the unethical practices include 

Price fixing: The practice of two or more sellers agreeing on the price to charge for similar products or services. Price fixing is an agreement between business competitors to sell the same product or service at the same price. In general, it is an agreement intended to ultimately push the price of a product as high as possible, leading to profits for all the sellers. Price-fixing can also involve any agreement to fix, peg, discount or stabilize prices. The principal feature is any agreement on price,


Page No. 290

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

whether express or implied. Methods of price fixing can include selling at a common target price; setting a common "minimum" price; buying the product from a supplier at a specified "maximum" price; adhering to a price book or list price; engagement in cooperative price advertising; standardizing financial credit offered to purchasers; using uniform trade-in allowances; limiting discounts; discontinuing a free service or fixing the price of one component of an overall service; adhering uniformly to previously-announced prices and of sale; establishing uniform

costs

and

markups;

imposing

mandatory

surcharges;

purposefully reducing output or sales; or purposefully sharing or "pooling" markets, territories, or customers. 

Price skimming: The practice of ‘price skimming’ involves charging a relatively high price for a short time when a new, innovative, or muchimproved product is launched onto a market. The objective with skimming is to “skim” off customers who are willing to pay more to have the product sooner; prices are lowered later when demand from the “early adopters” falls. The success of a price-skimming strategy is largely dependent on the inelasticity of demand for the product either by the market as a whole, or by certain market segments. High prices can be enjoyed in the short term where demand is relatively inelastic. In the short term the supplier benefits from ‘monopoly profits’, but as profitability increases, competing suppliers are likely to be attracted to the market (depending on the barriers to entry in the market) and the price will fall as competition increases. The main objective of employing a price-skimming strategy is, therefore, to benefit from high short-term profits (due to the newness of the product) and from effective market segmentation.



Price discrimination: practice of selling a commodity at different prices to different buyers, even though sales costs are the same in all of the


Page No. 291

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

transactions. Discrimination among buyers may be based on personal characteristics such as income, race, or age or on geographic location. For price discrimination to succeed, other entrepreneurs must be unable to purchase goods at the lower price and resell them at a higher one. Legislation against price discrimination has usually sought to prevent its use by one seller to drive a competing seller out of business by underselling the competitor in his own market while selling at higher prices in other markets 

Variable pricing: Most firms use a fixed price policy. That is, they examine the situation, determine an appropriate price, and leave the price fixed at that amount until the situation changes, at which point they go through the process again. The alternative has been variable pricing, a form of first degree price discrimination, characterized by individual bargaining and negotiation, and typically used for highly differentiated high value items. Two variants of variable pricing are price shading (in which sales people are given the authority to vary the price by a certain amount or percentage), and auctions (in which potential buyers have the option of bidding on a product and thereby varying the price). Consumers generally prefer fixed prices because they don’t need to worry about being out-negotiated by a professional with expert knowledge and skills.



Predatory pricing: Predatory pricing (also known as destroyer pricing) is the practice of a firm selling a product at very low price with the intent of driving competitors out of the market, or create a barrier to entry into the market for potential new competitors. If the other firms cannot sustain equal or lower prices without losing money, they go out of business. The predatory pricer then has fewer competitors or even a monopoly, allowing it to raise prices above what the market would otherwise bear. Predatory pricing through sharp discounting is not


Page No. 292

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

beneficial to a business in the short run, as it may result in a price war and will cause loss of revenue and/or profits. Yet businesses may engage in predatory pricing because it may pay dividends in the long run. This is because competitors who are not as financially strong as the predator will suffer even more, either due to loss of business or reduced profit margin caused by the aggressive price competition. The predation continues until the competitor is driven to failure and forced to leave the market. After the weaker competition has been driven out, the surviving business can raise prices above competitive levels (to "supra competitive pricing"). The business hopes to thereby reap revenues and profits that will more than offset the losses during the predatory pricing period. 

Supra competitive pricing: Supra competitive pricing is pricing above what can be sustained in a competitive market. This may be indicative of a business that has a unique legal or competitive advantage, or possibly of anti-competitive Behaviour that has driven competition from the market. An example of a unique legal advantage would be a drug company that is the first to discover and successfully manufacture a medication to treat a certain disease. Initially, as the only market player, the drug company may be able to charge supra competitive prices until other companies catch up. In this case, the regulatory hurdle for drug approval may prove a substantial barrier to new competition. However, other companies may not be able to enter the market due to another barrier to entry, intellectual property (IP) rights. The drug company may have a patent on the new formulation, barring competitors until the patent expires unless they can license rights from the IP owner. An example of a competitive advantage may be a large company with a trusted brand name and a substantial marketing budget that simply overwhelms a local competitor by driving demand for its product over the


Page No. 293

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

competitor's product, at least in the short term. Supra competitive pricing may also result following a period of predatory pricing, which has potential antitrust implications for the predator. 

Price war: Price war is a term used in business to indicate a state of intense competitive rivalry accompanied by a multi-lateral series of price reductions. One competitor will lower its price, then others will lower their prices to match. If one of the reactors reduces their price below the original price cut, then a new round of reductions is initiated. In the short-term, price wars are good for consumers who are able to take advantage of lower prices. Typically they are not good for the companies involved. The lower prices reduce profit margins and can threaten survival. In the long term, they can be good for the dominant firms in the industry however. Typically the smaller more marginal firms will be unable to compete and will shut down. The remaining firms absorb the market share of the terminated ones. The real losers then, are the marginal firms and the people that invested in them. In the long-term, the consumer could lose also. With fewer firms in the industry, prices tend to increase, sometimes to a level higher than before the price war.



Bid rigging: Bid-rigging is an illegal agreement between two or more competitors. It is a form of collusion, which is illegal. It is a form of price fixing and market allocation, and involves an agreement in which one party of a group of bidders will be designated to win the bid. It is often practiced where contracts are determined by bid, for example with government construction contracts. There are some very common bidrigging practices:

o

Subcontract bid-rigging occurs where some of the conspirators agree not to submit bids, or to submit cover bids that are intended not to be successful, on the condition that some parts of the successful bidder's


Page No. 294

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

contract will be subcontracted to them. In this way, they "share the spoils" among themselves. o

Bid suppression occurs where some of the conspirators agree not to submit a bid so that another conspirator can successfully win the contract.

o

Complementary bidding, also known as cover bidding or courtesy bidding, occurs where some of the bidders bid an amount knowing that it is too high or contains conditions that they know to be unacceptable to the agency calling for the bids.

o

Bid rotation occurs where the bidders take turns being the designated successful bidder, for example, each conspirator is designated to be the successful bidder on certain contracts, with conspirators designated to win other contracts. This is a form of market allocation, where the conspirators allocate or apportion markets, products, customers or geographic territories among themselves; so that each will get a "fair share" of the total business, without having to truly compete with the others for that business.



Dumping (pricing policy): The practice of selling merchandise in foreign markets at lower prices than those charged in the domestic markets. In economics, "dumping" can refer to any kind of predatory pricing. However, the word is now generally used only in the context of international trade law, where dumping is defined as the act of a manufacturer in one country exporting a product to another country at a price which is either below the price it charges in its home market or is below its costs of production. A standard technical definition of dumping is the act of charging a lower price for a good in a foreign market than one charges for the same good in a domestic market. This is often referred to as selling at less than "fair value." Under the WTO Agreement, dumping is condemned (but is not prohibited) if it causes or


Page No. 295

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

threatens to cause material injury to a domestic industry in the importing country. D. Advertising and promotion a. Issues over truth and honesty: In the 1940's and 1950's, tobacco used to be d as promoting health. Today an r who fails to tell the truth not only offends against morality but also against the law. b.

Issues with violence, sex and profanity: Sexual innuendo is a mainstay of advertising content and yet is also regarded as a form of sexual harassment. Violence is an issue especially for children's advertising and advertising likely to be seen by children.

c.

Taste and controversy: The advertising of certain products may strongly offend some people while being in the interests of others. Examples include: feminine hygiene products, hemorrhoid and constipation medication. The advertising of condoms has become acceptable in the interests of AIDS-prevention, but are nevertheless seen by some as promoting promiscuity. Some companies have actually marketed themselves on the basis of controversial advertising - see Benetton. Sony has also frequently attracted criticism for unethical content (portrayals of Jesus which infuriated religious groups

d. Negative advertising techniques, such as attack ads. In negative advertising, the r highlights the disadvantages of competitor products rather than the advantages of their own. The methods are most familiar from the political sphere. e. Advertising Media: Direct marketing is the most controversial of advertising channels, particularly when approaches are unsolicited. TV commercials and direct mail are common examples. Electronic


Page No. 296

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

spam and telemarketing push the borders of ethics and legality more strongly. E. Marketing strategy The main theoretical issue here is the debate between free markets and regulated markets. In a truly free market, any participant can make or change the rules. However when new rules are invented which shift power too suddenly or too far, other participants may respond with accusations of unethical behaviour, rather than modifying their own behaviour to suit (which they might not be able to anyway). Most markets are not fully free: the real debate is as to the appropriate extent of regulation. Some of the unethical or controversial marketing strategies are as follows: 

Bait and switch In retail sales, a bait and switch is a form of fraud in which the fraudster lures in customers by advertising a product or service at an unprofitably low price, then reveals to potential customers that the d good is not available but that a substitute is. The goal of the bait-and-switch is to convince some buyers to purchase the substitute good as a means of avoiding disappointment over not getting the bait, or as a way to recover sunk costs expended to try to obtain the bait. It suggests that the seller will not show the original product or product d but instead will demonstrate a more expensive product. Other advertising practices, such as the use of sales techniques to steer customers away from lowprofit items, depend on many of the same psychological mechanisms as a bait and switch. In the United States, courts have held that the purveyor using a bait and switch operation may be subject to a lawsuit by customers for false advertising, and can be sued for trademark infringement by competing manufacturers, retailers, and others who profit from the sale of the product used as bait. However, no cause of


Page No. 297

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

action will exist if the purveyor is capable of actually selling the goods d, but aggressively pushes a competing product. Likewise, advertising a sale while intending to stock a limited amount of, and thereby sell out, the loss-leading item d is legal in the United States. The purveyor can escape liability if they make clear in their ments that quantities of items for which a sale is offered are limited. Unscrupulous estate agents commonly engage in bait and switch by continuing to attractive properties in their windows that they have already sold. 

Pyramid scheme A pyramid scheme is a non-sustainable business model that involves the exchange of money primarily for enrolling other people into the scheme, usually without any product or service being delivered. A pyramid scheme is a fraudulent investing plan that has unfortunately cost many people worldwide their hard-earned savings. The concept behind the pyramid scheme is simple and should be easy to identify; however, it is often presented to potential investors in a disguised or slightly altered form. For this reason, it is important to not only understand how pyramid schemes work, but also to be familiar with the many different shapes and sizes they can take. As its name indicates, the pyramid scheme is structured like a pyramid. It starts with one person - the initial recruiter - who is on top, at the apex of the pyramid. This person recruits a second person, who is required to "invest" Rs.100 which is paid to the initial recruiter. In order to make his or her money back, the new recruit must recruit more people under him or her, each of whom will also have to invest Rs.100. If the recruit gets 10 more people to invest, this person will make Rs.900 with just a Rs.100 investment. The 10 new people become recruiters and each one is in turn required to enlist an additional 10 people, resulting in a total of 100 more people.


Page No. 298

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

Each of those 100 new recruits is also obligated to pay Rs.100 to the person who recruited him or her; recruiters get a profit of all of the money received minus the initial Rs.100 paid to the person who recruited them. The process continues until the base of the pyramid is no longer strong enough to the upper structure (meaning there are no more recruits). 

Planned obsolescence Planned obsolescence (also built-in obsolescence) is the decision on the part of a manufacturer to produce a consumer product that will become obsolete and/or non-functional in a defined time frame. Planned obsolescence has potential benefits for a producer in that it means a consumer cannot just purchase a product once that will last indefinitely the life of the product's usefulness or functionality is fixed, so that at some point the consumer must purchase again, whether returning to the original manufacturer for a newer model, or buying from the competition. It also has potential benefits for consumers, because they are not forced to spend extra for an over-engineered product, thus becoming unable to afford

a

more

technologically

advanced

product,

with

greater

functionality, in the future. For an industry, it stimulates demand in the marketplace by ensuring a customer must come back into a buying mode sooner than had the product been built to last longer or indefinitely. It exists in many different products from vehicles to light bulbs, from buildings to software. There is, however, the potential backlash of consumers that become aware of such obsolescence; such consumers can shed their loyalty and buy from a company that caters to their desire for a more durable product.


Page No. 299

Consumer Behaviour



Unit 9

Vendor lock-in In economics, vendor lock-in, also known as proprietary lock-in, customer lock-in, lock-in is where a customer is dependent on a vendor for products and services and cannot move to another vendor without substantial switching costs, real and/or perceived. Frequently, the term connotes some level of intention on the vendor's part to create a lock-in situation, but often a client may be said to be "locked in" in situations that arose unintentionally. The razor and blades business model involves products which regularly consume some material, part, or supply. In this system, a reusable or durable product is inexpensive, and the company draws its profits from the sale of consumable parts that the product uses. To ensure the original company alone receives the profits from the sales of consumable, they use a proprietary approach to exclude other companies. Inkjet computer printers are a common example of this model. While the consumer is forced to purchase their consumables from a single source, this is often not considered lock-in because the cost to change, especially in the razor and consumer printer examples, is limited to the inexpensive non-consumable plus any unused, proprietary consumables remaining at the time of change. The extra costs to the customer create a situation which favors the vendor at the expense of the consumer. A monopoly may result when lock-in costs create market barriers to entry. Lock-in may eventually also be damaging to the company or industry in question. One way to create artificial lock-in for items without it is to create loyalty schemes. Examples include frequent flyer miles or points systems associated with credit card offers that can be used only with the original company, creating a perceived loss or cost when switching to a competitor. Vendor lock-in is rampant in the computer and electronics industries. In the computer industry, both hardware and


Page No. 300

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

software, vendor lock-in can be used to describe situations in which there is a lack of compatibility or interoperability between equivalent components. This can make it difficult to switch systems at many levels; the application program, the file format, the operating system, or various pieces of computer hardware ranging from a video card to a whole computer or even an entire network of computers. Note that in many cases, there are no technical standards that would allow creation of interoperable systems. At nearly any level of systems architecture, lockin may occur. This creates a situation where lock-in is often used as leverage to get market share, often leading to monopolies and antitrust actions. 

Viral marketing Viral marketing and viral advertising refer to marketing techniques that use pre-existing social networks to produce increases in brand awareness, through self-replicating viral processes, analogous to the spread of pathological and computer viruses. It can be word-of-mouth delivered or enhanced by the network effects of the Internet. Viral marketing is a marketing phenomenon that facilitates and encourages people to along a marketing message voluntarily. Viral promotions may take the form of funny video clips, interactive Flash games, advergames, images, or even text messages. It is claimed that a satisfied customer tells an average of three people about a product or service he/she likes, and eleven people about a product or service which he/she did not like. Viral marketing is based on this natural human behaviour. The goal of marketers interested in creating successful viral marketing programs is to identify individuals with high Social Networking Potential and create Viral Messages that appeal to this segment of the population and have a high probability of being ed along.


Page No. 301

Consumer Behaviour



Unit 9

Guerilla marketing: Guerrilla marketing is an unconventional way of performing promotional activities on a very low budget. Such promotions are sometimes designed so that the target audience is left unaware they have been marketed to and may therefore be a form of undercover marketing (also called stealth marketing). The ethics of guerrilla marketing have often been called into question due to an alleged deceptive, misleading, or subtle nature of the campaigns. It is up to the guerrilla marketer to be creative and devise unconventional methods of promotion. The marketer must use all of his or her s, both professional and personal, and must examine his company and its products, looking for sources of publicity. Many forms of publicity can be very inexpensive, others are free. It is argued that when implementing guerrilla marketing tactics, small size is an advantage. Small businesses, according to this argument, are able to obtain publicity more easily than large companies; they are closer to their customers and considerably more agile.



Anti-competitive practices: Anti-competitive practices are business or government practices that prevent and/or reduce competition in a market. Anti-competitive practices can include:

o

Dumping, where products are sold into a market at a low price which renders competition impossible, in order to wipe out competitors.

o

Exclusive dealing, where a retailer or wholesaler is ‘tied’ to purchase from a supplier.

o

Barriers to entry (to an industry) designed to avoid the competition that new entrants would bring.

o

Price fixing, where companies collude to set prices, effectively dismantling the free market.

o

Refusal to deal, e.g., two companies agree not to use a certain vendor


Page No. 302

Consumer Behaviour

o

Unit 9

Dividing territories, e.g., you get everything North of India, we take everything South.

o

Limit Pricing, where the price is set by a monopolist to discourage economic entry into a market.

o

Product tying, where products that aren't naturally related must be bought together; this prevents consumer choice.

o

Resale price maintenance, where resellers are not allowed to set prices independently.

o

Coercive monopoly - all potential competition is barred from entering the market

o

Absorption of a competitor or competing technology, where the powerful firm effectively co-opts or swallows its competitor rather than see it either compete directly or be absorbed by another firm.

o

Subsidies from government which allow a firm to function without being profitable, giving them an advantage over competition or effectively barring competition

o

Regulations which place costly restrictions on firms that less wealthy firms cannot afford to implement

o

Protectionism, Tariffs and Quotas which give firms insulation from competitive forces

F. Controversial Internet marketing strategies: * Search engine optimization: Search engine optimization (SEO) is the process of improving the volume and quality of traffic to a web site from search engines via "natural" search results. Usually, the earlier a site is presented in the search results or the higher it "ranks", the more searchers will visit that site. SEO can also target different kinds of search, including image search, local search, and industry-specific vertical search engines. As a marketing strategy for increasing a site's relevance, SEO considers how search algorithms work and what people search for. SEO efforts may Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 303

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

involve a site's coding, presentation, and structure, as well as fixing problems that could prevent search engine indexing programs from fully spidering a site. Other, more noticeable efforts may include adding unique content to a site, ensuring that content is easily indexed by search engine robots, and making the site more appealing to s. * Spamdexing: Spamdexing is any of various methods to manipulate the relevancy or prominence of resources indexed by a search engine, usually in a manner inconsistent with the purpose of the indexing system. It is a form of search engine optimization. Search engines use a variety of algorithms to determine relevancy ranking. Some of these include determining whether the search term appears in the META keywords tag, others whether the search term appears in the body text or URL of a web page. Many search engines check for instances of spamdexing and will remove suspect pages from their indexes. The rise of spamdexing in the mid-1990s made the leading search engines of the time less useful, and the success of Google at both producing better search results and combating keyword spamming, through its reputation-based Page Rank link analysis system, helped it become the dominant search site late in the decade, where it remains. Although it has not been rendered useless by spamdexing, Google has not been immune to more sophisticated methods either. The problem arises when site operators load their Web pages with hundreds of extraneous so search engines will list them among legitimate addresses. The process is called "spamdexing," a combination of spamming — the Internet term for sending s unsolicited information — and "indexing." *Embrace, extend and extinguish: "Embrace, extend and extinguish," also known as "Embrace, extend, and exterminate," is a phrase that the U.S. Department of Justice alleged was used internally by Microsoft to describe their strategy for entering product categories involving widely used Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 304

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

standards, extending those standards with proprietary capabilities, and then using those differences to disadvantage its competitors. The more widely used variation, "embrace, extend and extinguish," was first introduced in the United States v. Microsoft antitrust trial when the vice president of Intel, Steven McGeady, testified that Microsoft vice president Paul Maritz used the phrase in a 1995 meeting with Intel to describe Microsoft's strategy toward Netscape, Java, and the Internet. In this context, the phrase means to highlight the final phase of Microsoft's strategy, which was to drive customers away from smaller competitors. * Spyware: Spyware is computer software that is installed surreptitiously on a personal computer to intercept or take partial control over the 's interaction with the computer, without the 's informed consent. While the term spyware suggests software that secretly monitors the 's behaviour, the functions of spyware extend well beyond simple monitoring. Spyware programs can collect various types of personal information, but can also interfere with control of the computer in other ways, such as installing additional software, redirecting Web browser activity, or diverting advertising revenue to a third party. In an attempt to increase the understanding of spyware, a more formal classification of its included software types is captured under the term privacy-invasive software. In response to the emergence of spyware, a small industry has sprung up dealing in antispyware software. Running anti-spyware software has become a widely recognized element of computer security best practices for Microsoft Windows desktop computers. A number of jurisdictions have ed antispyware laws, which usually target any software that is surreptitiously installed to control a 's computer. *Adware: Adware or advertising-ed software is any software package which automatically plays, displays, or s advertising


Page No. 305

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

material to a computer after the software is installed on it or while the application is being used. Adware is software with advertising functions integrated into or bundled with a program. It is usually seen by the programmer as a way to recover programming development costs, and in some cases it may allow the program to be provided to the free of charge or at a reduced price. The advertising income may allow or motivate the programmer to continue to write, maintain and upgrade the software product. Some adware is also shareware, and so the word may be used as term of distinction to differentiate between types of shareware software. What differentiates adware from other shareware is that it is primarily advertising-ed. s may also be given the option to pay for a "ed" or "licensed" copy to do away with the ments There are concerns about adware because it often takes the form of spyware, in which information about the 's activity is tracked, reported, and often re-sold, often without the knowledge or consent of the . Of even greater concern is malware, which may interfere with the function of other software applications, in order to force s to visit a particular web site.

9.11

Corporate Social Responsibility

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is a concept which encourages organizations to consider the interests of society by taking responsibility for the impact of the organization's activities on customers, employees, shareholders, communities and the environment in all aspects of its operations. This obligation is seen to extend beyond the statutory obligation to comply with legislation and sees organizations voluntarily taking further steps to improve the quality of life for employees and their families as well as for the local community and society at large. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 306

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

A main approach for CSR is community-based development projects, such as the Infosys Foundation's involvement in community projects, Microsoft's involvement in Anti-AIDS campaign, etc. A more common approach of CSR is through the giving of aid to local organizations and impoverished communities in developing countries. Some organizations do not like this approach as it does not help build on the skills of the local people, whereas community-based development generally leads to more sustainable development. Self Assessment Questions II State whether the following statements are true or false: 1. Marketing ethics is the area of applied ethics which deals with the moral principles behind the operation and regulation of marketing. 2. Price skimming is an agreement between business competitors to sell the same product or service at the same price. 3. The practice of ‘price fixing’ involves charging a relatively high price for a short time when a new, innovative, or much-improved product is launched onto a market. 4. Predatory pricing (also known as destroyer pricing) is the practice of a firm selling a product at very low price with the intent of driving competitors out of the market, or create a barrier to entry into the market for potential new competitors. 5. In retail sales, a pyramid scheme is a form of fraud in which the fraudster lures in customers by advertising a product or service at an unprofitably low price then reveals to potential customers that the d good is not available but that a substitute is. 6. There are concerns about adware because it often takes the form of spyware, in which information about the 's activity is tracked, reported, and often re-sold, often without the knowledge or consent of the . Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 307

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

9.12 Summary In this unit we have covered the topic of Consumerism & Marketing Ethics with particular reference to Consumerism in India. We also understood the meaning & concept of Conspicuous Consumption, Anti-Consumerism, Consumer safety & Consumer Protection & Consumer Protection Act in India. We also studied the Environmental concerns and green movement, concept of Green Marketing & Organic Foods. The subject of Consumer privacy including Consumer privacy concerns & Consumer privacy measures have been discussed. We also touched upon Business & Marketing Ethics in various fields like Market research, Target Market, Pricing practices, Advertising and promotion, Marketing strategy & also Controversial Internet marketing strategies.

9.13

Terminal Questions

1. Explain briefly the concepts of Conspicuous Consumption & AntiConsumerism. 2. Describe the meaning of Green Marketing along with examples of organic foods. 3. Explain the differences between Price Fixing & Price Skimming. 4. What is the meaning of Vendor Lock In? Explain with examples. 5. Explain the differences between Spyware & Adware.

9.14 Answers to SAQs & TQs SAQI 1. Consumerism 2. shopaholics 3. Conspicuous consumption 4. Consumer Protection 5. Green movement Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 308

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 9

6. Green marketing 7. Organic 8. Consumer privacy SAQII 1. True 2. False 3. False 4. True 5. False 6. True TQ 1. Refer sections 9.3 & 9.4 2. Refer sections 9.7 & 9.8 3. Refer section 9.10 4. Refer section 9.10 5. Refer section 9.10


Page No. 309

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

Unit 10

Business Buyer Behaviour and Decisions

Structure 10.1

Introduction Objective

10.2

Nature of business buying behaviour

10.3

Business buying process

10.4

Buying Center Self Assessment Questions I

10.5

Different Types of Business buying

10.6

Factors influencing business buying Behaviour

10.7

Segmentation of business markets Self Assessment Questions II

10.8

Summary

10.9

Terminal Questions

10.10 Answers to SAQs and TQs

10.1

Introduction

The study of business buyer behaviour and decision making is important in analyzing market strategies adopted by different institutions. Thorough knowledge about definition and nature of business buying behaviour along with business market segmentation is required to understand consumer behaviour in totality. Objectives After studying this unit you should be able to: 

Know the nature and definition of Business Buying Behaviour and Buying Center.


Page No. 310

Consumer Behaviour



Understand different types of Business buying.



Explain the factors influencing Business Buying Behaviour.



Describe the segmentation of business markets.

Unit 10

10.2 Nature of business buying behaviour Business-to-business or “B2B” is a term commonly used to describe the transaction of goods or services between businesses, as opposed to that between businesses and other groups, such as transactions between business and individual consumers (B2C) or business to government organisations (B2G) transactions. B2B is typically performed in much higher volumes than (B2C) applications. B2B can also encom marketing activities between businesses, and not just the final transactions that result from marketing, though B2B can be used to identify sales transactions between businesses (also sometimes referred to as 'Institutional Sales'). For example, a company selling photocopiers would likely be a B2B sales organization, as opposed to a B2C sales organization. The term 'Business to Business' can also mean all transactions made in an industry value chain 'before' the finished product is sold to the end-consumer for final consumption. Purchasing refers to a business or organization attempting to acquire goods or services to accomplish the goals of the enterprise. Though there are several organizations that attempt to set standards in the purchasing process, processes can vary greatly between organizations. Typically the word “purchasing” is not used interchangeably with the word “procurement”, since procurement typically includes Expediting, Supplier Quality, and Traffic and Logistics in addition to Purchasing. Purchasing managers/directors and procurement managers/directors guide the organization’s acquisition procedures and standards. Most organizations Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 311

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

use a three-way check as the foundation of their purchasing programs. This involves three departments in the organization completing separate parts of the acquisition process. The three departments do not all report to the same senior manager to prevent unethical practices and lend credibility to the process. These departments can be purchasing, receiving; and s payable or engineering, purchasing and s payable; or a plant manager, purchasing and s payable. Combinations can vary significantly, but a purchasing department and s payable are usually two of the three departments involved. Historically, the purchasing department issued Purchase Orders for supplies, services, equipment, and raw materials. Then, in an effort to decrease the istrative costs associated with the repetitive ordering of basic consumable items, "Blanket" or "Master" Agreements were put into place. These types of agreements typically have a longer duration and increased scope to maximize the Quantities of Scale concept. When additional supplies are required, a simple release would be issued to the supplier to provide the goods or services. Purchasing managers realized once contracts for the low rupee value consumables are in place, procurement can take a smaller role in the operation and use of the contracts. There is still oversight in the forms of audits and monthly statement reviews, but most of their time is now available to negotiate major purchases and setting up of other long term contracts. These contracts are typically renewable annually.

10.3

Business buying process

Almost all buying decisions include factors like delivery and handling, marginal benefit, and price fluctuations.


Page No. 312

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

Buying process in modern businesses usually consists of seven steps: Information Gathering: If the potential customer does not already have an established relationship with sales/ marketing functions of suppliers of needed products and services, it is necessary to search for suppliers who can satisfy the requirements. Supplier : When one or more suitable suppliers have been identified, Requests for Quotation (RFQ), Requests for Proposals (RFP), Requests for Information (RFI) or Requests for Tender (RFT) may be d, or direct may be made with the suppliers. Background Review: References for product/service quality are consulted, and any requirements for follow-up services including installation, maintenance,

and

warranty

are

investigated.

Samples

of

the

products/services being considered may be examined or trials undertaken. Negotiation: Negotiations are undertaken, and price, availability, and customisation

possibilities

are

established.

Delivery

schedules

are

negotiated, and a contract to acquire the products/services is completed. Fulfillment: Supplier preparation, shipment, delivery, and payment for the products/services are completed, based on contract . Installation and training may also be included. Consumption, Maintenance and Disposal: During this phase the company evaluates the performance of the products/services and any accompanying service , as they are consumed. Renewal: When the products/services has been consumed and/or disposed of, the contract expires, or the product or service is to be re-ordered, company experience with the products/services is reviewed. If the products/services is to be re-ordered, the company determines whether to consider other suppliers or to continue with the same supplier. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 313

Consumer Behaviour

10.4

Unit 10

Buying Center

A buying center (also known as a decision-making unit) is a group of employees responsible for purchasing an item for the organization. In a business setting, major purchases typically require input from various parts of the organization, including finance, ing, purchasing, information technology management, and senior management. Highly technical purchases, such as information systems or production equipment, also require the expertise of technical specialists. In some cases the buying center is an informal ad hoc group, but in other cases, it is a formally sanctioned group with specific mandates, criteria, and procedures. The employees that constitute the buying center will vary depending on the item being purchased. In a generic sense, there are typically five roles within any buying center. They are: a) : These are normally the workers, technicians, engineers, chemists etc. on the shop floor or a laboratory of a business organisation. These could also be programmers in a software firm. These are the people who are the indenters of the goods & services required by them for uninterrupted production. b) Influencer: These could be normally located inside the organisation like senior management personnel in the same or different department or they could be outside experts like consultants. c) Decider: This is the person who takes the final decision to purchase. Depending on the organisational structure and the corporate policies and also depending on the criticality of the product or service, this could be the factory manager, purchase manager, or even the CEO. Higher the cost and the risk of purchase, higher will be the level at which the decision will be taken. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 314

Consumer Behaviour

d)

Unit 10

Buyer: This is the person who is involved in the actual buying function and he will have to ensure that there is no disruption in production due to procurement problems. Normally he will be in the purchase or materials department.

e)

Gatekeeper: He/she is a very important person who plays the critical role of flow of information in the organisation for any procurement decision. This could be a secretary or a clerk in purchase or s departments, or even the receptionist. The technical or economic factors may not be important to the gatekeeper. It is important for any sales person to identify the gatekeeper and understand their expectations to ensure that the sale is made.

Self Assessment Questions I 1. A __________ _________(also known as a decision making unit), is a group of employees responsible for purchasing an item for the organization. 2. __________ is the person who is involved in the actual buying function and he will have to ensure that there is no disruption in production due to procurement problems. 3. __________ is a very important person who plays the critical role of flow of information in the organisation for any procurement decision.

10.5

Different Types of Business buying

Depending on the type of buying organisation, the nature of material under procurement, corporate philosophy, etc. there is different types of business buying. Some of them are discussed below. Competitive tendering Business buying often involves competitive tendering. This is a process where a purchasing organisation undertakes to procure goods and services from suitable suppliers. Due to the high value of some purchases (for Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 315

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

example buying a new computer system, manufacturing machinery, or outsourcing a maintenance contract) and the complexity of such purchases, the purchasing organisation will seek to obtain a number of bids from competing suppliers and choose the best offering. An entire profession (strategic procurement) that includes tertiary training and qualifications has been built around the process of making important purchases. The key requirement in any competitive tender is to ensure the following: * The business case for the purchase has been completed and approved. * The purchasing organisation's objectives for the purchase are clearly defined. * The procurement process is agreed upon and it conforms to fiscal guidelines and organisational policies. * The selection criteria have been established. * A budget has been estimated and the financial resources are available. * A buying team (or committee) has been assembled. * A specification has been written. * A preliminary scan of the market place has determined that enough potential suppliers are available to make the process viable (this can sometimes be achieved using an expression of interest process). * It has been clearly established that a competitive tendering process is the best method for meeting the objectives of this purchasing project. If (for example) it was known that there was only one organisation capable of supplying; best to get on with talking to them and negotiating a contract.


Page No. 316

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

Non-tender purchasing All industrial sales need not involve competitive tendering. Tender processes are time consuming and expensive, particularly when executed with the aim of ensuring probity. Government agencies are particularly likely to utilize elaborate competitive tendering processes, due to the expectation that, they should be seen at all times to be responsibly and ably spending public monies. Private companies are able to avoid the complexity of a fully transparent tender process, but are still able to run the procurement process with some rigor. Reverse Auction A reverse auction (also called e-auction, sourcing event, and e-sourcing) is a tool used in industrial business-to-business procurement. It is a type of auction in which the role of the buyer and seller are reversed, with the primary objective to drive purchase prices downward. In an ordinary auction (also known as a forward auction), buyers compete to obtain a good or service. In a reverse auction, sellers compete to obtain business. In a typical auction, the seller puts an item up for sale. Multiple buyers bid for the item and depending on the nature of the auction, and one or more of the highest bidders buy the goods at a price determined at the conclusion of the bidding. In a reverse auction, a buyer contracts with a market maker to help make the necessary preparations to conduct the reverse auction. This includes: finding new suppliers, training new and incumbent suppliers, organizing the auction, managing the auction event, and providing auction data to buyers to facilitate decision making. The market maker, on behalf of the buyer, issues a request for quotation (RFQ) to purchase a particular item or group of items (called a "lot"). At the Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 317

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

designated day and time, several suppliers, log on to the auction site and will input several quotes over a 30-90 minute period. These quotes reflect the prices at which they are willing to supply the requested good or service. Quoting performed in real-time via the Internet results in dynamic bidding. This helps achieve rapid downward price pressure that is not normally attainable using traditional static 3-quote paper-based bidding processes. The prices that buyers obtain in the reverse auction reflect the narrow market, which it created at the moment in time when the auction is held. Thus, it is possible that better value - i.e. lower prices, as well as better quality, delivery performance, technical capabilities, etc. - could be obtained from suppliers not engaged in the bidding or by other means such as collaborative cost management and t process improvement. The buyer may award contracts to the supplier who bid the lowest price. Or, a buyer could award contracts to suppliers who bid higher prices, depending upon the buyer's specific needs with regards to quality, lead-time, capacity, or other value-adding capabilities. However, buyers frequently award contracts to incumbent (i.e. current) suppliers, even if prices are higher than the lowest bids, because the switching costs to move work to a new supplier are higher than the potential savings that can be realized. This outcome, while very attractive to buyers, is often strongly criticized by both new and incumbent suppliers. The use of Optimization software has become popular since about 2002, to help buyers determine which supplier to source the work to. It includes relevant buyer and seller business data, including constraints. Reverse auctions are used to fill both large and small value contracts for public and private commercial organizations. In addition to items traditionally thought of as commodities, reverse auctions are also used to source buyerSikkim Manipal University

Page No. 318

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

designed goods and services, and has even been used to source reverse auction providers. Purchasing Cards Another method of decreasing istrative costs associated with repetitive contracts for common material is the use of company credit cards, also known as "Purchasing Cards" or simply "P-Cards". P-card programs vary, but all of them have internal checks and audits to ensure appropriate use. Purchasing managers realized once contracts for the low dollar value consumables are in place, procurement can take a smaller role in the operation and use of the contracts. There is still oversight in the forms of audits and monthly statement reviews, but most of their time is now available to negotiate major purchases and setting up of other long term contracts. These contracts are typically renewable annually. Supply chain management (SCM) Supply chain management is the process of planning, implementing, and controlling the operations of the supply chain as efficiently as possible. Supply Chain Management spans all movement and storage of raw materials, work-in-process inventory, and finished goods from point-of-origin to point-of-consumption. Importantly, it also includes coordination and collaboration with channel partners, which can be suppliers, intermediaries and third-party service providers. In essence, Supply Chain Management integrates supply and demand management within and across companies. Supply chain management is a cross-functional approach to managing the movement of raw materials into an organization and the movement of finished goods out of the organization toward the end-consumer. As corporations strive to focus on core competencies and become more Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 319

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

flexible, they have reduced their ownership of raw materials sources and distribution channels. These functions are increasingly being outsourced to other corporations that can perform the activities better or more cost effectively. The effect has been to increase the number of companies involved in satisfying consumer demand, while reducing management control of daily logistics operations. Less control and more supply chain partners led to the creation of supply chain management concepts. The purpose of supply chain management is to improve trust and collaboration among supply chain partners, thus improving inventory visibility and improving inventory velocity.

10.6

Factors influencing business buying behaviour

There are many factors, which affect the business buying behaviour, which can be classified into two categories- situation specific & organisation specific. I.

Situation Specific Factors

There are three factors under this category: a. Buyclass There are three buy classes: new task purchase, modified rebuy, and straight rebuy. A new task purchase is a problem or requirement that has not arisen before such that the buying center does not have any relevant experience with the product or service. A modified rebuy is a situation such that the buying center has some relevant experience to draw upon. The alternatives considered, however, are different, or changed from the ones considered the last time a similar problem arose. A straight rebuy is the purchase of standard parts; maintenance, repair, and operating items and supplies; or any recurring need that is handled on a routine basis.


Page No. 320

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

The concept of buyclass is important because the purchase process is different among these three classes. b. Perceived risk, Importance and Complexity: Perceived Risk refers to the expected probability that the purchase may not produce a satisfactory outcome. This is due to two factors: 1. The degree of uncertainty that the choice mat be wrong.

2. The amount at stake in case

the choice happens to be wrong. The new tasks have the highest uncertainty and the straight rebuy the lowest. The amount at stake can be the financial loss or the performance loss in case of wrong decision. Financial loss depends on the purchase price and performance loss pertains to the product not performing to standards. The importance of purchase is a combination of the amount at stake and the extent to which the product plays a strategic role in the organisation. Higher the amount at stake and more strategic the product’s role- the more important is the purchase. Complexity refers to the extensiveness of the effort required to understand and manage the product during its acquisition. This has two dimensions: 1. The number of performance specifications and 2. The technical and the specialist knowledge required understanding these specifications. The above three factors, viz. perceived risk, importance and complexity influence how extensive and involved the purchase decision process will be. c. Time Pressure Customers behave differently when they are under time pressure. This refers to how urgently the item is needed. When the item is needed urgently,


Page No. 321

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

the purchase decision will tend to short circuit the usual process, make the process less deliberative and give more direct role to the . II. Organisation Specific Factors There are four organisational factors, which affect buying behaviour: 1. Size, 2. Structure, 3. Purchase resources and 4. Purchase orientation. a. Size: The size of the organisation not only determines the customer’s potential purchase volume but also the sophistication of the buying process. Small business organisations and entrepreneurial firms behave more like a family usually consisting of one person and large organisations have larger buying groups or buying centers and more formalized procedures. b. Structure: This refers to the number of departmental units and geographical locations over which the units are spread out and also its degree of centralization. If the organisation has more number of departments it will have larger buying group/centre, & the buying process is likely to be prolonged. c. Purchase Resources: This refers to the availability of professional buyers and the extent to which the purchase office is staffed with the required type and number of experts as well as equipment. Generally large and professionally managed firms will have better resourced purchase departments leading to well evaluated decisions and also formal and rigorous vendor evaluation. d. Purchase Orientation: This refers to the philosophy of purchase, i.e. which can vary from ‘purchasing simply as an istrative function for organising materials needed at most economical rates’, to ‘viewing it as


Page No. 322

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

a strategic managerial function whose goal is to add value to the organisation’s ability, to offer better value to its customers’. As a strategic function purchasing involves several key activities: 

Evaluating make versus buy decisions. This questions the very need to buy something or make it in house – either the whole product or an intermediate product.



Continuously finding better products materials and technology.



Developing long term sources of supply and building relationships with the suppliers.

10.7

Segmentation of business markets

A Market segment is a subgroup of people or organizations sharing one or more characteristics that cause them to have similar product needs. There are many other definitions with words of the same effect; most of which do not take into the differences between companies within a specific segment. Every company wants to differentiate itself from competitors. Therefore, any marketing stimulus needs to be specific to a time and situation, and perhaps even to the target of the company. This is also true in business markets. Despite the many changes, the underlying criteria remain the same, e.g. geography, culture, industry, size, technology position, buying strategy, business models, etc. The challenge is in the patterns and combinations of these criteria, plus in the accelerated rate of change, which require more dynamic and flexible segmentation models. Segmentation is one of the most important concepts in business markets. It is the basis whereby market analysis and deeper understanding of customers can be developed into an organisational response that yields Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 323

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

sustainable competitive advantage. The ‘what’ and ‘why’ of segmentation provides strong justification for its practice. Criteria for Business Market Segmentation: The following three criteria are critical in segmenting business markets: Measurability: Unless the segment is measurable, the scheme will not be operational. While this would be an absolute ideal, its implementation can be very difficult in some markets. The first barrier is, it often necessitates field research, which is expensive and time-consuming. Second, it is impossible to accurate strategic data on a large number of business customers. Third, if gathered, the analysis of the data can be daunting task. These barriers lead most companies to use more qualitative and intuitive methods in measuring customer data, and more persuasive methods while selling, hoping to compensate for the gap of accurate data measurement. Substantiality: i.e. “the variable should be relevant to a substantial group of customers”. The challenge here is finding the right size or balance. If the group gets too large, there is a risk of diluting effectiveness; and if the group becomes too small, the company will loose the benefits of economies of scale. Also, there are often very large customers that provide a large portion of a suppliers business. These single customers are sometimes distinctive enough to justify constituting a segment on their own. This scenario is often observed in industries which are dominated by a small number of large companies, e.g. aircraft manufacturing, automotive, turbines, printing machines and paper machines. Operational relevance to marketing strategy: Segmentation should enable a company to offer the suitable operational offering to the chosen segment, e.g. faster delivery service, credit payment facility, 24-hour technical service, etc. This can only be applied by companies with sufficient Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 324

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

operational resources. For example, just-in-time delivery requires highly efficient and sizeable logistics operations, whereas supply-on-demand would need large inventories, tying down the supplier’s capital. Combining the two within the same company - e.g. for two different segments - would stretch the company’s resources. Models for Business Market Segmentation One of the recommended approaches in segmentation is for a company to decide whether it wants to have a limited number of products offered to many segments or many products offered to a limited number of segments. Businesses are encouraged not to offer many product lines to many segments, as this would dilute their focus and stretch their resources too much. Yet this happens relatively often in practice, which hints to the question, to what extent the recommended models realistic. Two-Stage Market Segmentation (Wind & Cardozo Model) Yoram Wind and Richard Cardozo (1974) suggested industrial market segmentation

based

on

broad

two-step

classifications

of

macro-

segmentation and micro-segmentation. This model is one the most common methods applied in industrial markets today. It is sometimes extended into more complex models to include multi-step and three- and four-dimensional models. Macro-segmentation centers on the characteristics of the buying organisation, thus dividing the market using following criteria: – Company / organisation size: one of the most practical and easily identifiable criteria, it can also be good rough indicator of the potential business for a company. However, it needs to be combined with other factors to draw a realistic picture. – Geographic location is equally as feasible as company size. It tells a company a lot about culture and communication requirements. For Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 325

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

example a company would adapt a different bidding strategy with an Asian company than an American customer. Geographic location also relates to culture, language and business attitudes. For example, North Indian, South Indian, etc. normally have different sets of business standards and communication requirements. –

Industry classification can be a good indicator for application-based segmentation. However it is based only on relatively standard and basic industries, and product or service classifications such as sheet metal production, springs manufacturing, construction machinery, etc. Many industries that use a number of different technologies or have innovative products are classified under the ‘other’ category, which does not bring much benefit if these form the customer base.

– Purchasing situation, i.e. new task, modified re-buy or straight re-buy. This is another relatively theoretical and unused criterion in real life. As a result of increased competition and globalisation in most established industries, companies tend to find focus in a small number of markets, get to know the market well and establish long-term relationship with customers. The general belief is, it is cheaper to keep an existing customer than to find a new one. When this happens, the purchase criteria are more based on relationship, trust, technology and overall cost of purchase, which dilutes the importance of these criteria. –

Decision-making stage. This criterion can only apply to newcomers. In cases of long-term relationship, which is usually the objective of most industrial businesses, the qualified supplier is normally aware of the purchase requirement, i.e. they always get into the bidding process right at the beginning. Sheth and Sharma have suggested “with increasing turbulence in the marketplace, it is clear that firms have to move away


Page No. 326

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

from transaction-oriented marketing strategies and move towards relationship-oriented marketing for enhanced performance”. –

Benefit segmentation: The product’s economic value to the customer, which is one of the more helpful criteria in some industries. It “recognises that customers buy the same products for different reasons, and place different values on particular product features. For example, the access control industry markets the same products for two different value sets: Banks, factories and airports install them for security reasons, i.e. to protect their assets against. However, sports stadiums, concert arenas and the London Underground installs similar equipment in order to generate revenue and/or cut costs by eliminating manual ticket handling.

–

Type of institution: for example, banks would require designer furniture for their customers while government departments would suffice with functional and durable sets. Hospitals would require higher hygiene criteria while buying office equipment than utilities. And airport terminals would need different degrees of access control and security monitoring than shopping centres. However, type of buying institution and the decision-making stage can only work on paper. As institutional buyers cut procurement costs, they are forced to reduce the number of suppliers, with whom they develop long-term relationships. This makes the buying institution already a highly experienced one and the suppliers are normally involved at the beginning of the decision-making process. This eliminates the need to apply these two items as segmentation criteria.

–

Customers’ business potential assuming supply can be guaranteed and prices are acceptable by a particular segment. For example, ‘global s’ would buy high quantities and are prepared to sign long-term


Page No. 327

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

agreements; ‘key s’ medium-sized regional customers that can be the source of 30% of a company’s revenue as long as competitive offering is in place for them; ‘direct s’ form many thousands of small companies that buy mainly ob price but in return are willing to forego service. – Purchasing strategies, for example, global vs. local decision-making structure, decision-making power of purchasing officers vs. engineers or technical specialists. – Supply Chain Position: A customer’ business model affects where and how they buy. If he pursues a cost leadership strategy, then the company is more likely to be committed to high-volume manufacturing, thus requiring high-volume purchasing. To the supplier, this means constant price pressure and precise delivery but relatively long-term business security, e.g. in the commodities markets. But if the company follows a differentiation strategy, then it is bound to offer customised products and services to its customers. This would necessitate specialised high-quality products from the supplier, which are often purchased in low volumes, which mostly eliminates stark price competition, emphasises on functionality and requires relationshipbased marketing mix. Micro-segmentation Micro-segmentation on the other hand requires a higher degree of knowledge. While macro-segmentation put the business into broad categories, helping a general product strategy, micro-segmentation is essential for the implementation of the concept. “Micro-segments are homogenous groups of buyers within the macro-segments”. Macrosegmentation without micro-segmentation cannot provide the expected benefits to the organisation. Micro-segmentation focuses on factors that Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 328

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

matter in the daily business. The most common criteria include the characteristics of the decision-making units within each macro-segment, for example: –

Buying decision criteria (product quality, delivery, technical , price, supply continuity). “The marketer might divide the market based on supplier profiles that appear to be preferred by decision-makers, e.g. high quality – prompt delivery – price vs. standard quality – less-prompt delivery – low price”.

– Purchasing strategy, which falls into two categories: First, there are companies who familiar suppliers (some have vendor lists) and place the order with the first supplier that fulfils the buying criteria. These tend to include more OEM’s than public sector buyers. Second, organisations that consider a larger number of familiar and unfamiliar suppliers, solicit bids, examine all proposals and place the order with the best offer. Experience has shown that considering this criterion as part of the segmentation principles can be highly beneficial, as the supplier can avoid unnecessary costs by, for example not spending time and resources unless officially approved in the buyer’s vendor list. – Structure of the decision-making unit can be one of the most effective criteria. Knowing the decision-making process has been shown to make the difference between winning and losing a contract. If this is the case, the supplier can develop a suitable relationship with the person / people that has / have real decision-making power. For example, the medical equipment market can be segmented on the basis of the type of institution and the responsibilities of the decision makers. A Company that sells protective coatings for human implants would adapt a totally different

communication

strategy

for

doctors

than

hip-t

manufacturers. Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 329

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

– Perceived importance of the product to the customer’s business (e.g. automotive transmission, or peripheral equipment, e.g. manufacturing tool) – Attitudes towards the supplier: Personal characteristics of buyers (age, education, job-title and decision style) play a major role in forming the customers purchasing attitude as whole. Is the decision-maker a partner, er, neutral, adversarial or an opponent? Industrial power systems are best “sold” to engineering executive than purchasing managers; industrial coatings are sold almost exclusively to engineers; matrix and raw materials are sold normally to purchasing managers or even via web auctions. The above criteria can be highly beneficial depending on the type of business. However, they may be feasible to measure only in high-capital, high-expense businesses such as corporate banking or aircraft business due to high cost associated with compiling the desired data. There are serious concerns in practice regarding the cost and difficulty of collecting measurements of these micro-segmentation characteristics and using them. The

prerequisite to

implementing a full-scale macro-

and micro-

segmentation concept is the company’s size and the organisational set-up. A company needs to have beyond the certain number of customers for a segmentation model to work. Smaller companies would not need a formal segmentation model as they know their customers in person. Nested Approach to Segmentation (Bonoma & Shapiro Model) Taking the Wind & Cardozo model, Bonoma & Shapiro extended this into a multi-step approach in 1984. As the application of all the criteria recommended by Wind and Cardozo and subsequent scholars who expanded upon their two-stage theory became increasingly difficult due to Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 330

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

the complexity of modern businesses, Bonoma and Shapiro suggest that the same / similar criteria be applied in multi-process manner to allow flexibility to marketers in selecting or avoiding the criteria as suited to their businesses. They proposed the use of the following five general segmentation criteria which they arranged in a nester hierarchy: i. Demographics: industry, company size, customer location. ii. Operating variables: company technology, product/brand use status, customer capabilities. iii. Purchasing approaches: purchasing function, power structure, buyer-seller relationships, purchasing policies, purchasing criteria. iv. Situational factors: urgency of order, product application, size of order. v. Buyers’ personal characteristics: character, approach. The idea was that the marketers would move from the outer nest toward the inner, using as many nests as necessary.

As a result this model has

become one of the most adapted in the market, rivaling the Wind & Cardozo model. One of the problems with the nested approach is that there is no clear-cut distinction between purchasing approaches, situational factors and demographics. Bonoma and Shapiro are aware of these overlaps and suggest that the nested approach is intended to be used “flexibly with a good deal of managerial judgment”. Self Assessment Questions II State whether the following statements are true or false: 1. Private companies are particularly likely to utilize elaborate competitive tendering processes due to the expectation that, they should be seen at al times to be responsibly and ably spending public monies.


Page No. 331

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

2. A reverse auction is a type of auction in which the role of the buyer and seller are reversed, with the primary objective to drive purchase prices downward. 3. Supply Chain Management spans all movement and storage of raw materials, work-in-process inventory, and finished goods from point-oforigin to point-of-consumption. 4. A modified re-buy is the purchase of standard parts; maintenance, repair, and operating items and supplies; or any recurring need that is handled on a routine basis. 5. The size of the organisation not only determines the customer’s potential purchase volume but also the sophistication of the buying process. 6. Personal characteristics of buyers (age, education, job-title and decision style) play a major role in forming the customers purchasing attitude as whole.

10.8

Summary

In this unit we learnt about the Business buyer Behaviour and the decision making process. We studied the Nature of business buying Behaviour & also Business buying process including Information Gathering, Supplier , Background Review, Negotiation, Fulfillment, Consumption, Maintenance and Disposal and finally Renewal. We also understood the concept of a Buying Centre & the Different Types of Business buying like Competitive tendering,

Non-tender purchasing, Reverse Auction, Purchasing Cards

and Supply chain management. We also learnt about the Factors influencing business buying Behaviour including Situation Specific Factors & also the Organisation Specific Factors. We also touched upon the Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 332

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

Segmentation of business markets and the Criteria for Business Market Segmentation. We also studied a few Models for Business Market Segmentation.

10.9

Terminal Questions

1. What are the seven steps in the business buying process? Please explain each of them in one or two sentences. 2. What is a Buying Centre? Who are its ? 3. Explain the meaning of Reverse Auction and describe how it is conducted. 4. List out the four organisation specific factors, which affect businessbuying behaviour. 5. Which are the three critical factors, which are critical in segmenting business markets? Describe each of them briefly.

10.10 Answers to SAQs and TQs SAQI 1. buying center 2. Buyer 3. Gatekeeper SAQII 1. False 2. True 3. True 4. False 5. True 6. True Sikkim Manipal University

Page No. 333

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

TQ 1. Refer Section 10.3 2. Refer Section 10.4 3. Refer Section 10.5 4. Refer Section 10.6 5. Refer Section 10.7


Page No. 334

Consumer Behaviour

Unit 10

References: 1. Marketing Management 12th Edition by Kotler & Keller 2. Customer Behaviour – A Management Perspective by Sheth & Mittal 3. Consumer Behaviour by Schiffman & Kanuk 4. Consumer Behaviour – Building Marketing Strategy by Hawkins, Best, Coney & Mookerjee 5. Consumer Behaviour – A Strategic Approach by Henry Assael


Page No. 335

Notes Of Consumer-behaviour 372w52

Overview 3e4r5l

More details w3441

Related Documents 3m3m1z

Notes Of Soft Computing 4v5o1f

Notes Of Sports u3a3t

Preparation Of Cabinet Notes 4m5440

Transcript Of Stenographic Notes 5v352b

Nature Of Auditing Notes 6f1h5e

Notes Of System Programming 5f6550

More Documents from "Rajat Nitika Verma" x2f6x

Notes Of Consumer-behaviour 372w52

Document Shopping Mall 1w6353

Manufacturing Process Management.pdf 2a4h3y

L. Lab Manual - Pspd (2180903) 251j3u

Fm Radio Receiver 362v5z

German Days Mumbai 2.0 - Partnership Opportunities 2018 2j73g